1 


Route   No.    57 
Sections  Nos,   1  and   2 


PUBLIC    SERVICE    COMMISSION 

FOR    THE    FIRST    DISTRICT 


SPECIFICATIONS 

FOR 

Construction   of 

UTICA  AVENUE 

RAPID  TRANSIT   RAILROAD 

ROUTE  No.  57 
SECTIONS  Nos.  1  and  2 


LlC25-500-J}iu.'17(T) 


(J,    PUBLIC    SERVICE    COMMISSION 

FOR    THE    FIRST    DISTRICT 


SPECIFICATIONS 

FOR 

Construction    of 

UTICA  AVENUE 

KAPLD  TRANSIT   RAILROAD 

ROUTE  No.  57 
SECTIONS  Nos.  1  and  2 


/04 


7T 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOR    CONSTRUCTION    OF    UTICA 
AVENUE  RAPID  TRANSIT  RAILROAD 

SECTION  Xo.  i.  These  specifications  are  for  the  construction 
of  the  Utica  Avenue  Rapid  Transit  Railroad,  which  is  to  begin  at 
a  point  under  Eastern  Parkway,  in  the  Borough  of  Brooklyn, 
about  two  hundred  and  five  (205)  feet  west  of  the  westerly  build- 
ing line  of  Utica  Avenue  and  is  to  curve  thence  southerly  under 
Eastern  Parkway  into  Utyca  Avenue  and  is  to  extend  thence  south- 
erly under,  along  and  over  Utica  Avenue  to  a  point  about  twenty 
( 20 )  feet  south  of  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  westerly  build- 
ing line  of  Utica  Avenue  and  the  northerly  building  line  of  Flat- 
bush  Avenue.  The  said  Railroad  is  to  be  partly  a  subsurface  rai1- 
road  having  two  tracks,  partly  a  reinforced  concrete  railroad  in 
open  cut  and  embankment  having  two  tracks  and  partly  an  elevated 
railroad  having  three  tracks.  The  detailed  plans  for  the  construc- 
tion of  said  Railroad  are  described  in  Section  No.  2. 

SECTION  No.  2.  For  convenience  in  preparing  the  detailed 
plans  for  the  construction  of  said  Railroad  the  said  Railroad  has 
been  divided  into  two  parts  to  be  known  respectively  as  Section 
No.  i  and  Section  No.  2.  Section  No.  i  begins  at  a  point  under 
Eastern  Parkway  about  two  hundred  and  five  (205)  feet  west  of 
the  westerly  building  line  of  Utica  Avenue  and  curves  thence 
southerly  under  Eastern  Parkway  into  Utica  Avenue  and  extends 
thence  southerly  under,  along  and  over  Utica  Avenue  to  a  point 
about  two  hundred  and  thirty  (230)  feet  south  of  the  southerly 
building  line  of  Clarendon  Road.  Section  No.  2  begins  at  a  point 
over  Utica  Avenue  about  two  hundred  and  thirty  (230)  feet  south 
of  the  southerly  building  line  of  Clarendon  Road  and  extends 
thence  southerly  over  Utica  Avenue  to  a  point  about  twenty  (20) 
feet  south  of  the  point  of  intersection  of  the  westerly  building  line 
of  Utica  Avenue  and  the  northerly  building  line  of  Flatbush 
Avenue. 

The  detailed  plans  for  Section  No.  i  bear  the  general  title : 


*»**  •*•  r*c"  SPECIFICATIONS 

DETAILED    PLANS 
FOR  CONSTRUCTION  OF  UTICA  AVENUE 

RAPID    TRANSIT    RAILROAD 

ROUTE   NO.   57— SECTION   NO.   1 

DRAWING    NO. 

and  are  designated  and  numbered  as  follows : 

A- 1  to  A-5  inclusive,  B-386  to  3-389  inclusive,  C-i  to  €-27 
inclusive,  F-5OI  to  F-524  inclusive,  F-524A,  F-525  to  F-536  inclu- 
sive, C-6oi  to  0609  inclusive  and  T-i  to  7-6  inclusive,  7-iooi-4, 
7-ICO2-3,  7-1003-4,  7-1004-1,  7-100573,  7-1006-5,  7-1007-2, 
7-1008-3,  7-1011-4,  7-1012-4,  7-1013-4,  7-1015-4,  7-ioi8-2, 
7-1021-4,  7-1024-2,  7-1026-1,  7-1030-1,  7-1032-2,  7-1033-2, 
7-1035-2,  7-1039-1,  7-1045-1,  7-1046-2,  7-1048-2,  7-1050-3, 
7-1051-3,  7-1053-1,  7-1054-1,  7-1055-1,  7-io6o-7,  7-1061-3, 
7-1069-1,  7-1070-1,  7-HO2-2,  7-1115-4,  7- 1 1 18-4,  7- 1 1 20-4, 
7-1140-1,  7-1145-2,  7-1148-1,  7-1165-4,  7-i  168-3,  7-1170-3, 
and  are  dated  February  25,  1916. 

7he  detailed  plans  for  Section  No.  2  bear  the  general  title : 

DETAILED    PLANS 
FOR  CONSTRUCTION  OF  UTICA  AVENUE 

RAPID   TRANSIT   RAILROAD 

ROUTE  NO.  57— SECTION  NO.  2 

DRAWING    NO. 

and  are  designated  and  numbered  as  follows : 

A-6  to  A-n,  inclusive,  C-28  to  €-48,  inclusive,  F-537  to  F-568 
inclusive,  F-568A,  F-569  to  F-58o,  inclusive,  C-6io,  7-7  to  7-13, 
inclusive,  7-iooi-4,  7-1002-3,  7-1003-4,  7-1004-1,  7-1005-3. 
7-1006-5,  7-1007-2,  7.-ioo8-3,  7-IOH-4,  T- 1012-4,  7-1013-4, 
7-1015-4,  7-ioi8-2,  7-1021-4,  7-1024-2,  7-1026-1,  7-1028-1, 
7-1030-1,  7-1032-2,  7-1033-2,  7-1035-2,  7-1039-1,  7-1045-1. 
7-1046-2,  7-1048-2,  7-1053-1,  7-1054-1,  7-1055-1,  7-1060-7, 
7-1061-3,  7-1069-1,  7-1070-1,  7-HO2-2,  7-1113-3,  7-1116-4, 
7-1118-4,  7-1126-3,  7-1140-1,  7-1146-2,  7-1148-1,  7-1166-4, 
7-1168-3,  7-1176-2,  and  are  dated  March  25,  1916. 

SECTION  No.  3.  7he  following  words  and  expressions  used 
in  these  specifications  shall,  except  where  by  the  context  it  is 
clear  that  another  meaning  is  intended,  be  construed  as  f ol- 
io v\  s : 


SPECIFICATIONS 

I.  The  word  "City"  to  mean  The  City  of  New  York  and 
any  other  corporation  or  division  of  government  to  which  the 
ownership,  rights,  powers  and  privileges  of  The  City  of  New 
York  under  the  Rapid  Transit  Act  (being  Chapter  4  of  the  Laws 
of  1891  as  amended)  shall  hereafter  come,  belong  or  appertain. 

2.  The   word    "Commission"    to   mean    the    Public    Service 
Commission   for  the  First   District  and  any  other  board,  body, 
commission,  official  or  officials  to  which  or  to  whom  the  powers 
now  belonging  to  the  said  Commission  in  respect  of  the  location, 
construction,    equipment,   maintenance   and   operation   of    Rapid 
Transit  Railroads  under  the  provisions  of  the  Rapid  Transit  Act 
shall,  by  virtue  of  any  act  or  acts,  hereafter  pass  or  be  held  t:> 
appertain. 

3.  The  word  "Contractor"  to  mean  any  and  every  person, 
firm  or  corporation  contracting  to  build  the  Railroad  or  any  part 
thereof  and  any  successor,  executor,  administrator  and  assign  and 
any  and  every  other  person,  firm  or  corporation  who  or  which 
shall  at  any  time  be  liable  in  the  place  or  for  any  such  person,  firm 
or   corporation   contracting  to   build   the   Railroad   or   any   part 
thereof.     For  convenience  the  Contractor  is  hereinafter  referred 
to  as  if  the  Contractor  were  an  individual.    The  word  "he"  shall, 
as  the  sense  may  require,  include  "she",  "it"  and  "they" ;  the  word 
"him"  shall  include  "her",  "it"  and  "them" ;  and  the  word  "his" 
shall  include  "her",  "its"  and  "their". 

4.  The   word   "Engineer"   to  mean  the   Chief   Engineer  or 
Acting  Chief  Engineer,  for  the  time  being,  o,f  the  Commission  or 
his  duly  authorized  representative  and  any  successor  or  successors 
duly  appointed  or  any  deputy  or  substitute  for  him  who  shall  be 
appointed  by  the  Commission  or  by  its  authority. 

5.  The  word  "Inspector"  to  mean  any  representative  of  the 
Engineer  designated  by  him  to  act  as  inspector. 

6.  The  word   "Railroad"   to  mean  the   said   Utica  Avenue 
Rapid  Transit  Railroad  with  its  appurtenances  which  the  Con- 
tractor is  to  construct. 

7.  The  word  "Works"  to  mean  all  the  matters  and  things 
to  be  furnished  or  done  by  or  on  the  part  of  the  Contractor. 

8.  The  word  "notice"  to  mean  a  written  notice.     Wherever 


SPECIFICATIONS 

in  the  specifications  or  upon  the  drawings  the  words  "directed", 
"required",  ''permitted",  "ordered",  "designated",  "prescribed", 
or  words  of  like  import  are  used,  it  shall  be  understood  that  the 
tiirection,  requirement,  permission,  order,  designation  or  pre- 
scription of  the  Engineer  is  intended,  and  similarly  the  words 
"approved",  "acceptable",  "satisfactory"  or  words  of  like  import 
shall  mean  approved  by  or  acceptable  or  satisfactory  to  the  Engi- 
neer. 

9.  The  word  "drawings"  to  mean  and  include  the  detailed 
plans  for  the  Railroad  mentioned  in  Section  No.  2  of  these  speci- 
fications and  any  working  plans  or  drawings  for  the  Railroad 
which  may  be  issued  by  the  Commission  or  by  its  authority. 

SECTION  No.  4.  The  Railroad  is  to  be  constructed  for  actual 
use  and  operation  as  an  intraurban  railroad  of  the  highest  class 
adapted  to  the  necessities  of  the  people  of  New  York  in  the  best 
manner,  according  to  the  best  rules  and  usages  of  railroad  con- 
struction, and  in  the  event  of  any  doubt  as  to  the  meaning  of  any 
portion  of  these  specifications  or  of  said  detailed  plans,  the 
same  shall  be  interpreted  as  calling  for  the  best  construction,  both 
as  to  materials  and  workmanship,  capable  of  being  supplied  or 
applied.  All  the  clauses  of  these  specifications  and  all  parts  of 
said  detailed  plans  are,  therefore,  to  be  understood,  construed 
and  interpreted  as  intending  to  produce  the  results  hereinbefore 
stated. 

SECTION  No.  5.  -These  specifications  and  said  detailed  plans 
are  intended  to  be  explanatory  of  each  other  and  to  co-operate. 
Any  work  shown  on  said  detailed  plans  but  not  mentioned  in  these 
specifications  and  any  work  mentioned  in  these  specifications  but 
not  shown  on  said  detailed  plans  is  to  be  done  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  if  mentioned  in  these  specifications  and  set  forth  on  said 
detailed  plans  to  the  true  intent  and  meaning  of  said  detailed 
plans  and  these  specifications  or  either  of  them. 

SECTION  No.  9.  These  specifications  are  grouped  in  subdivi- 
sions as  follows: 


SPECIFICATIONS 

GENERAL    PROVISIONS 

PAGE 

1  Brief  Description  of  the  Work 7 

2  General  Clauses    9 

3  General    Manner   of    Prosecution   and   Maintenance   of 

Traffic   16 

PART  FIRST— GENERAL  CONSTRUCTION 

4  Street  Railroad  Tracks,  Mains  and  Other  Surface,  Sub- 

surface and  Overhead  Structures 18 

5  Excavation   23 

6  Backfilling   28 

7  Piling  and  Timbering 29 

8  Cement 30 

9  Mortar   33 

10  Masonry 34 

1 1  Concrete 36 

12  Brick  Masonry 41 

1 3  Stone  Masonry 43 

14  Waterproofing 44 

1 5  Steel  and  Iron 49 

16  Painting 58 

17  Drains  and  Pumps 6$ 

1 8  Sewers   t 67 

19  Requirements  for  Pipes 81 

20  Railroad  Ducts   88 

22  Surfaces  Restored 91 

23  Gratings    95 

24  Reinforced  Concrete  Elevated  Railroad  .  .  . 96 

PART  SECOND— STATION  FINISH  WORK 

1  General   99 

2  Tile   100 

3  Plastering  and  Metal  Lath 102 

4  Asphalt  and  Cement  Floors,  Bases  and  Coves 103 

5  Concrete  Work 106 

6  Woodwork 108 

7  Ornamental  Iron  and  Steel  Work.  . 119 

8  Sheet  Metal  Work 129 


SPECIFICATIONS 

PAGE 

9     Hardware   134 

10  Plumbing  and  Drainage   139 

1 1  Plumbing  Fixtures   145 

12  Structural  Glass,  Slate  and  Fittings  in  Toilets 148 

13  Electric  Work 150 

14  Painting    1 53 

PART  THIRD— TRACK  WORK 

1  Open  Hearth  Rail 167 

2  Rolled  Manganese  Rail 173 

3  Track  Rail  Splice  Bars 177 

4  Tie   Plates 3$?;j  -  - '•'-•''••  Ov- -  :  178 

5  Cut  Track  Spikes 179 

6  Screw  Spikes  and  Lag  Screws 181 

7  Treated  and  Untreated  Ties  and  Timbers 183 

8  Bolts,  Nuts  and  Rivets /.- . :  .V.  .  189 

9  Nut  Locks  or  Lock  Washers 191 

1 1  Anti-creepers    192 

12  Ballast    193 

13  Special  Work    195 

14  Malleable   Iron    203 

1 5  Gray  Cast  Iron  204 

16  Cast  Manganese   205 

17  Installation  of  All  Types  of  Tracks '.  .  .  .  206 

18  Installation  of  Type  I  Track 213 

20     Installation  of  Type  III  Track 214 

24     Installation  of  Special  Work 220 


GENERAL    PROVISIONS 

SUBDIVISION  1 
BRIEF  DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  WORK 

SECTION  No.  10.  The  Railroad  is  to  be  partly  a  two-track 
underground  railroad  or  subway,  partly  a  two-track  reinforced 
concrete  railroad  in  open  cut  and  embankment  between  retaining 
walls  and  partly  a  three-track  elevated  railroad. 

SECTION  No.  n.  In  order  to  construct  the  Railroad  it  will  be 
necessary  to  take  up  and  relay  the  sidewalk  and  roadway  pave- 
ment or  other  surface  material  and  to  protect,  support  and  main- 
tain all  buildings  and  other  structures,  including  their  foundations, 
and  all  railroads,  water  mains,  gas  pipes,  electric  subways,  poles 
and  wires,  vaults,  including  vaults  of  abutting  property,  and  other 
surface,  subsurface  and  overhead  structures  with  their  appurte- 
nances and  connections,  as  the  same  may  be  met  along  the  route ; 
to  build  sewers  both  along  the  route  and  other  streets;  to  make 
or  remake  the  necessary  manholes,  catch  basins  and  other  sewer 
connections  therewith;  to  move,  alter,  readjust  or  rebuild  water 
mains,  gas  pipes,  electric  subways,  poles  and  wires,  vaults,  in- 
cluding vaults  of  abutting  property,  and  other  surface,  subsurface 
and  overhead  structures  with  their  appurtenances  and  connections  ; 
to  maintain,  protect,  support  and  preserve  in  place  certain  of  the 
trees  in  Eastern  Parkway  (including  a  certain  amount  of  soil 
around  and  under  the  trees)  ;  and  to  do  all  such  additional  and 
incidental  work  as  may  be  necessary  for  the  completion  of  the 
Railroad  and  the  reconstruction  and  restoration  of  the  street 
pavements  and  other  surfaces  and  of  all  surface,  subsurface  and 
overhead  structures  and  of  all  abutting  property  and  buildings 
which  may  have  been  affected,  disturbed  or  injured  by  the 
Contractor  in  the  progress  of  the  work  of  construction  to  as 
useful,  safe,  durable  and  good  a  condition  as  existed  before  con- 
struction was  begun.  All  such  work  of  every  description,  includ- 
ing the  maintaining,  protecting  and  securing  wherever  necessary 
of  all  buildings  and  structures  of  whatsoever  nature,  monuments, 
and  railroads  affected  by  or  interfered  with  during  the  construc- 
tion of  the  Railroad,  is  part  of  the  work  which  the  Contractor  is 
to  perform. 

SECTION  No.  12.  In  order  to  provide  for  a  frequent  renewal 
of  air  in  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad,  a  chamber  for 
the  installation  of  necessary  ventilating  devices  shall  be  built  in 
connection  therewith.  This  chamber  shall  be  generallv  of  the 


SPECIFICATIONS BRIEF    DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    WORK 

form  and  dimensions  shown  on  the  drawings,  varying  somewhat 
with  the  requirements  of  local  conditions.  It  will  be  so  arranged 
that  the  air  will  discharge  through  gratings  placed  in  the  sidewalk 
in  the  roof  of  the  chamber.  If,  owing  to  local  conditions,  it 
becomes  necessary  to  lead  the  air  to  gratings  or  other  outlets 
away  from  the  chamber,  suitable  air-ways,  ducts  or  flues  shall  be 
constructed.  The  chamber  will  be  built  at  the  place  and  as  indi- 
cated on  the  drawings.  The  chamber  will  be  provided  with  suit- 
able steel  doors  and  with  steel  ladders  reaching  to  the  street  for 
use  as  exits  in  case  of  emergency. 

Also  in  connection  with  the  ventilation  of  the  subsurface  por- 
tion of  the  Railroad  partition  walls  shall  be  constructed  between 
the  tracks  where  required  by  the  Commission.  Openings  or 
refuge  niches  shall  be  provided  in  all  partition  walls  at  suitable 
intervals. 

SECTION  No.  i2-a.  The  Contractor  will  be  required  to  install 
electric  ground  connections  to  the  Railroad  structure  about  every 
half  mile.  Each  ground  connection  shall  consist  of  a  two  (2) 
inch  galvanized  iron  pipe  sixteen  (16)  feet  long,  driven  its  entire 
length  into  the  ground  close  to  an  elevated  column.  The  upper 
four  (4)  feet  of  the  pipe  shaU.be  surrounded  with  charcoal  for  a 
distance  of  six  (6)  inches  from  the  pipe.  The  upper  end  of 
the  pipe  shall  be  firmly  connected  both  electrically  and  me- 
chanically to  the  base  of  the  elevated  column  by  a  copper  cable 
of  five  hundred  thousand  (500,000)  C.  M.  section.  The  cable 
shall  be  installed  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  protected  against 
physical  injury.  No  insulation  is  necessary  for  the  cable. 

In  lieu  of  the  above  ground  connection,  the  Contractor 
shall,  if  required  by  the  Commission,  install  an- electric  connec- 
tion between,  the  Railroad  and  the  adjacent  rail  of  the  street 
surface  railroad.  This  connection  shall  consist  of  a  copper 
cable  of  five  hundred  thousand  (500,000)  C.  M.  section,  car- 
ried in  a  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inch  galvanized  iron  pipe  pro- 
tected by  a  three  (3)  inch  covering  of  concrete  and  firmly 
connected  both  electrically  and  mechanically,  in  an  approved 
manner,  to  the  base  of  the  elevated  column  and  to  the  rail  of 
the  street  surface  railroad.  The  cable  shall  be  installed  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  be  protected  against  physical  injury. 

The  Contractor  shall  do  such  filling  between  the  outside 
walls  of  the  reinforced  concrete  elevated  railroad  as  may  be 
necessary  to  form  the  subgrade  of  the  Railroad.  All  the  above 
filling  shall  be  of  the  character  and  placed  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed in  Subdivision  6  for  backfilling. 

8 


SUBDIVISION  2 
GENERAL  CLAUSES 

SECTION  No.  13.  It  is  the  very  essence  of  these  specifications 
to  secure  a  railroad  structure  which  (except  the  elevated  por- 
tion) shall  be  free  from  the  percolation  of  ground  or  out- 
side water.  The  mixing  and  placing  of  the  concrete  and  the 
placing  and  protection  of  the  waterproofing  shall  be  with  this 
end  in  view. 

SECTION  No.  14.  All  materials  and  workmanship  must  be  of 
the  best  class  in  every  respect,  and  the  Engineer  shall  be  the  sole 
judge  of  their  quality  and  efficiency. 

SECTION  No.  15.  All  the  work  shall  be  prosecuted  in  the 
manner,  according  to  local  conditions,  best  calculated  to  promote 
rapidity  in  construction,  to  secure  safety  to  life  and  property  and 
to  reduce  to  the  minimum  any  interference  with  abutting  prop- 
erty and  the  public  travel.  Decking  of  the  streets,  paving,  or 
other  surface  work  affecting,  or  affected  by,  street  traffic  shall  be 
prosecuted  during  such  hours  as  will  reduce  such  interference 
to  a  minimum.  Night  work  shall  be  conducted,  in  accordance 
with  the  directions  of  the  Commission,  so  that  annoyance  to  occu- 
pants of  abutting  property  shall  be  reduced  to  a  minimum,  and  the 
Commission  may,  if  in  its  judgment  conditions  so  require,  direct 
that  night  work  be  omitted. 

SECTION  No.  16.  If  the  Contractor  shall  not  prosecute  his 
work  in  such  manner  as  to  make  it  probable  in  the  judgment  of 
the  Engineer  that  the  work  will  be  completed  within  the  time 
prescribed  therefor,  the  Contractor,  if  directed  by  the  Commis- 
sion, shall  increase  the  number  of  shifts  and  the  number  of  men 
in  each  shift  to  such  extent  as  may  be  necessary  to  insure  the 
completion  of  the  work  within  the  time  prescribed  or  within  the 
shortest  possible  time  thereafter. 

SECTION  No.  17.  In  case  of  emergencies  involving  danger  to 
life  or  property,  continuous  work  with  an  increased  force  may 
be  ordered  by  fhe  Engineer  for  such  time  as  may  be  necessary. 

SECTION  No.  18.  No  work  shall  be  begun  until  the  Commis- 
sion through  the  Engineer  shall  issue  to  the  Contractor  a  permit 
authorizing  him  to  proceed.  No  permits  for  excavation  will  Le 


Sl'KCl  /  I  CAT  IONS CHNKRAL    CLAUSES 

issued  until  the  Contractor  has  given  satisfactory  assurance  to 
the  Engineer  that  the  structural  steel  and  other  material  needed 
for  construction  will  be  available.  The  Contractor  must  conduct 
his  work  so  as  to  avoid  advancing  the  excavation  for  the  sub- 
surface pcilion  of  the  Railroad  at  any  place  ahead  of  the  de-1 
livery  on  the  work  or  on  property  owned  or  leased  by  the  City 
of  the  structural  steel  required  for  such  place,  unless  otherwise 
permitted  by  the  Engineer.  If  the  Contractor  elects  and  is  per- 
mitted to  advance  the  excavation  ahead  of  such  steel  delivery  it 
will  become  necessary  for  him  to  support  and  maintain  the 
trenches  until  the  steel  can  be  obtained ;  this  he  shall  do  entirely 
at  his  own  risk.  The  permits  shall  be  in  such  form  and  shall 
cover  such  portions  of  the  work  as  the  Commission  shall  pre- 
scribe. 

SECTION  No.  19.  Before  any  opening  is  made  in  the  surface 
of  a  street,  a  copy  of  the  permit  issued  by  the  Commission  shall 
have  been  filed  with  the  Borough  President  not  less  than  five  (5) 
days  unless  the  Engineer  shall  expressly  direct  work  to  begin 
within  a  less  period. 

SECTION  No.  20.  At  least  one  (i)  week  before  commencing 
work  on  any  part  of  the  route,  whether  on  the  Railroad  or  on 
the  sewers  lying  off  the  line  of  the  Railroad,  the  Contractor 
shall  give  notice  in  writing  to  the  Engineer  of  his  intention 
to  commence  such  operations ;  and  at  least  one  ( I )  week  before 
(.ommencirg  or  resuming  manufacture  of  any  article  called 
for  by  these  specifications,  the  Contractor  shall  give  notice  in 
writing  to  the  Engineer  of  his  intention  to  commence  or  re- 
sume such  manufacture,  with  the  name  and  address  of  the 
maker  and  the  amount  and  description  of  the  material  to  be 
manufactured. 

SECTION  No.  22.  In  all  operations  connected  with  the  Works, 
all  ordinances  of  the  City  and  of  the  Board  of  Health  and  all 
laws  of  this  State  which  are  applicable  to  and  control  or  limit  in 
any  way  the  actions  of  those  engaged  in  the  work  or  affecting 
the  materials  belonging  to  or  used  by  them  shall  be  respected 
and  strictly  complied  with,  and  the  Contractor  shall  further  strict- 
ly comply  with  all  applicable  Federal,  State  and  Municipal  regula- 


IO 


SPECIFICATIONS GENERA!,    CLAUSES 

tions  regarding  the  transportation  of  materials  in  and  around  the 
City  and  Harbor  of  New  York. 

SECTION  No.  23.  Whenever  the  construction  of  the  Works 
shall  interfere  with,  disturb  or  endanger  any  sewer,  water  pipe, 
gas  pipe,  or  other  duly  authorized  subsurface  structure,  the  work 
of  construction  at  such  points  shall  be  conducted  in  accordance 
with  the  reasonable  requirements  of  the  Borough  President  or  of 
the  Commissioner  of  Water  Supply,  Gas  and  Electricity  or  other 
officer  or  local  authority  having  the  care  of  and  the  jurisdiction 
or  control  over  such  subsurface  structures  so  interfered  with, 
disturbed  or  endangered. 

SECTION  No.  24.  The  Contractor  shall  procure  all  permits 
necessary  or  requisite  for  the  underpinning  of  buildings  and  the 
reconstruction  thereof ;  he  shall  provide  for  the  water  supply 
necessary  for  his  work  and  any  inspection  in  connection  there- 
with. He  shall  provide  all  work,  labor  and  material  in  connec- 
tion with  bagging,  cutting  and  capping,  installing  circulation 
connections  and  temporary  drips  for  gas  pipes  where  in  the 
opinion  of  the  Engineer  it  is  necessary  to  cut  off  the  supply  of 
gas,  and  also  in  connection  with  replacing  and  restoring  such 
pipes  to  their  original  condition.  He  shall  also  provide  for  the 
shutting  off  and  restoration  of  the  flow  in  water  mains  where 
such  work  applies  to  the  maintenance  and  support  thereof  as  pro- 
vided in  Section  No.  59. 

SECTION  No.  25.  On  cross  streets  adjacent  to  the  subsurface 
portion  of  the  Railroad,  only  such  material  may  be  stored  as  may 
be  necessary,  in  case  of  an  emergency,  to  sheet  or  to  support  the 
excavation;  or  a  reasonable  amount  of  such  structural  and  other 
material  as  may  be  absolutely  necessary  to  avoid  delay  in  con- 
struction may  be  stored ;  such  material  must  not  be  allowed  to 
accumulate,  but  must  be  replenished  from  day  to  day.  The 
amount  to  be  so  allowed  shall  be  determined  by  the  Engineer. 
Such  material  shall  not  be  stored  along  the  streets  occupied  by 
the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad. 

SECTION  No.  26.  Along  the  streets  occupied  by  the  elevated 
portion  of  the  Railroad  and  on  cross  streets  adjacent  thereto, 

II 


SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL    CLAUSES 

only  a  reasonable  amount  of  such  structural  and  other  material 
as  may  be  absolutely  necessary  to  avoid  delay  in  construction  may 
be  stored ;  such  material  must  not  be  allowed  to  accumulate  but 
must  be  replenished  from  day  to  day.  The  amount  to  be  so  al- 
lowed shall  be  determined  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  27.  In  any  case  such  material  may  be  so  stored 
only  with  the  approval  of  the  Engineer,  revocable  at  any  time; 
and  if  so  ordered,  such  material  shall  be  removed  immediately 
by  the  Contractor  at  his  own  expense  on  receipt  of  the  order  or 
vvithin  a  period  of  time  to  be  therein  stated. 

SECTION  No.  28.  Wherever  the  work  is  being  carried  on, 
free  access  must  be  given  to  every  fire  hydrant  and  fire  alarm 
box,  and  when  required,  hydrants  shall  be  extended  by  suitable 
tube  or  piping  to  an  accessible  point  as  approved  by  the  Engineer 
and  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Chief  of  the  Fire  Department. 
Materials  must  not  be  piled  at  any  time  or  place  within  ten 
(10)  feet  of  any  fire  hydrant  or  fire  alarm  box;  and  where 
materials  are  unavoidably  piled  or  placed  in  the  vicinity  of  a 
fire  hydrant  or  fire  alarm  box,  and  to  such  height  as  to  prevent 
the  same  from  being  readily  seen,  the  position  of  such  hydrant 
or  fire  alarm  box  shall  be  indicated  by  suitable  signals,  both  day 
and  night. 

The  Contractor  shall  guard,  maintain  and  protect  the  wires, 
cables,  ducts,  manholes,  posts  and  poles,  signals  and  fire  alarm 
boxes  of  the  Fire  Department.  He  shall  not  cause  the  interrup- 
tion of  the  Fire  Department  Fire  Alarm  Telegraph  service.  No 
Fire  Department  wire,  cable,  duct,  manhole,  post  or  pole,  signal  or 
fire  alarm  box  shall  be  disturbed  except  in  the  presence  of  a 
representative  of  the  Bureau  of  Fire  Alarm  Telegraph.  In  case 
any  such  wire,  cable,  duct,  manhole,  post  or  pole,  signal  or  fire 
alarm  box  shall  be  disturbed,  it  shall  be  restored  to  its  original 
condition  by  the  Contractor. 

SECTION  No.  29.  The  Contractor  shall  keep  the  work,  streets 
and  all  public  places  occupied  by  him  clear  of  all  refuse  and  rub- 
bish that  may  accumulate  directly  or  indirectly  from  his  work  and 
shall  leave  them  in  a  neat  condition ;  but  this  is  in  no  way  to  be 
construed  as  placing  upon  the  Contractor  the  usual  duties  of  the 
Street  Cleaning  Department. 

12 


SPECIFICATIONS — GENERAL    CLAUSES 

SECTION  No.  30.  Where  access  to  any  adjacent  property 
is  temporarily  cut  off,  owing  to  the  occupancy  of  the  street 
by  the  Contractor,  he  must  render  every  assistance  to  the  owner 
or  occupant  in  handling  such  materials  of  any  description,  in- 
cluding all  material  to  be  removed  by  the  Department  of  Street 
Cleaning,  as  may  have  to  be  taken  to  or  removed  from  such 
property;  such  material  shall  be  taken  to  or  from  the  nearest 
accessible  point  that  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer  is  convenient 
for  handling. 

SECTION  No.  31.  Waste  material  of  any  character  will  under 
no  conditions  be  permitted  to  remain  on  the  streets,  but  must 
immediately  on  its  becoming  unfit  for  use  in  the  work  be  carted 
away  and  disposed  of  by  the  Contractor ;  nor  shall  such  materials 
be  allowed  to  accumulate  in  the  trenches. 

SECTION  No.  32.  Necessary  conveniences,  properly  secluded 
from  public  observation,  shall  be  constructed  and  maintaine  1 
by  the  Contractor  wherever  needed  for  the  use  of  his  employees, 
to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Engineer  and  the  sanitary  authorities. 

SECTION  No.  33.  The  Contractor  shall  during  the  perform- 
ance of  the  work  take  all  necessary  precautions  and  place  proper 
guards  and  fences  for  the  prevention  of  accidents  and  shall  put  up 
and  keep  at  night  suitable  and  sufficient  lights. 

SECTION  No.  34.  The  using  of  fences  and  buildings  during 
construction  for  advertising  purposes,  other  than  the  name  and 
address  of  the  Contractor,  is  forbidden;  all  temporary  buildings 
and  fences  erected  by  the  Contractor  shall  be  neat  in  appearance 
and  shall  be  painted  as  directed  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION   No.  35.     Barricades  and  bridges  shall  be  erected 

by  the  Contractor  where  necessary  for  the  protection  of  the  work 
or  use  of  the  public ;  they  shall  be  substantial  in  character  and 
neat  in  appearance.  , .  %-  . 

SECTION  No.  36.  The  Contractor  shall,  if  required  by  the 
Commission,  furnish  in  accordance  with  drawings  to  be  prepared 
1  v  the  Commission,  a  building  or  rooms  for  the  Engineer's  office 


SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL    CLAUSES 

at  a  place  to  be  determined  by  the  Commission,  together  with  the 
equipment  thereof,  such  as  lighting  and  heating  fixtures,  plumbing, 
instrument  racks,  lockers  and  such  other  facilities  as  may  be  re- 
quired by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  38.  During  the  progress  of  the  work  the  Com- 
mission will  give,  through  the  Engineer,  to  the  Contractor,  suit- 
able points,  marks  or  benches,  indicating  the  line  and  grade  of 
the  Railroad  and  of  the  sewers,  such  points  or  bench  marks  to 
be  established  at  such  intervals  as  the  Engineer  deems  necessary 
to  enable  the  Contractor  to  perform  his  work.  The  principal 
lines  and  grades  will  be  given  by  the  Engineer,  who  may  change 
them  from  time  to  time  as  may  be  authorized  and  directed  by  the 
Commission.  The  stakes  and  marks  given  by  the  Engineer  shall 
be  carefully  preserved  by  the  Contractor,  who  shall  give  to  the 
Engineer  all  necessary  assistance  and  facilities  for  establishing 
benches  and  plugs  and  for  making  measurements. 

SECTION  No.  39.  Orders  and  directions  may  be  given  orally 
by  the  Engineer  to,  and  shall  be  received  and  promptly  obeyed 
by,  the  Contractor  or  his  representative  or  any  superintendent, 
overseer  or  foreman  of  the  Contractor  who  may  have  charge-  of 
the  particular  work  in  relation  to  which  the  orders  or  directions 
are  given,  and  a  confirmation  in  writing  of  such  orders  or  direc- 
tions will  be  given  to  the  Contractor  by  the  Engineer  if  so  re- 
quested. The  Contractor  or  his  duly  authorized  representative 
shall  be  present  at  all  times  on  the  work  to  receive  orders  and 
directions  from  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  40.  Any  imperfect  construction  which  may 
be  discovered  before  the  final  acceptance  of  the  work  shall 
be  corrected  immediately  upon  the  requirement  of  the  Engineer, 
notwithstanding  that  it  may  have  been  overlooked  by  the  In- 
spector. 

SECTION  No.  41.  All  work  of  whatever  kind  which  during  its 
progress  and  before  its  final  acceptance  shall  become  damaged 
from  any  cause  shall  be  broken  up  or  removed  and  shall  be 
replaced  by  good  and  sound  work. 


SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL    CLAUSES 

SECTION  No.  42.  If  any  material  brought  on  the  ground  for 
use  in  the  work  or  selected  for  the  same  shall  be  condemned 
by  the  Engineer  as  unsuitable  or  not  in  conformity  with  the 
specifications,  the  Contractor  shall  forthwith  remove  such  mate- 
rial. 

SECTION  No.  43.  The  Contractor  shall  employ  only  compe- 
tent, skillful  and  faithful  men  to  do  the  work.  Whenever  the 
Engineer  shall  notify  the  Contractor  in  writing  that  in  his  opinion 
any  man  on  the  work  is  incompetent,  unfaithful  or  disorderly, 
such  man  shall  be  discharged  from  the  work  and  shall  not  again 
be  employed  on  it. 


SUBDIVISION  3 

GENERAL  MANNER  OF  PROSECUTION  AND  MAINTENANCE  OF 

TRAFFIC 

SECTION  No.  44.  No  building  shall,  without  the  consent  of 
the  occupant  and  without  notice  to  the  Engineer,  be  deprived  of 
means  of  access  thereto;  and  where  streets  are  open,  suitable 
bridges  shall  be  built  and  maintained  to  permit  owners  and 
occupants  to  reach  their  premises.  Where  necessary,  proper  and 
easy  means  for  passengers  to  reach  and  leave  street  cars  shall 
be  maintained. 

SECTION  No.  46.  Generally,  the  Contractor  will  be  permitted 
to  conduct  his  work  in  the  most  expeditious  manner  possible, 
having  due  regard  for  the  safety  of  persons  and  property  and 
facilities  for  traffic  and  under  such  instructions  as  the  Engineer 
may  give  from  time  to  time. 

SECTION  No.  47.  All  necessary  facilities  shall  be  furnished 
by  the  Contractor  for  the  benefit  of  street  traffic,  both  on  longi- 
tudinal and  cross  streets. 

SECTION  No.  48.  In  order  to  minimize  interference  with 
traffic  and  inconvenience  to  abutting  property  owners,  during  the 
construction  of  the  Railroad,  on  all  parts  of  the  subsurface  por- 
tion of  the  work  the  streets  and  sidewalks  (including  the 
southerly  roadway  and  sidewalk  of  Eastern  Parkway  at  and  near 
Utica  Avenue)  shall  be  decked  or  covered  over  in  a  substantial 
manner,  and  every  precaution  must  be  taken  to  keep  traffic  free 
from  interruption. 

SECTION  No.  49.  The  street  intersections  for  the  subsurface 
portion  of  the  Railroad,  except  where  working  shafts  are  located, 
shall  be  kept  at  all.  times  open  for  traffic  for  their  full  width. 
Where  the  decking  is  temporarily  removed  from  any  part  of  the 
street  the  opening  shall  be  protected  by  suitable  fencing  and 
bridging.  In  all  cases  the  Contractor  shall  at  all  times  keep  all 
the  street  crossings  on  the  lines  of  the  sidewalks  in  a  clean  and 
neat  condition,  bridging  gutters  and  low  places  where  water  might 
collect. 

SECTION  No.  50.  The  Commission  will  insist  upon  the  close 
observance  of  the  above  requirements,  and  no  departure  there- 

16 


SPECIFICATIONS MANNER    OF    PROSECUTION,    ETC. 

from  will  be  allowed,  except  in  such  special  cases  as  may  be 
necessary  and  then  only  upon  the  written  permission  of  the  Com- 
mission and  for  such  time  r.j  the  Commission  may  allow. 

SECTION  No.  51.  Wherever  the  excavations  are  decked,  or 
where  gases  are  liable  to  accumulate,  suitable  openings  shall  be 
provided  for  proper  ventilation. 

SECTION  No.  52.  Wherever  the  excavations  are  decked, 
all  gas  pipes  the  services  of  which  cannot  temporarily  be  dis- 
pensed with  shall  be  by-passed,  if  directed  by  the  Engineer,  tem- 
porary pipes  to  take  their  place  being  laid  upon,  above  or  below 
the  street  or  sidewalk  surface.  Such  work  shall  include  all  ex- 
cavation, backfilling,  temporary  paving  (including  maintenance 
of  same),  and  the  restoration  of  the  permanent  paving  both  upon 
the  completion  of  the  by-passing  installation  and  upon  the  res- 
toration of  the  original  system,  all  bagging,  cutting  and  capping 
and  installing  circulation  connections,  and  all  other  work,  labor 
and  material  of  whatever  character  necessary  to  provide  a  tem- 
porary and  independent  system  of  gas  supply  to  take  the  place 
of  the  system  originally  in  the  street;  connecting  such  temporary 
system  with  the  mains  in  the  intersecting  streets  where  neces- 
sary ;  transferring  all  house  and  lamp  services  to  such  temporary 
system  where  necessary ;  removing  and  disposing  of  the  material 
of  such  temporary  system,  restoring  the  original  system  and  its 
connections  and  restoring  all  services.  All  by-passing  pipe  laid 
upon  or  below  the  street  or  sidewalk  surface  shall  be  wrought 
iron  of  a  quality  and  manufacture  to  be  approved  by  the  Engi- 
neer. It  laid  on  a  trestle  or  suspended  from  cables  the  pipes  shall 
be  flanged,  or  of  other  approved  connection,  and  sizes  twenty  (20  ) 
inches  in  diameter  or  less  shall  be  rolled  wrought-iron  pipe. 

SECTION  No.  53.  Temporary  pipes,  if  laid  upon  or  above 
the  street  or  sidewalk  surface,  shall  be  neatly  and  substantially 
placed  in  a  manner  to  cause  the  minimum  of  inconvenience  to  the 
abutting  property  owners  and  to  the  public.  Where  by-passing 
pipes  are  to  cross  a  street  overhead,  the  trestles  or  cable  suspen- 
sion shall  be  of  such  a  height  as  to  give  a  minimum  clear  head 
room  underneath  the  pipe  and  its  supports  of  fourteen  (14)  feet. 

The  trestle  or  cable  suspension  to  support  by-passing  pipes 
shall  be  of  a  design  approved  by  the  Engineer  and  shall  be 
painted  an  approved  color.  * 

17 


PART   FIRST— GENERAL  CONSTRUCTION 
SUBDIVISION  4 

STREET  RAILROAD  TRACKS,  MAINS  AND  OTHER  SURFACE,  SUB- 
SURFACE AND  OVERHEAD  STRUCTURES 

SECTION  No.  55.  Notice  shall  be  given  by  the  Contractor 
to  all  individuals,  companies  and  the  proper  City  officials,  own- 
ing or  having  charge  of  surface,  subsurface  or  overhead  struc- 
tures along  any  part  of  the  work,  of  his  intention  to  commence 
operations  along  such  part  of  the  route,  at  least  one  (i)  week 
in  advance,  and  the  Contractor  shall  file  with  the  Engineer  at 
the  same  time  a  copy  of  said  notice;  and  he  shall  co-operate 
with  the  proper  parties,  officers  or  officials  in  charge  of  such 
structures  and  shall  furnish  them  with  all  reasonable  facilities 
to  inspect  the  methods  of  caring  for  their  property. 

SECTION  No.  56.  In  the  rearrangement  of  surface,  sub- 
surface or  overehad  structures  required  to  be  removed  and  relaid 
or  reconstructed  in  order  to  avoid  interference  with  the  Railroad 
structure,  Railroad  ducts  or  Railroad  duct  manholes  or  in  order 
to  avoid  interference  with  the  operation  of  the  Railroad,  a  tenta- 
tive drawing  will  be  made  by  the  Engineer,  which  will  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  parties  interested;  if  any  reasonable  changes  are 
then  requested  by  any  of  the  said  parties  within  ten  (10)  days 
after  the  submission  of  the  tentative  drawing,  such  changes  will 
then  be  made  if  in  the  judgment  of  the  Engineer  they  will  best 
conserve  the  interest  of  all  parties  concerned ;  a  further  drawing 
will  then  be  made,  which,  upon  the  approval  of  the  Engineer,  will 
be  final.  If  no  changes  are  so  requested  in  said  tentative  draw- 
ing, such  drawing  shall  be  final. 

SECTION  No.  57.  Whenever  it  becomes  necessary  to  cut, 
move,  change,  or  reconstruct  any  surface,  subsurface  or  over- 
head structures,  or  connections  therewith,  such  work  shall  be 
done  according  to  the  reasonable  satisfaction  of  the  owners 
of  such  structures. 

SECTION  No.  58.  All  work  of  reconstruction  or  alteration 
shall  be  done  with  reasonable  dispatch,  and  facilities  shall  be 
provided  so  that  said  work  will  interfere  as*  little  as  possible 
with  the  practical  working  and  use  of  such  structures. 

18 


SPECIFICATIONS STREET     RAILROAD     TRACKS,     MAINS     AND     OTHER 

SURFACE,     SUHSFRFACE     AND    OVERHEAD    STRUCTURES 

SECTION  No.  59.  The  Contractor  shall  at  all  times,  by  suit- 
able bridging  or  other  supports,  maintain  and  support  in  an  en- 
tirely safe  condition  for  the  usual  service  and  to  the  reasonable 
satisfaction  of  the  owners,  all  surface,  subsurface  and  overhead 
structures  and  all  their  appurtenances  encountered  or  affected 
during  the  prosecution  of  his  work;  if  the  maintenance  of  such 
usual  service  makes  it  necessary,  the  Contractor  shall  temporarily 
remove  and  relay  or  reconstruct  any  such  surface,  subsurface 
or  overhead  structure  and  shall  restore  the  same  or  reconstruct 
the  same  in  a  new  location  prior  to  the  completion  of  the  Works. 
Also,  in  order  that  access  may  be  had  in  emergencies  to  gates  or 
valves  on  water  or  gas  mains  and  to  electric  manholes,  where  such 
gates  or  valves  and  manholes  are  decked  over,  trap  doors  of  a 
suitable  size  shall  be  provided  in  the  decking.  Wherever  an  elec- 
tric manhole  has  been  removed  it  shall  be  replaced  by  a  temporary 
manhole,  which  shall  be  so  constructed  as  to  reasonably  provide 
the  usual  facilities,  and  the  cables  shall  be  supported  by  temporary 
racks.  Wherever  possible  and  as  determined  by  the  Engineer  rea- 
sonable, the  ducts  shall  be  supported  and  maintained ;  ,but  when- 
ever it  becomes  necessary  to  remove  the  ducts  from  the  cables 
the  cables  shall  be  protected  by  a  satisfactory  boxing.  All  surface, 
subsurface  and  overhead  structures  and  all  their  appurtenances 
and  all  surfaces  of  whatever  character  along  the  line  of  the  work 
shall  be  protected  from  injury,  and  the  Contractor  shall  fully  re- 
store such  surface,  subsurface  and  overhead  structures  and  all 
their  appurtenances  and  all  such  surfaces  to,  and  shall  leave  them 
in,  as  useful,  safe,  durable  and  good  a  condition  as  existed  before 
construction  was  begun. 

SECTION  No.  63.  The  Contractor  shall  maintain  and  sup- 
port both  temporarily  and  permanently,  in  a  manner  that  will 
cause  the  minimum  interference  with  traffic,  and  in  a  safe 
condition  all  street  surface  railroads,  including  ducts,  cables, 
poles,  and  all  other  appurtenances  of  such  railroads ;  he  shall 
rebuild  either  in  their  original  or  in  new  locations  all  parts 
of  such  surface  railroads,  including  ducts,  cables,  poles,  and 
•all  other  appurtenances  of  such  railroads,  whose  reconstruction 
or  rebuilding  may  be  necessitated  by  the  construction  of  the 
work ;  and  he  shall  construct  span-wires  and  trolley-wire 

19 


SPECIFICATIONS — STREET     RAILROAD     TRACKS,,   MAINS     AND     OTHER 
SURFACE,     SUBSURFACE    AND    OVERHEAD    STRUCTURES 

troughs  or  other  insulating  protection  under  the  Railroad 
structure.  The  Contractor  will  be  required  to  support  street 
surface  railroads  upon  compacted  backfill  unless  the  Commission 
shall  order  masonry  piers. 

Where  the  elevated  portion  of  the  Railroad  is  erected  over 
or  adjacent  to  a  street  surface  railroad,  trolley  trough  or  other 
protection  for  the  trolley  wire,  including  all  fixtures  and  ap- 
purtenances, shall  be  furnished  and  installed  as  shown  on  the 
drawings  and  in  accordance  with  these  specifications.  All 
trolley  line  material  and  construction,  including  trough,  fix- 
tures, and  all  appurtenances,  must  be  satisfactory  to  the 
Brooklyn,  Queens  County  &  Suburban  Railroad  Company  or 
other  company  owning  the  street  surface  railroads  affected. 

From  Carroll  Street  to  Montgomery  Street  and  at  the  East 
New  York  Avenue  station  the  street  surface  railroad  tracks  will 
have  to  be  relocated  by  the  Contractor  and  placed  alongside  of 
the  Railroad.  At  these  locations  the  trolley  wire  shall  be  sup- 
ported by  approved  brackets  attached  to  the  Railroad  structure 
or  by  other  means  satisfactory  to  the  company  owning  the  street 
surface  railroad.  Where  the  street  surface  railroad  tracks  pass 
from  under  the  Railroad  structure  the  trough  shall  be  continued 
a  sufficient  distance  to  give  adequate  protection. 

All  steel  work  of  the  Railroad  lower  than  twenty-six  (26) 
feet  above  the  top  of  rail  of  the  street  surface  railroad  and  so 
located  that  a  trolley  pole  can  make  contact  between  the 
trolley  wire  and  such  steel  work  will  require  protection. 

Continuous  trough  shall  be  provided  under  the  following 
conditions :  Where  there  is  an  abrupt  change  in  the  height 
of  the  trolley  wire;  where  the  construction  of  the  Railroad  (ex- 
cept at  towers)  is  such  that  the  trolley  wire  is  fifteen  (15)  feet 
or  less  above  the  top  of  rail  of  the  street  surf  ace  railroad ;  where 
longitudinal  girders  or  other  steel  work  of  the  Railroad  approxi- 
mately parallel  to  the  trolley  wire  require  protection.  At  tower 
construction  the  lower  chord  of  the  cross-bracing  shall  be  pro- 
tected by  a  short  trough  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the  Engi- 
neer. 

At  locations  where  continuous  trough  is  not  necessary, 
cross  girders  less  than  twenty  (20)  feet  above  top  of  rail  shall 
be  protected  by  short  trough ;  and  intermediate  cross  braces 

20 


SPECIFICATIONS STREET     RAILROAD    TRACKS,     MAINS     AND     OTHER 

SURFACE,     SUBSURFACE    AND    OVERHEAD    STRUCTURES 

which  require  protection  shall  be  surrounded  by  suitable 
spruce  blocks  held  in  place  by  heavy  iron  straps. 

Where  cross  girders  of  the  Railroad  are  twenty  (20)  feet 
or  more  above  top  of  rail  of  street  surface  railroad  and  con- 
tinuous trough  is  not  required,  span  wire- construction  shall 
Le  used.  Span  wire  shall  be  attached  to  the  Railroad  columns 
in  an  approved  manner  and  the  cross  girders  of  the  Railroad 
protected  by  substantial  flash  boards  of  an  approved  design. 

Before  erection,  the  trough,  supports,  and  all  wood  used 
to  protect  iron  work  shall  be  painted  with  one  (i)  coat  of 
pure  white  lead  and  boiled  linseed  oil  and  all  strap  iron  shall 
receive  one  (i)  coat  of  red  lead  paint;  the  entire  construction 
shall  be  painted  over  after  erection  with  one  (i)  coat  of  an 
approved  paint  to  match  the  Railroad  structure. 

Trolley  feeders  shall  be  restored  on  suitable  side  arm  brackets 
attached  to  existing  trolley  poles  or  supported  on  insulators  of  a 
design  approved  by  the  Engineer  mounted  on  cross  arms  hung 
from  the  Railroad  structure  by  steel  straps  (stiffened  with  oak 
spacers)  and  clamps  in  the  position  designated  by  the  Engineer. 
Where  such  feeders  are  above  platforms,  but  less  than  ten  (10) 
feet  above  the  platform  level  a  minimum  horizontal  clearance 
of  six  (6)  feet  from  the  edge  of  the  platform  shall  be  maintained. 
In  all  other  cases  the  minimum  horizontal  clearance  shall  be  two 
(2)  feet. 

SECTION  No.  63-a.  Along  the  line  of  the  work  there  will  be 
encountered  at  various  points  poles  and  wires  which  it  will  be 
necessary  to  relocate  in  order  to  avoid  interference  with  the  con- 
struction or  the  operation  of  the  Railroad,  which  relocations  shall 
be  made  in  accordance  with  the  drawings  or  as  directed  by  the 
Commission. 

The  Contractor  shall  remove  and  relocate  in  a  safe  and 
permanent  position  all  wires,  cables  and  poles  at  stations  and 
between  stations  which  would  interfere  with  the  construction  or 
the  operation  of  the  Railroad  or  which  would  interfere  with  the 
completion  or  with  the  use  of  the  stations  or  station  approaches 
or  which  infringe  upon  the  limit  lines  hereinafter  mentioned,  to 
the  reasonable  requirements  of  the  several  owners  and  as  directed 
by  the  Commission. 

All   wires   and   feeders   that   cross   the   Railroad   structure 

21 


SPECIFICATIONS STREET     RAILROAD     TRACKS,      MAIXS     AND     OTHER 

SURFACE,    SUBSURFACE   AND  OVERHEAD   STRUCTURES 

either  above  or  below  the  rail,  except  trolley  wires  and  trolley 
feeders,  shall  be  either  at  a  height  of  not  less  than  twenty-two 
and  one-half  (225/2)  ,feet  above  the  base  of  rail,  or  below  the 
longitudinal  girders  and  properly  insulated,  or  if  arrangements  can 
be  made  by  the  Contractor  with  the  owner  and  operator  of  such 
wire  or  cable,  such  wire  or  cable  may  at  the  option  of  the  Con- 
tractor be  placed  in  suitable  conduit  below  the  street  surface.  All 
wires  and  cables  parallel  with  the  Railroad  structure,  except  trol- 
ley wires  and  trolley  feeders,  shall  at  stations  or  mezzanines  be 
at  a  height  of  not  less  than  eight  (8)  feet  above  the  roof  of  sta- 
tions and  station  mezzanines  and  ten  (10)  feet  above  the  station 
platforms ;  and  between  stations  not  less  than  ten  (10)  feet  above 
any  transverse  girder,  or  if  arrangements  can  be  made  by  the  Con- 
tractor with  the  owner  and  operator  of  such  wire  or  cable,  such 
wire  or  cable  may  at  the  option  of  the  Contractor  be  placed  in 
suitable  conduit  below  the  street  surface.  Such  parallel  wires  at 
heights  less  than  above  provided,  but  at  or  above  the  level  of 
transverse  girders,  may  be  restored  with  a  minimum  horizontal 
clearance  of  six  (6)  feet. 

SECTION  No-  64.  In  the  event  of  the  owners  or  the  City 
desiring  to  make  any  addition,  alteration  or  extension  to  their 
structures  or  to  do  any  work  to  or  in  connection  with  surface, 
subsurface  or  overhead  structures  owned  by  them  or  it  or  to 
lay  any  new  structure  in  or  across  a  street  occupied  by  the  Works, 
at  the  time  this  work  is  in  progress,  the  Contractor  shall  give  said 
owners  or  the  City  all  reasonable  opportunity  to  perform  such 
work;  provided  such  work  or  alteration  for  the  benefit  solely  of 
the  owners  of  such  structures  does  not  cause  the  Contractor  any 
serious  loss  or  delay,  as  shall  be  determined  by  the  Commission. 


22 


SUBDIVISION  5 
EXCAVATION 

SECTION  No.  65.  Special  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  dam- 
age wherever  excavation  under  cover  is  being  done  or  where 
open  excavation  is  permitted.  The  width  of  such  excavation 
shall  not  exceed  the  width  actually  necessary,  in  the  opinion 
of  the  Engineer,  for  the  proper  prosecution  of  the  work.  All 
excavations  shall  be  of  such  width  (except  where  trees  are  to 
be  maintained  in  place),  in  addition  to  that  of  the  Railroad, 
as  shall  be  necessary,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer,  for  the 
proper  and  expeditious  progress  of  the  work,  and  to  permit 
the  laying  and  readjusting  of  all  sewers,  mains,  subways  and 
other  subsurface  structures  encountered  along  the  route  and 
contiguous  to  the  Railroad. 

SECTION  No.  66.  Excavation  shall  be  carried  to  such 
depth  as  may  be  necessary  to  permit  the  laying  of  such  con- 
crete bed,  special  foundation  or  drain  pipes  as  may  be  deemed 
necessary  by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  67.  The  sides  of  the  excavations  shall  be  se- 
cured against  slips  by  suitable  sheet  piling  or  sheeting,  held 
in  place  by  braces,  shores  or  waling  timbers,  special  precau- 
tions being  taken  where  there  is  additional  pressure  due  to  the 
presence  of  buildings  or  other  structures  and  where  trees  are 
to  be  maintained  and  supported  in  place.  Where  a  movement 
of  the  ground  might  cause  the  settlement  of  an  adjacent  build- 
ing, the  sheeting  must  be  started,  if  near  the  building,  before 
the  elevation  of  the  bottom  of  the  foundation  of  the  building 
is  reached ;  if  away  from  the  building,  at  such  depth  of  the 
excavation  as  the  Engineer  may  permit;  and  the  excavation 
must  not  be  made  in  advance  of  or  below  the  bottom  of  the 
sheeting. 

SECTION  No.  68.  Sheeting  shall  be  driven  wherever  pos- 
sible, but  when  it  is  placed  against  the  sides  of  the  excavation, 
the  spaces  or  voids  back  of  the  sheeting  must  be  immediately 
and  carefully  filled  with  suitable  material  to  prevent  as  far  as 
possible  the  natural  ground  back  of  the  sheeting  from  moving. 


SPECIFICATIONS EXCAVATION 

SECTION  No.  69.  (i)  The  Contractor  shall  secure  buildings 
adjacent  to  the  excavation,  either  in  accordance  with  Sections 
Nos.  67  and  68,  in  the  cacc  of  buildings  supported  on  firm  soils 
when  a  slope  represented  by  one  (i)  foot  vertical  to  two  (2)  feet 
horizontal,  inclined  downward  from  the  bottom  outer  edge  of 
any  building  foundation,  intersects  or  passes  beneath  the  bottom 
outer  edge  of  the  completed  Railroad  structure ;  or, 

(2)  When  compliance  with  the  provisions  of  Sections  Nos. 
67  and  68  is  not  sufficient  to  secure  adjacent  buildings  or  when 
necessary    to   prevent   improper   pressure   against   the   Railroad 
structure  when  completed,  the  Contractor  shall  safely  and  per- 
manently underpin  adjacent  buildings  the  foundations  of  which 
are  above  the  bottom  of  the  adjacent  excavation  for  the  Rail- 
road.    By  underpinning  is  meant  such  method  of  constructio.i 
as  will  transmit  the  foundation  loads  directly  through  the  under- 
pinning structure  to  such  lower  level  as  is  necessary  to  secure  the 
buildings  and  which  will  relieve  the  adjacent  ground  from  im- 

.  proper  lateral  pressures.  The  underpinning  shall  be  designed  to 
furnish  a  safe  and  permanent  independent  support  for  each  build- 
ing. To  accomplish  this  result,  the  Contractor  shall  use  such 
methods  of  underpinning,  pneumatic  or  otherwise,  as  special 
conditions  may  require  and  the  Engineer  shall  approve ;  or 

(3)  The  Contractor  shall,  subject  to  and  only  with  the  ap- 
proval of  the  Engineer,  in  lieu  of  underpinning,  construct  such 
form  of  permanent  construction  as  may  be  necessary  to  maintain, 
protect  and  secure  the  adjacent  buildings  against  displacement, 
provided  the  safety  of  the  completed  Railroad  structure  will  not 
be  endangered  by  improper  pressures  from  such  form  of  con- 
struction and  such  adjacent  buildings. 

Before  the  work  is  proceeded  with,  the  Contractor  shall  sub- 
mit to  the  Engineer  for  approval  drawings  in  duplicate  indicating 
the  proposed  typical  and  special  methods  of  underpinning  or  of 
maintaining,  protecting  and  securing  the  adjacent  buildings. 

The  Contractor  shall,  where  necessary,  underpin  or  maintain, 
protect  and  secure  vaults,  area  ways,  retaining  walls,  fences, 
stoops  or  porches.  If  ordered  by  the  Engineer,  the  Contractor 
shall  dig  test  pits  alongside  the  building  foundations  to  deter- 
mine the  necessity  for  underpinning  or  for  maintaining,  pro- 
tecting and  securing  a  building. 

24 


SPECIFICATIONS — EXCAVATION 

SECTION  No.  72.  All  timber  used  for  sheeting,  shoring, 
bracing,  decking  or  other  temporary  purposes  shall  be  sound 
and  free  from  any  defects  that  may  impair  its  strength.  The 
top  or  wearing  surface  of  all  decking  used  for  carriageways 
shall  be  of  hard,  yellow  pine  (unless  otherwise  permitted), 
sound,  straight,  and  free  from  all  shakes  and  large,  loose 
knots.  All  sheeting  and  timber  used  temporarily  shall  be  put 
in  .place  by  skilled  mechanics,  keyed  tight  by  wedges  where 
necessary,  and  so  arranged  as  to  be  withdrawn  readily  with- 
out endangering  the  adjoining  soil. 

SECTION  No.  73.  The  Contractor  shall  restore,  as  far  as 
possible,  all  walls  and  other  parts  of  vaults,  areas  and  coal 
holes  of  abutting  property  along  the  line  of  the  Railroad  which 
have  been  removed  on  account  of  the  construction  of  the 
Railroad. 

SECTION  No.  74.  Wherever  vaults  of  abutting  property 
are  broken  through  or  otherwise  disturbed,  the  Contractor 
shall  provide  all  materials  for  and  erect  a  six  (6)  inch  hollow 
tile  wall  laid  in  Portland  cement  mortar,  as  a  temporary  par- 
tition, on  or  about  the  building  line  or  as  directed,  that  will 
afford  proper  protection  to  the  owner  or  occupant  of  the 
adjoining  premises.  Upon  the  completion  of  the  restoration 
of  the  vault  such  wall  shall,  unless  otherwise  directed,  be 
immediately  removed  and  disposed  of  by  the  Contractor. 

SECTION  No.  77.  Whenever  material  requiring  blasting  is 
encountered  in  any  excavation,  all  necessary  precautions  must 
be  exercised  by  the  Contractor,  as  required  by  the  ordinances 
of  the  City  relative  to  blasting.  Explosives  shall  be  used  only 
of  such  character  and  strength  as  may  be  permitted  by  the 
Commission,  and  the  right  is  reserved  for  the  Engineer  to 
direct  that  in  special  cases  ordinary  blasting  powder  only,  in 
small  charges,  shall  be  used.  Blasting  shall  not  be  done  be- 
tween the  hours  of  n  P.  M.  and  7  A.  M.  without  the  express 
permission  of  the  Commission  and  then  only  under  such  restric- 
tions as  it  may  impose. 

SECTION  No.  78.  The  Contractor  shall  provide  such  maga- 
zines and  magazine  houses  for  the  storage  of  explosives  in 

25 


SPECIFICATIONS EXCAVATION 

such  localities  and  in  such  manner  as  may  be  approved  by  the 
proper  municipal  authorities  in  charge  of  such  matters.  No 
larger  quantity  of  explosives  shall  be  kept  on  the  line  of  the 
work  than  will  be  actually  required  for  the  twelve  (12)  hours 
of  work  next  ensuing,  and  it  shall  be  kept  under  lock,  the  key 
to  which  shall  be  in  the  hands  of  only  the  foreman  or  other 
equally  trustworthy  person.  The  amount  of  explosives  kept 
in  any  one  place  shall  not  exceed  the  limit  permitted  by  any 
ordinance  of  the  City  or  as  may  be  determined  by  the  Com- 
mission. Caps  and  exploders  shall  not  be  kept  in  the  same 
place  with  dynamite  and  other  explosives.  During  freezing 
weather  special  precautions  shall  be  taken  as  to  the  care  and 
manipulation  of  dynamite. 

SECTION  No.  79.  Whenever  any  subsurface  structure  is 
encountered  in  or  alongside  any  excavation,  right  is  reserved 
to  direct  that  all  material  within  five  (5)  feet  of  the  same 
shall  be  removed  by  means  other  than  blasting. 

SECTION  No.  81.  Any  excess  excavation  in  the  bottom  of 
the  trench  below  the  net  line  of  excavation  shall  be  replaced 
by  a  compacted  backfill  between  supporting  walls  and  col- 
umns and  by  concrete  underneath  supporting  walls  and  col- 
umns. (See  Section  No.  93.) 

SECTION  No.  83.  Whenever  water  is  encountered  in 
trenches,  it  shall  be  removed  by  bailing  or  pumping,  great 
care  being  taken  when  pumping  that  the  surrounding  par- 
ticles of  soil  be  not  disturbed  or  removed.  If  necessary  to 
prevent  such  disturbance,  the  pumping  shall  be  done  by  a 
series  of  driven  wells  whose  points  are  protected  by  fine  wire 
cloths,  the  rate  of  flow  at  each  well  being  made  so  slow  as 
not  to  remove  the  particles  of  soil;  or  the  pumping  shall  be 
done  by  other  means  approved  by  the  Engineer.  The  dis- 
charge from  all  pumps  shall  be  conducted  into  the  adjacent 
sewers,  and  the  discharge  pipes  shall  be  so  arranged  as  to  be 
readily  inspected  at  all  times  to  ascertain  if  the  water  is  free 
from  particles  of  soil. 

SECTION  No.  84.  All  carts,  buckets  and  other  vehicles  used 
by  the  Contractor  for  the  removal  of  material  shall  be  tight 

26 


SPECIFICATIONS EXCAVATION 

and  so  arranged  and  so  loaded  as  not  to  spill.  Whenever  a 
cart,  bucket  or  other  vehicle  so  used  is  leaky  or  unsuitable, 
it  shall  be  immediately  withdrawn  from  the  work  on  notifica- 
tion by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  85.  Excavated  material  shall  be  removed  ex- 
peditiously  and  disposed  of,  in  any  place  selected  by  the  Con- 
tractor, subject  to  the  ordinances  and  regulations  of  the  City 
authorities  governing  the  disposal  of  such  material  and  the 
regulations  of  the  United  States  Government  as  to  the  dis- 
posal or  dumping  of  material  in  and  about  or  near  the  Harbor 
of  New  York. 

SECTION  No.  87.  Excavation  includes  the  excavation  of  all 
materials  of  whatever  nature  encountered  in  the  trenches,  in- 
cluding boulders. 


SUBDIVISION  6 
BACKFILLING 

SECTION  No.  93.  The  trenches  at  the  sides  of  and  over 
the  top  of  the  Railroad  and  wherever  backfilling  is  necessary, 
including  any  void  spaces  of  vaults  or  other  structures  below 
the  ordered  net  lines  of  excavation  which  it  may  be  necessary 
to  fill  or  grade  in  order  to  provide  the  sub-grade  for  the  Rail- 
road, shall  be  backfilled  with  sand,  gravel  or  other  good,  clean 
earth,  free  from  perishable  material  and  from  stones  exceeding 
six  (6)  inches  in  diameter,  and  not  containing  in  any  place 
a  proportion  of  stone  of  or  below  that  size  exceeding  one 
(i)  part  of  stone  to  five  (5)  parts  of  earth.  The  filling  shall 
be  compacted  by  flooding  with  water  or  by  ramming  in  layers 
not  exceeding  six  (6)  inches  in  depth,  as  required  by  the 
Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  94.  Whenever  pipes,  sewers  or  other  sub- 
surface structures  are  met,  the  filling  shall  be  carefully  packed, 
rammed  and  tamped  under  and  about  such  subsurface  struc- 
tures, special  tools  being  used  for  the  purpose.  No  filling  of 
trenches  with  frozen  earth  will  in  any  case  be  permitted  nor 
will  any  filling  be  permitted  over  frozen  material. 

SECTION  No.  95.  As  fast  as  the  work  of  filling  permits, 
sheeting  and  other  timber  supporting  the  sides  of  the  excava- 
tion shall  be  carefully  withdrawn  and  the  spaces  left  by  the 
removal  of  such  material  carefully  backfilled,  but  if  directed 
by  the  Engineer,  the  sheeting  shall  be  left  in  place. 


SUBDIVISION  7 
PILING  AND  TIMBERING 

SECTION  No.  97.  If,  in  the  judgment  of  the  Engineer,  the 
ground  is  of  such  character  as  to  require  piling,  the  Contractor 
shall  drive  such  piles  as  the  Commission  directs.  The  piles  shall 
be  of  good,  sound  pine  or  spruce,  or  other  acceptable  timber, 
straight  and  free  from  shakes ;  they  shall  be  not  less  than 
twelve  (12)  inches  in  diameter  at  the  butt  end,  nor  less  than 
six  (6)  inches  in  diameter  at  the  point,  and  shall  be  driven 
to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Engineer  and  by  means  of  a  steam 
hammer  driver  if  so  required  by  him.  If  necessary,  the  points 
of  the  piles  shall  be  protected  by  proper  shoes,  and  the  butts 
by  rings  or  caps.  Piles  shall  not  be  spliced  unless  permitted 
by  the  Engineer,  and  then  in  such  manner  as  he  directs. 
Piles  shall  be  carefully  cut  off  to  the  grade  given  by  the  En- 
gineer. 

SECTION  No.  98.  Piles  shall  be  driven  in  the  position  and 
manner  and  to  the  depth  ordered;  if  driven  in  a  wrong  posi- 
tion or  injured  in  any  way  by  driving  they  shall  be  with- 
drawn and  replaced  by  others.  After  being  driven  they  shall 
be  cut  off  to  a  true  plane  for  proper  adjustment  with  capping 
timber  or  masonry. 

SECTION  No.  100.  If,  in  the  judgment  of  the  Engineer, 
special  conditions  so  require,  the  Commission  may  direct  that  piles 
of  reinforced  concrete  of  a  form  of  construction  approved  by  the 
Commission  shall  be  used. 

SECTION  No.  102.  Timber  grillage  foundations  shall  be 
built  if  so  directed  by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  103.  All  foundation  timber  shall  be  of  pine 
or  spruce,  or  other  timber  acceptable  to  the  Commission,  sound 
and  free  from  shakes.  It  shall  be  of  such  dimensions,  and 
laid  in  such  manner,  as  the  drawings  shall  require,  and  shall  be 
held  in  place  by  bolts,  spikes  or  good  seasoned  oak  or  locust  tree- 
nails. 


SUBDIVISION  8 
CEMENT 

SECTION  No.  105.  All  cement  used  in  the  work  shall  be 
true  Portland  cement,  by  which  is  meant  the  finely  pulver- 
ized product  resulting  from  the  calcination  to  incipient  fusion 
of  a  properly  proportioned  intimate  mixture  of  argillaceous 
and  calcareous  earths  or  rocks,  to  which  no  addition  greater 
than  three  per  centum  (3%)  has  been  made  subsequent  to 
calcination. 

SECTION  No.  106.  Before  any  cement  is  furnished,  the 
brand  shall  receive  the  approval  of  the  Engineer.  Cement, 
to  be  acceptable,  shall  be  of  a  well-known  brand  which  has 
been  in  successful  use  for  large  engineering  works  in  America 
for  at  least  five  (5)  years,  and  which  has  an  established  repu- 
tation for  uniform  character.  Preference  will  be  given  to 
cements  which,  by  their  records,  show  a  tendency  to  maintain 
high  strength  of  mortar  with  increased  age. 

SECTION  No.  107.  Cement  shall  be  subject  to  inspection 
at  the  place  of  manufacture  or  on  the  work,  and  to  such  tests 
as  may  be  ordered  by  the  Engineer.  The  Engineer  or  his 
representatives  shall  have  access  at  all  times  and  places  to 
inspect  the  methods  of  manufacture,  storage  and  protection, 
and  shall  have  liberty  to  inspect  the  daily  laboratory  records 
of  tests  and  analyses  at  the  cement  works. 

SECTION  No.  108.  in  general,  tests  will  conform  to  the 
methods  recommended  by  the  Committee  on  Uniform  Tests 
of  Cement  of  the  American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers.  Un- 
less otherwise  directed,  samples  will  be  taken  at  the  place  of 
manufacture  by  a  representative  of  the  Engineer,  and  sent  to 
the  Commission's  laboratory,  where  the  tests  will  be  made. 
If  required,  tests  will  be  made  on  the  individual  samples, 
without  intermixing. 

SECTION  No.  109.  The  cement  shall  have  a  specific  gravity 
of  not  less  than  3.10  nor  more  than  3.25  after  being  thoroughly 
dried  at  a  temperature  of  212  degrees  Fahr.  The  color  shall 
be  uniform,  bluish  gray,  free  from  yellow  or  brown  particles. 


SPECIFICATIONS — CEMENT 

SECTION  No.  no.  Chemical  analyses  of  cement  made  from 
time  to  time  shall  show  a  reasonably  uniform  composition. 
Cement  shall  contain  not  more  than  one  and  three-fourths 
per  centum  (i^%)  of  sulphuric  anhydride  (SO3)  nor  more 
than  four  per  centum  (4%)  of  magnesia  (MgO). 

SECTION  No.  in.  The  fineness  of  the  cement  shall  be  such 
that  it  shall  leave  by  weight  a  residue  of  not  more  than  eight 
per  centum  (8%)  on  a  zoo-mesh  sieve  and  not  more  than 
twenty-five  per  centum  (25%)  on  a  2OO-mesh  sieve,  the  wires 
of  the  sieves  being  respectively  0.0045  and  0.0024  inch  in 
diameter. 

SECTION  No.  112.  It  shall  develop  initial  set  in  not  less 
than  thirty  (30)  minutes  unless  a  more  quickly-setting  cement 
is  specifically  required,  and  shall  develop  hard  set  in  not  less 
than  one  (i)  hour  nor  more  than  ten  (10)  hours. 

SECTION  No.  113.  Pats  of  neat  cement,  after  remaining 
one  (i)  day  in  moist  air,  shall  be  kept  in  air  or  water  of 
normal  temperature  for  at  least  twenty-eight  (28)  days,  or 
shall  be  exposed  to  an  atmosphere  of  steam,  above  boiling 
water,  in  a  loosely  closed  vessel  for  at  least  five  (5)  hours ; 
and  the  separate  pats  under  any  of  these  conditions,  shall  re- 
main hard  without  any  indications  of  checking,  cracking,  dis- 
tortion, disintegration  or  blotching. 

SECTION  No.  114.  Neat  cement  briquettes  shall  have  at  the 
end  of  one  (i)  day  in  moist  air  a  breaking  strength,  per  square 
inch  of  sectional  area,  of  not  less  than  one  hundred  and  fifty 
(150)  Ibs. ;  at  the  end  of  seven  (7)  days — one  (i)  day  in  air, 
six  (6)  days  in  water — of  not  less  than  five  hundred  (500) 
Ibs.;  at  the  end  of  twenty-eight  (28)  days — one  (i)  day  in 
air,  twenty-seven  (27)  days  in  water — of  not  less  than  six 
hundred  (600)  Ibs.  The  strength  at  twenty-eight  (28)  days 
shall  be  not  less  than  that  at  seven  (7)  days. 

Mortar  briquettes,  composed  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement 
and  three  (3)  parts  of  Standard  Ottawa  sand,  by  weight,  shall 
have  at  the  end  of  seven  (7)  days — one  (i)  day  in  air,  six 
(6)  days  in  water — a  breaking  strength,  per  square  inch  of 


SPECIFICATIONS CEMENT 

sectional  area,  of  not  less  than  two  hundred  (200)  Ibs. ;  and 
at  the  end  of  twenty-eight  (28)  days — one  (i)  day  in  air, 
twenty-seven  (27)  days  in  water — of  not  less  than  three  hun- 
dred (300)  Ibs.  The  strength  at  twenty-eight  (28)  days  shall 
show  an  increase  of  not  less  than  fifty  (50)  Ibs.  over  the 
strength  at  seven  (7)  days. 

SECTION  No.  115.  Tests  will  be  made  from  time  to  time 
extending  over  longer  periods  than  twrenty-eight  (28)  days. 
If  such  tests  show  a  tendency  to  unsoundness  or  unusual  re- 
duction in  strength  with  increased  age,  the  Engineer  shall 
have  the  right  to  prohibit  the  further  use  of  that  brand  and 
to  require  that  another  brand  be  substituted. 

SECTION  No.  116.  All  cement  shall  be  held  in  storage  to 
allow  ample  time  for  tests  to  be  made  before  the  cement  is 
required  for  use  in  the  work. 

SECTION  No.  117,  Cement  shall  be  packed  and  delivered 
in  canvas  sacks  or  other  strong,  well-made  packages,  plainly 
marked  with  the  manufacturer's  brand,  and  sealed  in  an  ap- 
proved manner.  The  weights  of  such  packages  shall  be  uni- 
form. 

SECTION  No.  118.  The  Contractor  shall  at  all  times  keep 
in  store  on  the  work,  or  at  some  point  convenient  thereto,  an 
abundant  supply  of  cement,  so  as  to  guard  against  possible 
shortage.  It  shall  be  stored  in  a  weather-tight  building,  with 
a  tight  floor  a  proper  distance  above  the  ground,  and  with 
sufficient  floor  space  to  admit  of  storing  each  lot  of  cement, 
of  not  more  than  two  hundred  (200)  barrels,  or  its  equiva- 
lent, separately,  so  as  to  facilitate  identification  of  each  in- 
dividual lot  in  case  of  necessity  for  further  tests  or  rejection. 
Cement  that  has  become  partially  set  or  otherwise  damaged 
shall  not  be  used. 


SUBDIVISION  9 
MORTAR 

SECTION  No.  119.  All  mortar  shall  be  prepared  from  ce- 
ment and  sand  approved  by  the  Engineer.  These  ingredients 
shall  be  thoroughly  mixed  dry  in  the  proportions  specified 
below;  sufficient  water  shall  then  be  added  to  produce  a  stiff 
paste.  Water  used  in  mortar,  grout  or  concrete  shall  be  clean, 
fresh  water.  Salt  water  will  not  be  permitted.  The  mortar 
shall  be  freshly  mixed  for  the  work  in  hand,  in  proper  boxes 
made  for  that  purpose,  and  no  mortar  shall  be  used  that  has 
stood  beyond  such  limit  of  time  as  may  be  determined  by  the 
Engineer. 

Sand  used  for  mortar  shall  be  clean  and  shall  be  graded 
from  fine  to  coarse  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Engineer,  li 
shall  contain  no  grains  which  will  not  pass  a  one-fourth  (%) 
inch  mesh  sieve  nor  more  than  six  per  centum  (6%)  by 
weight  which  will  pass  a  loo-mesh  sieve.  Sand  shall  be  of 
such  quality  that  mortar  composed  of  one  (i)  part  Portland 
cement  and  three  (3)  parts  sand  by  weight  will  have  a  tensile 
and  compressive  strength  equal  to  mortar  of  the  same  con- 
sistency made  from  one  (i)  part  of  the  same  kind  of  cement 
and  three  (3)  parts  of  standard  Ottawa  sand. 

SECTION  No.  120.  For  purposes  of  mixture,  three  hundred 
and  seventy-five  (375)  pounds  of  Portland  cement  shall  be 
estimated  at  three  and  one-half  (3j£)  cubic  feet  of  volume. 
The  proportions  for  brick  and  stone  masonry  shall  be  one  (i) 
part  cement  to  two  (2)  parts  sand;  for  pointing,  one  (i)  part 
cement  to  one  (i)  part  sand;  for  concrete  masonry,  as  speci- 
fied under  the  head  of  concrete ;  and  for  other  classes  of  work, 
as  directed  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  121.  If  required  by  the  Engineer,  a  grout  con- 
sisting of  one  (i)  part  sand  and  one  (i)  part  of  Portland  ce- 
ment shall  be  pumped  in  under  pressure,  so  as  completely  to 
fill  all  the  voids  in  or  behind  the  masonry. 


33 


SUBDIVISION  10 
MASONRY 

SECTION  No.  123.  All  masonry,  except  as  otherwise  speci- 
fied, shall  be  laid  in  Portland  cement  mortar,  and  shall  be 
built  to  the  forms  and  dimensions  shown  on  the  drawings,  or 
as  directed  by  the  Commission  from  time  to  time ;  and  the  system 
of  joining  or  bonding  ordered  by  the  Engineer  shall  be  strictly 
followed. 

SECTION  No.  124.  Care  must  be  taken  that  no  water  shall 
interfere  with  the  proper  laying  of  masonry  in  any  of  its 
parts. 

SECTION  No.  125.  During  freezing  weather  no  masonry 
shall  be  built  unless  properly  protected  against  frost,  and 
masonry  shall  not  be  built  in  exposed  places  where  in  the 
opinion  of  the  Engineer  it  is  impracticable  to  give  such  pro- 
tection. During  freezing  weather  or  when  there  is  frost  in 
the  materials  to  be  used  in  the  masonry,  the  materials  shall 
be  heated.  The  Contractor  shall  provide  such  appliances, 
subject  to  the  approval  of  the  Engineer,  as  are  necessary  for 
the  heating  of  the  sand,  stone  and  other  materials. 

SECTION  No.  126.  During  freezing  weather  all  masonry 
shall  be  protected  by  a  suitable  covering  of  salt  hay,  canvas, 
tarpaulin  or  by  such  material  or  in  such  ways  as  may  be  neces- 
sary to  insure  it  against  freezing. 

SECTION  No.  127.  During  hot  weather  all  masonry,  espe- 
cially concrete,  shall  be  kept  wet  by  sprinkling  and  properly 
covered  until  it  has  become  thoroughly  set  and  hardened. 

SECTION  No.  128.  Unless  otherwise  permitted,  every  joint 
that  is  to  be  pointed  shall  be  raked  out,  within  two  (2)  days 
after  being  laid,  to  a  depth  of  at  least  two  (2)  inches. 

SECTION  No.  129.  Pointing  of  the  face  joints  of  masonry 
shall  be  thoroughly  made  with  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the 
proportion  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement  to  one  (i)  part  of  sand, 
except  where  otherwise  specially  provided. 

J4- 


SPECIFICATIONS — MASONRY 

SECTION  No.  130.  No  pointing  shall  be  done  in  freezing 
weather,  and  masonry  laid  between  December  ist  and  April 
ist  shall  not  be  pointed  until  permitted  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  131.  Any  masonry  which  is  found  to  be  de- 
fective from  any  cause  whatsoever,  before  the  final  completion 
and  acceptance  of  the  work,  must  be  removed  and  properly 
rebuilt,  or  if  damaged  during  such  time  must  be  properly 
repaired. 

SECTION  No.  132.  All  stone  before  being  laid  shall  be 
thoroughly  cleaned  and  if  so  directed  by  the  Engineer  shall 
be  washed. 


35 


SUBDIVISION  11 
CONCRETE* 

SECTION  No.  133.  The  concrete  shall  be  composed  of 
gravel  or  broken  stone,  or  a  mixture  of  both,  free  from  all 
dust  and  dirt,  mixed  with  the  proportion  of  mortar  specified 
below.  The  water  used  in  mixing  concrete  must  be  clean, 
fresh  water.  Salt  water  will  not  be  permitted. 

SECTION  No.  134.  Sand  for  concrete  shall  be  of  the  kind 
herein  specified  for  mortar. 

SECTION  No.  135.  Stone  for  concrete  shall  be  sound,  clean 
gravel  or  sound,  hard,  broken  limestone  or  trap  rock,  or  a 
mixture  of  such  gravel  and  broken  stone.  If  a  mixture  of 
gravel  and  broken  stone  is  used,  the  Engineer  may  require 
that  the  gravel  and  broken  stone  be  stored  separately  on  the 
work  and  mixed  in  single  batches  as  needed. 

SECTION  No.  136.  The  gravel  or  broken  stone  or  the 
mixture  of  gravel  and  broken  stone  shall  be  graded  from  fine 
to  coarse,  and  that  which  is  all  of  one  size,  or  practically  so, 
shall  not  be  used.  It  shall  be  screened  or  washed  so  as  to 
remove  all  dust,  and  it  shall  contain  no  pieces  that  will  pass 
through  a  hole  three-eighths  (^)  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and 
no  pieces  that  will  not  pass  through  a  hole  one  and  three- 
fourths  (i^4)  inches  in  diameter.  Broken  stone  or  gravel 
for  concrete,  graded  as  above,  but  between  three-eighths  (^) 
and  three-fourths  (24)  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  may  be  required 
for  use  in  special  parts  of  the  work. 

SECTION  No.  137.  In  concrete  where  the  thickness  is  thirty 
(30)  inches  or  more,  if  permitted  by  the  Engineer,  the  Con- 
tractor may  imbed  pieces  of  clean,  sound  stone  whose  greatest 
diameter  does  not  exceed  twelve  (12)  inches  and  whose  least 
diameter  or  thickness  is  not  less  than  three-fourths  (J4)  of 
the  greatest  diameter.  These  stones  shall  be  set  by  hand  in 
the  concrete  as  the  layers  are  being  rammed,  and  shall  be  so 


*  See  also   Subdivision  24  of   Part   First  and   Subdivision   5   of   Part 
Second. 

36 


SPECIFICATIONS — CONCRETE 

placed  that  each  stone  is  completely  and  perfectly  imbedded. 
No  two  (2)  stones  shall  be  within  six  (6)  inches  of  each  other 
and  no  stones  shall  be  within  four  (4)  inches  of  an  exposed 
face,  nor  shall  any  such  stone  be  placed  nearer  than  six  (6) 
inches  to  any  reinforcing  metal  built  in  the  concrete. 

SECTION  No.  138.  The  proportions  of  sand  and  stone  (or 
gravel)  used  in  making  concrete  shall  be  by  volume  as  cast 
into  the  measuring  box. 

SECTION  No.  139.  Concrete  shall  be  as  follows:  in  the  floor, 
sidewalls  and  roof  of  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad  and 
in  the  reinforced  concrete  elevated  Railroad,  also  station  con- 
crete, one  (i)  part  of  cement,  two  (2)  parts  of  sand  and  four 
(4)  parts  of  stone;  for  column  foundations  for  the  elevated  por- 
tion of  the  Railroad  one  (i)  part  of  cement,  two  and  one-half 
(2/^)  parts  of  sand  and  five  (5)  parts  of  stone.  For  those  por- 
tions of  the  reinforced  concrete  elevated  Railroad  which  are  to 
have  a  natural  concrete  finish  treated  as  required,  gravel  shall 
be  used  in  making  the  concrete. 

SECTION  No.  140.  Protective  concrete  outside  of  water- 
proofing lines  shall  consist  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement,  two  (2) 
parts  of  sand  and  four  (4)  parts  of  stone. 

SECTION  No.  141.  Whenever  practicable,  concrete  shall  be 
machine  mixed.  A  rotary  machine  of  a  pattern  approved  by 
the  Engineer,  and  mixing  only  one  batch  at  a  time,  shall  be 
used.  Concrete  shall  not  be  mixed  on  the  surface  of  the  street 
or  decking  on  the  line  of  the  work  unless  specifically  permit- 
ted, but  the  mixing  shall  be  done  as  close  as  practicable  to  the 
work,  so  as  to  avoid  too  great  a  lapse  of  time  between  the 
mixing  and  the  placing  of  the  concrete  in  the  forms. 

SECTION  No.  142.  When  concrete  is  mixed  by  hand  the 
stone  or  gravel  shall  be  spread  on  a  platform  in  a  bed  about 
six  (6)  inches  thick,  and  shall  be  thoroughly  wet.  Sand  shall 
be  spread  on  a  platform  and  the  requisite  portion  of  cement 
spread  on  the  sand.  After  thoroughly  mixing  the  cement  and 
sand,  the  dry  mixture  thus  formed  shall  be  sprea4  evenly  over 
the  bed  of  stone  wet  as  above,  and  the  whole  turned  over  until 

37 


SPECIFICATIONS CONCRETE 

thoroughly  mixed,  but  not  less  than  four  (4)  turnings  on  the 
mixing  board  will  be  allowed  in  any  case,  water  being  added 
as  necessary.  Care  shall  be  taken  to  keep  the  bed  of  concrete 
wet  and  avoid  piling. 

« 

SECTION  No.  143.  Concrete  shall  be  placed  immediately 
after  mixing,  in  layers  of  such  thickness  as  may  be  directed  by 
the  Engineer,  and  shall  be  thoroughly  compacted  throughout 
the  mass  by  ramming  or  spading,  special  tamping  bars  or  tools 
being  used  as  approved  by  the  Engineer.  The  amount  of  water 
used  in  making  the  concrete  shall  be  as  approved  by  the  Engi- 
neer. If  a  small  amount  of  water  has  been  used  in  mixing, 
ramming  shall  be  continued  until  the  water  flushes  to  the  sur- 
face ;  as  a  rule,  however,  concrete  shall  be  placed  wet. 

SECTION  No.  144.  The  surface  of  concrete  to  which  water- 
proofing is  to  be  applied  shall  be  made  smooth  at  the  time  of 
placing  and  shall  be  carefully  protected  from  injury  by  barri- 
cades or  otherwise  until  thoroughly  set. 

SECTION  No.  145.  Concrete  shall  be  allowed  to  set  for 
twelve  (12)  hours,  or  more,  if  so  directed,  before  any  work 
shall  be  laid  upon  it.  No  walking  over  or  working  upon  the 
concrete  will  be  allowed  while  it  is  setting.  Concrete  shall  not 
be  flooded  with  water  before  it  has  thoroughly  set. 

SECTION  No.  146.  Before  laying  concrete  on  earth  the 
earth  shall  be  rammed  as  directed. 

SECTION  No.  147.  Wherever  a  section  of  concrete  is  neces- 
sarily left  unfinished,  leaving  a  surface  which  will  be  hard  set 
before  additional  concrete  can  be  laid,  care  shall  be  taken  to 
flush  the  cement  to  such  surface,  and  such  dovetails  or  grooves 
shall  be  formed  as  may  be  necessary  to  insure  a  good  bond 
with  the  new  work.  If  deemed  necessary  by  the  Engineer,  the 
joints  shall  be  reinforced  with  steel  bars  or  dowels. 

SECTION  No.  148.  In  all  cases  of  joining  old  with  new  work 
the  old  surfaces  shall  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  wet  and,  if 
required,  a  coating  of  mortar  or  cement  shall  be  applied  before 
placing  the  concrete." 

38 


SPECIFICATIONS — CONCRETE 

SECTION  No.  149.  Suitable  forms  shall  be  provided  by  the 
Contractor  to  support  the  concrete  while  it  is  being  placed. 
These  forms  shall  be  immediately  replaced  by  new  ones  as 
soon  as  they  commence  to  lose  their  proper  shape.  Before 
being  used  they  shall  be  carefully  cleaned  of  cement  and  dirt 
in  order  to  insure  a  perfectly  smooth  surface  on  the  concrete 
which  is  to  remain  exposed.  The  forms  (except  for  elevated 
railroad  column  foundations)  shall  be  made  of  wood,  kept 
carefully  planed,  or  made  of  metal  sufficiently  thick  to  enable 
them  to  retain  their  shape  without  the  use  of  wood.  Forms 
for  elevated  railroad  column  foundations  shall  be  made  of 
wood  or  metal. 

SECTION  No.  150.  No  forms  made  of  wood  covered  with 
sheet  iron  will  be  permitted. 

SECTION  No.  151.  The  joints  in  forms  shall  be  water-tight. 
If  forms  are  made  of  wood,  the  boards  shall  be  tongued  and 
grooved  where  required  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  152.  Every  precaution  shall  be  taken  to  con- 
struct the  forms  in  such  a  manner  as  will  insure  a  smooth  and 
even  surface  on  concrete  which  is  to  remain  exposed. 

SECTION  No.  153.  Forms  shall  be  set  true  to  line,  firmly 
secured,  and  shall  be  so  tight  as  to  prevent  water  in  the  mor- 
tar from  escaping;  they  shall  be  thoroughly  wet  before  the 
concrete  is  placed  and  shall  be  removed  as  soon  after  the  con- 
crete has  been  placed  as  in  the  judgment  of  the  Engineer  may 
be  done  with  safety  to  the  work.  Immediately  on  the  removal 
of  the  forms  the  faces  that  will  remain  exposed  shall  be  care- 
fully examined  and  any  irregularities  of  the  surface  corrected ; 
projections  shall  be  removed  and  voids  shall  be  filled  with 
mortar.  If,  however,  the  voids  are  such  as  to  indicate  an  ex- 
cessive loss  of  mortar,  portions  of  the  concrete  shall  be  cut  out 
to  the  fullness  of  such  defects  and  this  space  shall  be  refilled 
with  a  rich  concrete  or  mortar  in  such  proportions  and  in  such 
manner  as  the  Engineer  may  direct. 

SECTION  No.  154.  Where  reinforcing  steel  or  wire  mesh  is 
used,  efficient  means  shall  be  provided  to  maintain  it  in  the 

39, 


SPECIFICATIONS CONCRETE 

exact  position  it  is  to  occupy  in  the  completed  work,  and  to 
prevent  it  from  becoming  dislodged  or  moved  in  any  manner 
while  concrete  is  being  pb.eed. 

SECTION  No.  155.  Exposed  faces  of  concrete  shall  be  left 
with  the  natural  concrete  finish,  the  object  in  view  being  to 
obtain  a  generally  smooth  finished  surface  of  uniform  color. 
Immediately  following  the  removal  of  the  forms,  the  removal 
of  the  projections  and  the  filling  of  voids  as  provided  above, 
the  exposed  surfaces  shall  be  rubbed  down  in  such  a  manner, 
approved  by  the  Engineer,  as  will  insure  this  result. 

The  preceding  paragraph  of  this  Section  does  not  apply 
within  station  limits. 

SECTION  No.  156.  It  is  intended  to  obtain  concrete  im- 
pervious to  water ;  the  concrete  shall  be  mixed  and  deposited 
with  this  end  in  view. 

The  surfaces  of  drip-pans  under  ventilating  openings  and 
•other  surfaces  which  require  special  provision  for  drainage 
shall  be  troweled. 


SUBDIVISION  12 
BRICK  MASONRY 

SECTION  No.  159.  Bricks  for  masonry  shall  be  of  the  best 
quality  common  bricks,  burned  hard  entirely  through,  regular 
and  uniform  in  shape  and  size  and  of  compact  texture. 

SECTION  No.  160.  Hollow  terra  cotta  blocks  or  bricks  may 
be  required  on  the  outside  of  walls  of  the  structure  or  at  such 
other  places  as  the  Commission  may  direct.  They  shall  be  of  the 
best  porous  terra  cotta  as  approved  by  the  Engineer,  and  shall 
be  of  such  thickness  and  shall  be  laid  in  such  manner  as  here- 
inafter specified  or  as  the  Engineer  may  direct. 

Similar  terra  cotta  blocks  or  bricks  may  be  required  by  the 
Commission  in  station  work. 

SECTION  No.  161.  All  brick  masonry  shall  be  laid  in  mortar 
of  the  quality  described  in  Subdivision  9  of  this  Part,  except  that 
in  exposed  locations  coloring  matter  shall  be  added,  if  required  by 
the  Engineer.  The  bricks  shall  be  laid  to  line  with  joints  in 
the  face  work  not  exceeding  one-fourth  (J4)  of  an  inch  in  the 
beds,  and  three-eighths  (y%)  of  an  inch  on  ends;  the  bricks 
shall  be  thoroughly  wet  before  laying  and  shall  be  completely 
imbedded  in  mortar  under  the  bottom  and  on  the  sides  and 
ends  at  one  operation,  care  being  taken  to  have  every  joint 
full  of  mortar. 

All  exterior  surfaces  shall  be  smooth  and  regular. 

SECTION  No.  162.  The  inside  faces  of  all  arches  and  other 
exposed  parts  shall  have  all  the  mortar  scraped  off  and  washed 
clean  immediately  after  the  centers  have  been  struck,  and  shall 
be  pointed  and  left  in  neat  condition. 

SECTION  No.  163.  All  bricks  of  whatever  nature  shall  be 
carefully  culled  and  if  necessary  gauged  before  laying.  No 
"bats"  shall  be  used  except  in  large  masses  of  brickwork, 
where  a  moderate  proportion,  to  be  determined  by  the  Engi- 
neer, may  be  used,  but  nothing  smaller  than  half  bricks. 

SECTION  No.  164.  All  unfinished  work  shall  be  racked 
back  or  toothed,  as  directed  by  the  Engineer,  and  before  new 


SPECIFICATIONS — BRICK  MASONRY 

work  is  joined  to  it  the  faces  of  the  brick  in  the  old  work  shall 
be  scraped  entirely  clean,  scrubbed  with  a  stiff  brush  and  shall 
be  well  moistened. 

SECTION  No.  165.  Where  necessary  to  make  a  neat  joint  in 
connection  with  steel  framework,  or  at  corners,  curves,  or 
other  similar  places,  special  bricks  of  proper  shape  shall  be 
furnished  and  used.  All  centers  and  forms  shall  be  made  to 
fit  the  curves  of  the  work;  they  shall  be  put  up  and  removed 
in  a  manner  satisfactory  to  the  Engineer. 


SUBDIVISION  13 
STONE  MASONRY 

SECTION  No.  167.  Rubble  stone  masonry  may  be  required 
by  the  Commission  for  supporting  the  street  railroads  over  the 
roof  of  the  Railroad  where  permanent  supports  are  necessary 
and  at  such  other  places  as  the  Commission  may  require. 

SECTION  No.  168.  Rubble  stone  masonry  shall  be  made  of 
sound,  clean  stone  of  suitable  size,  quality  and  shape  for  the 
work  in  hand  and  shall  be  laid  in  mortar  mixed  in  the  propor- 
tion of  one  (i)  part  of  cement  to  three  (3)  parts  of  sand.  All 
beds  and  joints  shall  be  well  filled  with  mortar  and  the  work 
shall  be  thoroughly  bonded. 

SECTION  No.  169.  In  connection  with  the  construction  or 
sewers,  or  wherever  else  directed  by  the  Commission,  dry  rubble 
masonry  shall  be  used.  It  shall  consist  of  sound,  clean  stone 
not  less  than  three  (3)  inches  thick  and  one  (i)  cubic  foot  con- 
tents laid  on  natural  beds  with  such  spalls  as  are  required  for 
leveling  and  bonded  to  give  the  greatest  degree  of  strength. 

SECTION  No.  171.  In  case,  during  the  progress  of  the  work, 
stone  masonry  of  a  different  class  from  that  specified  above 
shall  be  required  by  the  Commission,  such  masonry  shall  be  con- 
structed according  to  specifications  applicable  to  the  best  work 
of  such  class. 


SUBDIVISION  14 
WATERPROOFING 

SECTION  No.  172.  In  general,  waterproofing  of  the  sub- 
surface portion  of  the  Railroad  will  be  limited  to  the  roof  and 
to  those  surfaces  where  water  is  encountered ;  waterproofing  of 
the  reinforced  concrete  portion  will  be  limited  to  the  backs  of 
retaining  walls  and  to  expansion  joints  in  the  retaining  walls ; 
waterproofing  of  the  elevated  portion  will  be  limited  to  the  track 
Moors  and  platforms  over  mezzanines  at  stations.  At  other  places 
free  drainage  shall  be  provided  by  pipe  drains,  hollow  tile  or 
broken  stone.  The  entire  surface  of  the  back  of  the  retaining 
walls  adjacent  to  embankment,  and  the  ends  of  retaining  walls 
at  expansion  joints  shall  receive  one  thick,  uniform  coat  of 
pitch 

SECTION  No.  173.  The  protective  masonry  shall  be  con- 
crete, common  bricks  or  hollow  terra  cotta  blocks  as  directed  by 
the  Commission,  laid  as  herein  elsewhere  provided,  and  shall  be 
not  less  than  four  (4)  inches  in  thickness. 

SECTION  No.  174.  In  places  where  permanent  sheeting  is 
placed  at  the  waterproofing  line,  the  waterproofing,  if  permit- 
ted by  the  Engineer,  may  be  applied  against  the  sheeting. 

SECTION  No.  175.  All  surfaces  to  which  waterproofing  is 
to  be  applied  shall  be  made  as  smooth  as  possible;  on  these 
surfaces  there  shall  be  spread  hot  melted  pitch  in  a  uniformly 
thick  layer;  on  this  layer  of  pitch,  where  required,  shall  be  laid 
a  treated  woven  fabric  of  such  material  as  may  be  approved  by 
the  Engineer ;  this  process  shall  be  repeated  until  such  number 
of  layers  as  may  be  required  by  the  Engineer  have  been  placed 
and  a  final  coat  of  pitch  shall  then  be  applied. 

SECTION  No.  176.  The  term  "ply"  as  used  in  these  speci- 
fications shall  mean  a  layer  of  treated  woven  fabric  (except  the 
dry-ply),  both  sides  of  which  shall  be  coated  with  pitch  at  the 
time  of  laying. 

SECTION  No.  177.     The  number  of  plies  of  waterproofing 

44  ^ 


SPECIFICATIONS WATERPROOFING 

over  the  roof  of  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad  shall  in  no 
case  be  less  than  three  (3). 

SECTION  No.  178.  On  the  sides  and  bottom  of  the  sub- 
surface portion  of  the  Railroad  structure  where  water  is 
encountered,  one  (i)  ply  of  waterproofing,  as  described  above, 
shall  be  used  with  one  or  more  layers  of  brick  laid  in  asphalt 
mastic ;  the  number  of  layers  of  brick  shall  be  determined  by 
the  Engineer. 

In  any  case  where  brick  laid  in  asphalt  mastic  is  not  used, 
the  number  of  plies  shall  be  as  local  conditions  require  and  as 
directed  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  179.  The  quality  of  brick  shall  be  the  same 
as  provided  in  Subdivision  12.  The  brick  shall  be  properly 
dried  and  shall  be  heated  before  laying.  Each  brick  when  laid 
shall  be  entirely  surrounded  with  asphalt  mastic. 

SECTION  No.  181.  Six  (6)  plies  of  waterproofing  may  be 
substituted  for  brick  in  asphalt  mastic,  if  approved  by  the 
Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  182.  Asphalt  mastic  may  be  mixed  by  hand 
or  in  an  approved  mixing  machine  and  shall  contain  not  less 
than  one-third  (1/3)  asphalt,  the  other  ingredients  to  be  sand 
and  limestone  dust  or  sand  and  cement.  The  ingredients  shall 
be  in  proportions  governed  by  local  requirements  and  weather 
conditions.  In  melting  and  mixing  the  mastic  its  temperature 
shall  not  exceed  350  degrees  Fahr.  All  packages  containing 
asphalt  shipped  to  the  work  must  be  distinctly  labeled  with 
the  manufacturer's  name  and  the  brand  or  number  of  the 
mixture. 

SECTION  No.  183.  Any  masonry  that  is  found  to  leak  at 
any  time  prior  to  the  completion  of  the  work  and  final  accept- 
ance thereof  by  the  Commission  shall  be  cut  out  and  the  leak 
stopped. 

SECTION  No.  184.  Pitch  shall  consist  of  either  coal-tar  or 
asphalt  as  the  Engineer  shall  elect ;  it  shall  be  delivered  on 

45 


SPECIFICATIONS WATERPROOFING 

the  work  in  packages  that  are  plainly  marked  with  the  manu- 
facturer's brand,  indicating  the  grade  and  quality  of  the  ma- 
terial. 

SECTION  No.  185.  Coal-tar,  except  for  the  elevated  portion 
of  the  Railroad,  shall  be  straight-run  pitch  containing  not  less 
than  twenty-five  per  centum  (25%)  and  not  more  than  thirty- 
two  per  centum  (32%)  of  free  carbon,  and  shall  soften  at  ap- 
proximately 70  degrees  Fahr.  and  melt  at  120  degrees  Fahr. 
by  the  cube-in-water  method,  shall  have  a  penetration  of  between 
115  and  135  and  shall  lose  not  over  eight  per  centum  (8%)  by 
weight  when  tested  as  provided  below  for  asphalt,  being  a  grade 
in  which  distillate  oils  distilled  therefrom  shall  have  a  specific 
gravity  of  1.05. 

Coal-tar  for  the  elevated  portion  of  the  Railroad  shall  be 
straight-run  pitch  containing  not  less  than  twenty-five  per  centum 
(25%)  and  not  more  than  thirty-two  per  centum  (32%)  of  free 
carbon  and  shall  soften  at  approximately  100  degrees  Fahr.  and 
melt  at  150  degrees  Fahr.  by  the  cube-in-water  method,  being  a 
grade  in  which  distillate  oils  distilled  therefrom  shall  have  a 
specific  gravity  of  1.05. 

SECTION  No.  186.  Asphalt  for  waterproofing  shall  consist 
of  fluxed  natural  asphalt,  or  asphalt  prepared  by  the  careful  dis- 
tillation of  asphaltic  petroleum,  subject  to  the  approval  of  the 
Engineer,  but  however  prepared,  it  shall  comply  with  the  follow- 
ing requirements: 

The  asphalt  shall  contain  in  its  refined  state  not  less  than 
ninety-five  percentum  (95%)  of  bitumen  soluble  in  cold  car- 
bon disulphide,  and  at  least  ninety-eight  and  one-half  per 
centum  (98^/2%)  of  the  bitumen  soluble  in  cold  carbon  disul- 
phide shall  be  soluble  in  cold  carbon  tetrachloride.  The  re- 
maining ingredients  shall  be  such  as  not  to  exert  an  injurious 
effect  on  the  work. 

The  asphalt  shall  not  flash  below  350  degrees  Fahr.  when 
tested  in  the  New  York  State  Closed  Oil  Tester.  When 
twenty  (20)  grams  of  the  material  are  heated  in  a  gas  oven  for 
five  (5)  hours  at  a  temperature  of  325  degrees  Fahr.  in  a  tin  box 
two  and  one-half  (2^)  inches  in  diameter  it  shall  lose  not  over 
three  per  centum  (3%)  by  weight,  nor  shall  the  penetration  at 


46 


SPECIFICATIONS WATERPROOFING 

77  degrees  Fahr.  after  such  heating  be  less  than  one-half  (l/2) 
of  the  original  penetration. 

The  melting  point  of  the  material  shall  be  between  115  de- 
grees and  135  degrees  Fahr.  as  determined  by  the  Kraemer  and 
Sarnow  method. 

The  consistency  shall  be  determined  by  the  penetration 
which  shall  be  between  75  and  100  at  77  degrees  Fahr. 

A  briquette  of  the  solid  bitumen  of  cross  section  of  one 
square  centimeter  shall  have  a  ductility  of  not  less  than 
twenty  (20)  centimeters  at  77  degrees  Fahr.,  the  material  be- 
ing elongated  at  the  rate  of  five  (5)  centimeters  per  minute 
(Dow  moulds.) 

All  tests  herein  specified  must  be  conducted  according  to 
methods  approved  by  the  Engineer. 

Penetrations   indicated  herein   refer  to   the   depth   of   pene- 
tration in  hundredth  centimeters  of  a  No.  2  cambric  needle 
weighted  to  one  hundred   (100)   grams  at  77  degrees  Fahr 
acting  for  five  (5)  seconds. 

SECTION  No.  187.  The  fabric  to  be  used  shall  be  a  woven 
fabric  which  shall  have  been  treated  with  pitch  before  being 
brought  on  the  work.  The  fabric  and  the  material  used  in  its 
treatment  shall  be  approved  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  188.  All  concrete  shall  be  dry  before  water- 
proofing is  attached.  If,  in  the  judgment  of  the  Engineer,  it 
is  impracticable  to  have  the  concrete  dry,  then  there  shall  be 
first  laid  a  layer  of  treated  felt  of  approved  quality,  on  the 
upper  surface  of  which  shall  be  spread  the  first  layer  of 
pitch. 

Each  layer  of  pitch  shall  completely  and  entirely  cover  the 
surface  on  which  it  is  spread  without  cracks  or  blow  holes. 

SECTION  No.  189.  The  fabric  shall  be  rolled  out  into  the 
pitch  while  the  latter  is  still  hot,  and  pressed  against  it  so  as 
to  Insure  its  being  completely  stuck  over  its  entire  surface, 
great  care  being  taken  that  all  joints  are  well  broken  by  over- 
lapping, and  that,  unless  otherwise  permitted,  the  ends  of  the 
rolls  of  the  bottom  layers  are  carried  up  on  the  inside  of  the 
layers  on  the  sides,  and  those  of  the  roof  down  on  the  outside 


47 


SPECIFICATIONS WATERPROOFING 

of  the  layers  on  the  sides  so  as  to  secure  a  full  lap  of  at  least 
one  (i)  foot.     Especial  care  shall  be  taken  with  this  detail. 

SECTION  No.  190.  When  concrete  is  laid  over  or  next  to  the 
waterproofing  material,  care  shall  be  taken  not  to  break,  tear  or 
injure  in  any  way  the  outer  surface  of  the  pitch. 

SECTION  No.  191.  None  but  competent  men,  especially 
skilled  in  work  of  this  kind,  shall  be  employed  to  lay  the 
waterproofing. 


SUBDIVISION  15 
STEEL  AND  IRON 

SECTION  No.  193.     Steel  shall  be  made  by  the  open  hearth 
process. 

SECTION  No.  194.    The  chemical  and  physical  properties  of 
Finished  material  shall  conform  to  the  following  limits : 


Properties. 

Structui  ;  1 
Steel. 

Rivet 

Steel. 

Steel 
Castings. 

Phos    (Max  )     

.04% 

.04% 

05% 

Sulph        "       

.05% 

.04% 

.05% 

Mn            " 

60% 

60% 

80% 

Si              "       

10% 

.10% 

35% 

Ult    Str 

60000  -f-  4000 

50000  -+-  4000 

65000  (Mir  ) 

Yield  Point   (Min.)  

55%  Ult 

55%  Ult. 

35000 

Elongation,   Min.  %   in  8 

1500000 

1500000 

Elongation,   Min.  %   in  2 

Ult.  Ten.  Str. 

Ult.  Ten.  Str. 

?09/> 

Silky 

Silky. 

Silky,  or 

Cold  Bends  without  Frac- 

180°  flat. 

180°  flat. 

Fine  granular 
120°  (d.=3t.) 

SECTION  No.  195.  The  yield  point  shall  be  that  strain  be- 
yond which  the  elongation  ceases  to  be  proportional  to  the 
weight  imposed,  and  may  be  indicated  by  drop  of  beam.  The 
speed  of  testing  shall  be  governed  by  the  Inspector. 

SECTION  No.  196.  Sufficient  discard  shall  be  made  to  in- 
sure sound  material  free  from  piping  or  excessive  segregation. 
The  material  shall  be  finished  straight  and  smooth,  and  shall 
be  free  from  all  seams,  flaws,  cracks,  defective  edges  or  other 
defects.  Any  imperfection  which  may  develop  during  the 
progress  of  the  work  will  be  sufficient  cause  for  rejection. 

SECTION  No.  197.  Steel  castings  shall  be  true  to  pattern 
and  free  from  injurious  imperfections. 


49 


SPECIFICATIONS  -  STEEL   AND    IRON 

SECTION  No.  198.  Sample  pieces  for  tensile  and  bending 
tests  of  plates,  shapes  and  bars  shall  be  cut  from  such  portions 
<;f  the  finished  product  of  each  melt  as  the  Inspector  may 
designate,  and  shall  be  stamped  by  him  ;  they  shall  have  both 
faces  rolled  and  both  edges  milled  to  the  usual  form  of  a 
standard  test  specimen,  —  one  and  one-half  (ij^)  inches  wide 
on  a  gauged  length  of  nine  (9)  inches,  —  or  with  both  edges 
parallel.  The  area  of  the  minimum  section  shall  be  not  less 
than  one-half  (J^)  square  inch. 


SECTION  No.  199.  Angles  three-fourths  (?4)  of  an  inch 
and  less  in  thickness  shall  open  flat,  and  angles  one-half  (J^)  of 
an  inch  and  less  in  thickness  shall  bend  shut,  cold,  under  blows 
of  a  hammer,  without  sign  of  fracture.  This  test  shall  be  made 
only  when  required  by  the  Inspector. 

SECTION  No.  200.     Rivet  rods  shall  be  tested  as  rolled. 

For  rollers  and  pins  the  specimens  shall  be  cut  from  the  fin- 
ished bar  so  that  the  center  of  the  specimen  'shall  be  one  (i)  inch 
from  the  outside  of  the  bar.  The  form  and  dimensions  shall  be 
the  same  as  those  specified  for  steel  castings. 

SECTION  No.  201.  For  steel  castings  the  test  piece  shall  be 
turned  to  a  uniform  minimum  section  of  one-half  (J^)  inch 
diameter,  for  a  length  of  at  least  two  and  one-half  (2j/£)  inches. 
Specimens  for  bending  shall  be  one  (i)  inch  by  one-half  (j£) 
inch  in  section. 

SECTION  No.  202.  Rivet  steel,  when  nicked  and  bent  around 
a  bar  of  the  same  diameter  as  the  rivet  rod,  shall  give  a  gradual 
break  and  a  fine,  silky,  uniform  fracture. 

SECTION  No.  204.  For  steel  castings  the  number  of  tests 
will  depend  on  the  character  and  importance  of  the  castings.  Spec- 
imens shall  be  cut  cold  from  coupons  molded  and  cast  on  some 
portion  of  one  or  more  castings  from  each  melt.  The  coupons 
shall  be  annealed  with  the  castings  before  being  cut  off. 

SECTION  No.  205.  At  least  one  tensile  and  one  bending  test 
shall  be  made  from  each  melt  of  steel  as  rolled.  In  case  steel 


SPECIFICATIONS  -  STEEL    AND    IRON 

differing  three-eighths  (  %  )  of  an  inch  or  more  in  thickness 
is  rolled  from  one  melt,  a  test  shall  be  made  from  the  thick- 
est and  from  the  thinnest  material  rolled.  Rolled  steel  shall  be 
tested  in  the  condition  in  which  it  comes  from  the  rolls. 

Material  which,  subsequent  to  tests  at  the  mills  and  its  ac- 
ceptance there,  develops  weak  spots,  brittleness,  cracks  or  other 
imperfections,  or  is  found  to  have  injurious  defects,  will  be  re- 
jected at  the  shop  and  shall  be  replaced  by  the  manufacturer. 

If  the  above  tests  do  not  fulfill  the  requirements  of  these 
specifications,  duplicate  tests  may  be  made  at  the  discretion  of  the 
Inspector,  he  selecting  and  stamping  the  duplicate  test  pieces.  If 
these  retests  meet  all  the  rquirements,  the  melt  shall  be  accepted. 

SECTION  No.  206.  A  variation  in  weight  or  cross  section  of 
any  piece  of  steel  of  more  than  two  and  one-half  per  centum 
(2^2%)  from  that  specified  shall  be  sufficient  cause  for  rejection, 
except  in  case  of  sheared  plates  exceeding  one  hundred  (iocO 
inches  in  width,  where  the  variation  may  be  five  per  centum 


SECTION  No.  207.  Every  finished  piece  of  steel  shall  have 
the  melt  number  and  the  name  of  the  manufacturer  stamped  or 
rolled  upon  it.  Bars  for  reinforcing  concrete,  rivet  and  lattice 
"steel,  and  other  small  parts,  may  be  bundled,  with  above  marks 
on  an  attached  metal  tag. 

SECTION  No.  208.  The  Contractor  shall  furnish  such  stand- 
ard test  pieces  as  may  be  necessary  to  determine  the  uniform 
quality  of  the  material  and  also  the  use  of  a  reliable  testing  ma- 
chine, with  the  necessary  labor  for  testing. 

SECTION  No.  209.  Chemical  determinations  of  the  percent- 
ages of  carbon,  phosphorus,  sulphur  and  manganese  shall  be 
made  by  the  manufacturer  from  a  test  ingot,  so  taken,  during 
the  casting  of  each  melt  of  steel,  as  fairly  to  represent  the  melt. 
Two  (2)  copies  of  such  analyses  shall  be  furnished  to  the  Engi- 
neer or  the  Inspector. 

SECTION  No.  210.  The  Engineer  shall  be  furnished  with 
complete  copies  in  triplicate  of  all  mill  orders,  and  no  material 

51 


SPECIFICATIONS STEEL   AND    IRON 

shall  be  rolled  nor  work  done  before  the  Engineer  has  been  no- 
tified so  that  he  may  arrange  for  the  inspection. 

The  Engineer  shall  be  furnished  with  complete  copies  of 
shipping  invoices,  in  triplicate,  with  each  shipment.  Each  in- 
voice shall  show  the  scale  weight  of  each  individual  piece. 

WROUGHT  IRON 

SECTION  No.  211.  All  wrought  iron  shall  be*  double  rolled, 
tough,  fibrous  and  uniform  in  character.  It  shall  be  thoroughly 
welded  in  rolling  and  shall  be  free  from  surface  defects. 

SECTION  No.  212.  The  methods  specified  for  testing  rolled 
steel  shall  apply  generally  to  wrought  iron.  Standard  test  speci- 
mens shall  show  an  ultimate  strength  of  at  least  fifty  thousand 
(50,000)  Ibs.  per  square  inch,  and  an  elongation  of  at  least  eigh- 
teen (18)  per  centum  in  eight  (8)  inches,  with  fracture  wholly 
fibrous.  Specimens  shall  bend  cold  with  the  fibre,  through  one 
hundred  and  thirty-five  (135)  degrees,  without  sign  of  fracture, 
with  inner  radius  not  to  exceed  the  th'ickness  of  the  piece  tested. 
When  nicked  and  bent  the  fracture  shall  show  at  least  ninety 
per  centum  (90%)  fibrous. 

CAST  IRON 

SECTION  No.  213.  Cast  iron  shall  be  tough,  gray  iron  made 
by  the  Cupola  process  and  shall  contain  not  more  than  six-tenths 
per  centum  (0.6%)  of  phosphorus  and  not  more  than  twelve  one- 
hundredths  per  centum  (0.12%)  of  sulphur.  No  mill  cinder  iron, 
white  or  burnt  iron  or  inferior  scrap  of  any  kind  will  be  permitted 
in  the  composition. 

SECTION  No.  214.  The  quality  of  the  iron  entering  into  cast- 
ings shall  be  determined  by  means  of  the  "Arbitration  Bar."  This 
is  a  bar  one  and  one-fourth  (1*4)  inches  in  diameter  and  fifteen 
(15)  inches  long,  cast  under  the  same  circumstances  as  those 
which  attended  the  casting  of  the  full-sized  piece.  This  bar 
shall  sustain  at  the  center,  when  resting  upon  two  dull  knife 
edges  twelve  (12)  inches  apart,  a  load  of  three  thousand  (3000) 
pounds  with  a  deflection  of  at  least  one-tenth  (o.io)  of  an  inch 
before  rupture. 


SPECIFICATIONS STEEL    AND    IRON 

Two  (2)  sets  of  two  (2)  bars  shall  be  cast  from  each  heat; 
one  set  from  the  first  and  the  other  set  from  the  last  iron  enter- 
ing into  the  castings.  Each  set  of  two  bars  is  to  be  made  in  a 
single  mold. 

SECTION  No.  215.  Castings  shall  be  sound,  true  to  pattern, 
free  from  cracks,  flaws  and  excessive  shrinkage,  and  shall  have 
smooth,  clean  surfaces.  They  shall  be  neatly  chiseled  and  wire1 
brushed  before  leaving  the  foundry.  Castings  which  do  not  ac- 
curately conform  to  dimensions  on  the  drawings  will  be  rejected. 
Each  casting  shall  have  its  distinguishing  letter  or  number  cast 
on  it  at  the  place  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

WORKMANSHIP 

SECTION  No.  216.  The  workmanship  shall  be  equal  to  the 
best  practice  in  modern  bridge  works. 

Shearing  and  chipping  shall  be  neatly  and  accurately  done 
and  all  portions  of  the  work  exposed  to  view  neatly  finished. 
All  nuts  exposed  to  view  on  the  final  structure  shall  be  hex- 
agonal. Lattice  bars  shall  have  neatly  rounded  ends,  concentric 
with  rivet  holes. 

SECTION  No.  217.  Rods  and  bars  to  be  used  for  reinforcing 
concrete  shall  be  deformed  as  approved  by  the  Engineer;  plain 
bars  will  not  be  used. 

SECTION  No.  218.  Bent  rods  shall  be  bent  uniformly  to  tem- 
plate in  a  machine  or  press  approved  by  the  Engineer.  They 
may  be  bent  either  at  the  shop  or  on  the  work.  In  special  cases 
bending  hot  and  annealing  may  be  required. 

SECTION  No.  219.  All  material  shall  be  straightened  in  the 
shop  before  being  worked  in  any  way  and  a'gain  straightened 
after  punching  and  before  assembling,  if  required  by  the  Engi- 
neer or  Inspector. 

SECTION  No.  220.  The  size  of  rivets  called  for  on  the  draw- 
ings shall  be  understood  to  mean  the  actual  size  of  the  cold  rivet 
before  heating. 


53 


SPECIFICATIONS STEEL    AND    IRON 

SECTION  No.  221.  All  holes  shall  be  accurately  spaced  and 
punched.  The  diameter  of  the  punch  shall  be  not  more  than 
one-sixteenth  (1/16)  inch  greater  than  the  diameter  of  the  rivet. 
The  diameter  of  the  die  shall  be  as  small  as  may  be  required  to 
punch  a  clean  hole. 

SECTION  No.  222.  Punching  shall  be  accurately  done. 
Drifting  to  enlarge  unfair  holes  will  not  be  allowed.  If  the 
holes  must  be  enlarged  to  admit  the  rivet  they  shall  be  reamed. 
Poor  matching  of  holes  will  be  cause  for  rejection. 

SECTION  No.  223.  Where  sub-punching  and  reaming  are 
required,  the  punch  used  shall  have  a  diameter  not  less  than 
three-sixteenths  (3/16)  of  an  inch  smaller  than  the  diameter 
of  the  rivet.  Holes  shall  then  be  reamed  to  a  diameter  not 
more  than  one-sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  larger  than  the 
nominal  diameter  of  the  rivet.  All  reaming  shall  be  done 
with  twist  drills  after  the  material  is  assembled  and  firmly 
bolted  together.  The  use  of  lubricants  in  reaming  will  not  be 
permitted. 

SECTION  No.  224.  All  material  over  seven-eighths  (%)  of 
an  inch  thick  shall  be  drilled  from  the  solid.  Material  over 
hve-eighths  (^)  of  an  inch  and  not  exceeding  seven-eighths 
of  an  inch  in  thickness  shall  be  sub-punched  and  reamed. 


SECTION  No.  225.  Sheared  edges  of  plates,  exceeding  five- 
eighths  (;Hj)  of  an  inch  in  thickness  in  main  members,  shall  be 
planed  at  least  one-eighth  (l/%)  of  an  inch. 

SECTION  No.  226.  All  burrs  on  rivet  holes  shall  be  re- 
moved. 

SECTION  No.  227.  Riveted  members  shall  have  all  parts 
well  pinned  up  and  firmly  drawn  together  with  bolts,  before 
riveting  is  commenced.  Contact  surfaces  shall  be  painted. 

SECTION  No.  228.  Rivets  when  driven  shall  completely  fill 
the  holes,  and  shall  be  machine  driven  wherever  possible. 
They  shall  have  full  concentric  heads  or  they  shall  be  counter- 

54 


SPECIFICATIONS STEEL    AND    IRON 

sunk  when  so  required.  Rivet  heads  shall  not  be  flattened 
to  less  than  one-half  (J^)  the  diameter  of  the  rivet  on  the  line 
of  the  shank,  unless  countersunk.  Loose,  burnt  or  otherwise 
defective  rivets  shall  be  cut  out  and  replaced.  In  cutting  out 
defective  rivets,  great  care  shall  be  taken  not  to  injure  the  ad- 
jacent material.  If  necessary  they  shall  be  drilled  out. 

Distances  from  center  of  rivet  to  edge  of  sheared  plates 
shall  be  not  less  than  il/4"  for  y4"  rivets  and  H/s"  for  7/s" 
rivets ;  distances  from  center  of  rivets  to  a  rolled  edge  shall 
be  not  less  than  il/z"  for  24"  rivets  and  1*4"  for  %"  rivets. 
The  minimum  pitch  for  1/4"  rivets  shall  be  2^/2"  and  for  ~/%" 
rivets  2j^".  When  material  is  sub-punched  and  reamed  the 
pitch  for  -)4"  rivets  may  be  made  2^4"  and  for  %"  rivets  2^6". 

SECTION  No.  229.  Generally  the  use  of  bolts  instead  of' 
rivets  will  not  be  permitted,  but  when  used  in  special  cases 
the  holes  shall  be  reamed  parallel,  and  the  bolts  turned  to  a 
driving  fit,  with  the  threads  entirely  outside  of  the  holes. 
Washers  not  less  than  one-fourth  (}4)  inch  thick  shall  be 
used  under  the  nuts.  Bolts  must  be  thickly  coated  with  red 
lead  paint  before  insertion,  so  as  to  seal  the  hole  against 
moisture. 

SECTION  No.  230.  All  holes  for  field  rivets,  excepting  those 
in  connections  of  lateral  and  sway  bracing,  shall  be  sub- 
punched  and  accurately  drilled  to  an  iron  template,  fitted 
with  bushings  or  reamed  and  match  marked  while  the  con- 
necting parts  are  temporarily  assembled  in  the  shop.  In  case 
of  splices  of  upper  chords  or  other  compression  members,  the 
abutting  ends  shall  be  brought  to  a  forcible  bearing. 

SECTION  No.  231.  Finished  members  shall  be  true  and  free 
from  twists,  bends  or  open  joints.  Ends  of  floor  beams  and 
stringers  shall  be  faced  square  and  true. 

Pins  and  rollers  shall  be  turned  accurately  to  gauge  and 
shall  be  straight  and  smooth  and  entirely  free  from  flaws. 
Pin-holes  shall  be  bored  true  to  gauges,  smooth  and  straight; 
at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  a  member  and  parallel  to  each 
other  unless  otherwise  called  for.  The  boring  shall  be  done 
after  the  member  is  riveted  up. 


5S. 


SPECIFICATIONS STEEL    AND    IRON 

SECTION  No.  232.  Rods  and  bars  which  are  to  receive  a 
thread  shall  be  properly  upset.  Where  threads  are  cut  on 
steel,  they  shall  be  properly  filleted. 

SECTION  No.  233.  Steel,  except  in  minor  details,  which  has 
been  partially  heated,  shall  be  properly  annealed.  All  steel 
castings  shall  be  annealed.  Welds  in  steel  will  not  be  al- 
lowed. 

SECTION  No.  234.  All  abutting  surfaces  shall  be  accurately 
planed  or  faced,  so  as  to  insure  even  bearings,  except  where 
otherwise  noted  on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  235.  Stiffeners  of  plate  girders  shall  be  faced 
on  the  ends  and  brought  to  a  true  contact  bearing  with  the 
flange  angles.  Web  splice  plates  and  fillers  under  stiffeners 
shall  be  cut  to  fit  within  one-eighth  (*/£)  of  an  inch  of  flange 
angles. 

SECTION  No.  236.  Web  plates  must  not  project  beyond  the 
flange  angles  nor  be  more  than  one-fourth  (%)  of  an  inch  back 
of  face  of  angles. 

SECTION  No.  237.  Expansion  bed  plates  shall  be  planed  true 
and  smooth.  The  bottom  of  the  shoes  shall  be  planed  exactly 
parallel  to  the  center  line  unless  otherwise  shown.  The  finishing 
cut  of  the  planing  tool  shall  be  fine  and  shall  correspond  with  the 
direction  of  expansion. 

SECTION  No.  238.  Nuts,  bolts,  rivets  and  other  similar  ma- 
terial shall  be  boxed. 

SECTION  No.  239.  The  scale  weight  shall  be  plainly  marked 
upon  every  piece  and  box. 

SECTION  No.  240.  Free  access  and  information  shall  be  given 
by  the  Contractor  for  a  thorough  inspection  of  material  and  work- 
manship. 

SECTION  No.  241.     The  Inspector  shall  make  detailed  reports 

56 


SPECIFICATIONS STEEL  AND  IRON 

of  his  inspection  to  the  Engineer  and  may  notify  the  Contractor 
of  any  defects  in  the  material  or  workmanship,  but  all  acceptances 
made  by  him  shall  be  considered  temporary,  and  his  inspection 
shall  in  no  way  relieve  the  Contractor  of  full  responsibility  for 
the  character  and  accuracy  of  the  work. 

SECTION  No.  242.  The  Contractor  shall  be  responsible  for 
all  errors  which  can  be  discovered  by  checking  or  examining  the 
drawings. 

SECTION  No.  243.  The  Contractor  shall  furnish  for  the  use 
of  the  Inspector  a  suitably  equipped  office  at  the  mills  and  at  the 
shops. 

SECTION  No.  244.  All  parts  shall  be  carefully  loaded,  un- 
loaded and  protected  from  injury  during  transportation  by  such 
means  as  will  be  satisfactory  to  the  Inspector.  Trucks  for  trans- 
porting steel  shall  be  of  the  underslung  or  other  approved  design 
and  shall  be  equipped  with  skids  and  jacks.  Steel  and  iron  shall 
be  lowered  gently  and  not  dropped.  After  delivery  of  materials 
at  the  work  the  Contractor  will  be  required  to  store  such  materials 
on  skids  at  least  twelve  (12)  inches  above  the  ground  and  to  keep 
such  materials  in  good  condition.  Any  piece  showing  injurious 
effects  of  rough  handling  at  any  stage  before  the  final  acceptance 
of  the  work  may  be  rejected. 

SPECIAL  WIRE  FORMS 

SECTION  No.  247.  Special  wire  forms,  of  a  type  and  weight 
to  be  approved  by  the  Engineer,  shall  be  furnished  and  placed 
around  the  flanges  of  beams  and  girders  which  are  to  be  com- 
pletely encased  in  concrete,  and  at  other  places  as  may  be  re- 
quired, in  order  to  hold  the  concrete  in  place. 


57 


SUBDIVISION  16  *  * 
PAINTING 

SECTION  No.  249.  All  metal  work,  except  as  otherwise 
herein  provided,  shall  be  painted  with  three  (3)  coats  of  paint,  as 
follows :  Shop  coat,  second  coat  and  finishing  coat. 

The  finishing  coat  for  the  subsurface  and  reinforced  concrete 
portions  of  the  Railroad  will  be  a  gray  paint  if  adjacent  to  con- 
crete, otherwise  a  black  paint. 

SECTION  No.  250.  Paint  shall  be  subject  to  inspection  at  the 
place  of  manufacture  and  to  such  tests  as  may  be  ordered  by  the 
Engineer.  The  Engineer  shall  have  access,  at  all  times,  to  all 
places  to  inspect  the  metho'ds  of  manufacture,  and  shall  have  lib- 
erty to  inspect  the  daily  laboratory  records  and  analyses  of  all 
such  paints  as  are  subject  to  his  inspection. 

The  Contractor  shall  furnish  all  facilities  required  for  the 
proper  inspection  of  the  paint  and  its  manufacture.  All  contain- 
ers will  be  sealed  by  the  Inspector  at  the  time  of  inspection. 

SECTION  No.  251.  All  proportions  mentioned  in  this  specifi- 
cation are  by  weight,  except  when  otherwise  noted. 

SECTION  No.  252.    The  paint  formulae  are  as  follows : 
PAINT  FORMULAE  FOR  SUBSURFACE  PORTION  OF  THE  RAILROAD 

Finishing  Coat 
Shop  Coat     Second  Coat       Gray        Black 

Pigment 500  pounds  49%  $?%  26% 

Vehicle    i6*/2  gal.  51%  43%  74% 

VEHICLE  FORMULAE 

Raw  linseed  oil 2/3  by  volume      90%  92%  92% 

Boiled  linseed  oil ....  1/3  by  volume       

Drier 10%  8%  8% 

PIGMENT  FORMULAE 

Red  lead 100%  .      ..  30%  25% 

Red  iron  oxide 42%  .... 

Lampblack    5%                 *           50% 

Magnesium  silicate 10%  •••• 

Silica 13%  10% 

Sublimed  White  Lead     .  .  ^ .  60% 

White   Zinc 30% 


*  Use  sufficient  lampblack  to  make  standard  shade. 
**  See  Subdivision  14  of  Part  Second  for  station  finish  paint- 
ing. 

58 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

The  paint  formuhe  for  the  elevated  portion  of  the  Railroad 
are  as  follows : 

PAINT  FORMULAE 

Shop  Second  Finishing 

Coat  Coat  Coat 

Pigment    500  pounds                     37%  307^ 

Vehicle i6&  gals.                     63%  70^ 


VEHICLE  FORMULAE 

Raw  Linseed  Oil ....  2/3  by  volume  94%                      889v 
Boiled     "            "           1/3"       " 

Drier 6%                       6% 

Turpentine &,< 

PIGMENT  FORMULAE 

Red  Lead 100%  50% 

Lampblack   , 25%                     40% 

Magnesium  Silicate 10%                     2Of/( 

Silica    1S% 

Chrome   Yellow,   me- 
dium   C.    P .;:  .,«  ,y.\  40% 

For  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad  the  standard  weight 
of  second  coat  shall  be  12  pounds  10  ounces  per  gallon,  the  stand- 
ard weight  of  finishing  coat  (gray)  shall  be  14  pounds  6  ounces 
per  gallon  and  the  standard  weight  of  finishing  coat  (black)  shall 
be  9  pounds  5  ounces  per  gallon. 

For  the  elevated  portion  of  the  Railroad,  the  standard  weight 
of  second  coat  shall  be  ten  (10)  pounds  seven  and  one-half  (7^2) 
ounces  per  gallon  and  the  standard  weight,  of  finishing  coat  shall 
be  nine  (9)  pounds  eleven  ( 1 1 )  ounces  per  gallon. 

SECTION  No.  253.  The  shop  coat  of  paint  shall  be  mixed,  as 
needed,  in  such  quantities  as  can  be  used  before  it  thickens  in 
the  container.  Any  paint  which  settles  and  thickens  before  use 
shall  be  rejected  and  a  new  paint  mixed. 

The  second  and  finishing  coats  shall  be  furnished  in  a  ready 
mixed  form  and  shall  be  used  without  the  subsequent  addition  of 
any  material. 

59 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

All  paints  shall  be  properly  prepared,  using  only  the  speci- 
fied materials  in  the  proportions  stated,  with  an  allowable  varia- 
tion therefrom  of  not  over  two  (2)  per  centum  in  the  quantity 
of  any  material  therein.  The  paint  shall  vary  not  more  than  four 
(4)  ounces  per- gallon  from  the  standard  weight. 

SECTION  No.  254.  Raw  linseed  oil  shall  conform  to  the 
specifications  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials  for 
ihe  purity  of  raw  linseed  oil  from  North  American  seed,  adopted 
August  25,  1913. 

Boiled  linseed  oil  shall  conform  to  the  proposed  specifica- 
tions of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials,  1915. 

When  boiled  linseed  oil  is  flowed  over  a  plate  of  glass  and 
allowed  to  drain  in  a  nearly  vertical  position,  it  shall  dry  free 
from  tackiness  in  fifteen  (15)  hours  at  /o  degrees  Fahr. 

The  drier  shall  be  a  pure  oil  drier  consisting  of  lead  and  man- 
ganese salts  dissolved  in  linseed  oil  and  thinned  with  turpentine 
as  follows : 

Fifteen  (15)  pounds  of  manganese  dioxide  plus  10  pounds 
of  varnish  makers'  red  lead,  to  50  gallons  of  oil,  boiled  to  proper 
consistency  and  thinned  with  50  gallons  of  turpentine. 

Turpentine  shall  be  gum  turpentine  and  shall  conform  to  the 
proposed  specifications  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Ma- 
terials. 

SECTION  No.  255.  Red  lead  for  the  shop  coat  shall  be  of  the 
best  quality,  free  from  all  adulteration  and  shall  contain  not  less 
than  80%  nor  more  than  90%  "true  red  lead"  (Pb3O4),  not  over 
!  %  inert  hearth  materials  (such  as  silica  and  alumina)  and  not 
more  than  0.1%  metallic  lead;  the  remainder  shall  be  pure  lead 
monoxide  (PbO).  It  must  contain  no  organic  coloring  matter 
and  when  shaken  up  with  water  shall  show  no  alkaline  reaction. 
It  shall  be  of  such  fineness  that  99^%  wm*  Pass  through  a  stand- 
ard 2OO-mesh  sieve. 

Red  lead  for  the  second  and  finishing  coats  shall  be  of  the 
best  quality,  free  from  all  adulteration  and  shall  contain  not  less 
than  85%  true  red  lead  (Pb3O4),  not  over  i%  inert  hearth  ma- 
terials (such  as  silica  and  alumina)  and  not  more  than  0.1% 
metallic  lead;  the  remainder  shall  be  pure  lead  monoxide  (PbO). 
It  must  contain  no  organic  coloring  matter  and  when  shaken  up 

60 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

with  water  shall  show  no  alkaline  reaction.  It  shall  be  of  such 
fineness  that  99^%  will  pass  through  a  standard  2OO-mesh 
sieve. 

Dry  lampblack  shall  be  absolutely  neutral  and  shall  contain  at 
least  98%,  by  weight,  of  pure  carbon.  The  tinting  power  of 
lampblack  used  in  the  finishing  coat  shall  be  the  same  as  the 
standard  sample. 

Magnesium  silicate  shall  be  a  finely  ground  material  of  crys- 
talline structure  and  shall  equal  the  standard  sample. 

Silica  shall  be  ground  from  rock  crystal  and  water  floated. 
It  shall  be  99%  pure  silica  (SiO2)  and  shall  be  of  such  fineness 
that  99%  will  pass  through  a  standard  2OO-mesh  sieve.  It 
shall  equal  the  standard  sample. 

Red  iron  oxide  shall  contain  at  least  85%  ferric  oxide,  the 
remainder  to  consist  of  silicates.  The  oxide  shall  contain  no 
soluble  sulphates,  no  free  acids,  shall  give  a  neutral  reaction 
and  shall  contain  not  over  0.1%  sulphur  in  any  form.  It  shall 
be  free  from  grit  and  shall  equal  the  standard  sample  in  shade, 
quality  and  tinting  power. 

Sublimed  white  lead  shall  be  a  true  basic  sulphate  of  lead 
containing  not  less  than  15%  combined  lead  monoxide  (PbO), 
not  over  5%  zinc  oxide  (ZnO),  and  shall  contain  not  more  than 
.075%  free  sulphur  dioxide  (SO2).  Sublimed  white  lead  shall 
equal  in  whiteness,  fineness,  body  and  covering  qualities  the 
standard  sample. 

White  zinc  shall  be  "American  process,"  and  shall  contain 
at  least  98%,  by  weight,  oxide  of  zinc  (ZnO),  not  more  than 
0.2%  of  sulphur  in  any  form,  nor  more  than  .075%  free  sulphur 
dioxide  (SO2).  White  zinc  shall  equal  in  whiteness,  fineness, 
body  and  covering  qualities  the  standard  sample. 

Chrome  yellow,  medium,  C.  P.,  shall  be  ninety-eight  per 
centum  (98%)  pure  lead  chromate  or  basic  lead  chromate.  Tt 
shall  be  the  same  as  the  standard  sample  in  color  and  strength. 

SECTION  No.  256.  The  paint  for  the  second  and  finishing 
coats  shall  be  so  finely  ground  that  it  will  pass  each  of  the  fol- 
lowing tests : 

(a)  When  a  small  amount  is  placed  upon  a  piece  of  glass 
and  the  glass  placed  in  a  vertical  position,  there  shall  be  no  sep- 
aration of  the  oil  from  the  pigments  for  at  least  one  (i)  hour. 
This  test  is  to  be  conducted  at  70°  F. 

61 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

(b)  Fill  a  $/%  inch  test  tube  with  pure  raw  linseed  oil  to  a 
height  of  3^  inches  and  add  paint  until  the  height  of  the  oil 
is  five   (5)    inches  from  the  bottom.    Cork,  shake  well  and  let 
stand  in  a  vertical  position   for  two   (2)    hours.     The  opaque 
mass  must  not  have  settled  down  more  than  y2  inch  and  there 
must  be  no   separation  of  the  coarser  particles   in  the  bottom 
of  the  test  tube.     This  test  is  to  be  conducted  at  70°  F. 

(c)  At  least  98%  of  the  extracted  pigment  shall  pass  through 
a  standard  2OO-mesh  sieve. 

(d)  When  rubbed  with  a  spatula  on  a  piece  of  glass  there 
shall  be  no  feeling  of  grittiness. 

SECTION  No.  257.  By  standard  2OO-mesh  sieve  is  meant  the 
2OO-mesh  sieve  described  in  the  specification  of  the  American 
Society  for  Testing  Materials  for  Portland  Cement,  adopted  Au- 
gust 1 6,  1909. 

SECTION  No.  258.  The  shade  of  the  gray  finishing  coat  and 
the  finishing  coat  for  the  elevated  railroad  shall  match  the  shade 
of  the  standard  sample. 

The  paint  shall  dry  under  normal  conditions,  dust  free,  in 
12  hours,  and  so  as  to  be  satisfactorily  recoated  in  not  less 
than  24  nor  more  than  48  hours. 

The  amount  of  hygroscopic  moisture  in  the  finished  paint 
shall  not  exceed  l/2  of  i%. 

There  shall  be  no  rosin  in  the  paint  as  indicated  by  the 
Liebermann-Storch  reaction. 

SECTION  No.  259.  The  paint  shall  not  liver  nor  curdle  and 
shall  cover  properly  and  work  freely  under  the  brush.  The 
pigment  shall  remain  in  suspension  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 

SECTION  No.  260.  Tests  will  be  made  against  standard 
samples.  Such  analyses  as  are  required  will  be  made  by  the 
Engineer. 

Due  to  the  cost  of  inspection,  the  Contractor  will  be  re- 
quired to  obtain  paint  which  is  made  within  a  reasonable  dis- 
tance from  New  York,  and  in  as  large  quantities  as  practi- 
cable. By  distance  from  New  York  is  meant  the  distance  by 
railroad  of  the  paint  factory  from  Manhattan  Island.  The 
maximum  factory  distance  is  shown  in  the  following  table: 


62 


SPECIFICATIONS — PAINTING 

For  quantities  of  less  than  250  gallons  made  at  one  time,  25  miles. 
For  quantities  of  250  to  500  gallons  made  at  one  time,  100  miles. 
For  quantities  of  500  to  1500  gallons  made  at  one  time,  200  miles. 
For  quantities  of  over  1 500  gallons  made  at  one  time,  700  miles. 

Samples  of  standard  ingredients  and  of  the  finished  paints 
are  on  file  in  the  office  of  the  Commission.  Paints  and  their  in- 
gredients shall  conform  to  these  standard  samples.  The  Con- 
tractor shall  submit  separate  samples  of  all  ingredients  in- 
tended for  use  in  the  paints,  and  upon  approval  of  same,  shall 
then  submit  two  one-pint  samples  of  paint  for  approval. 

In  those  details  where  no  special  instructions  are  given, 
the  paint  and  its  manufacture  shall  conform  to  the  best  ac- 
cepted practice. 

All  materials  for  shop  coat  shall  be  delivered,  inspected 
and  sampled  in  their  original  packages. 

SECTION  No.  261.  All  iron  shall  be  scraped  free  from  scale 
and  rust,  and  shall  receive  one  coat  of  red  lead  paint  as  herein 
specified,  before  leaving  the  shop.  All  surfaces  which  come 
in  contact  or  are  enclosed  shall  be  painted  before  being  as- 
sembled. All  turned  or  faced  surfaces  shall  receive  a  coat  of 
white  lead  and  tallow  before  leaving  the  shop.  If  the  Engi- 
neer so  directs,  the  shop  coat  will  be  omitted  on  members  or 
parts  of  members  to  be  imbedded  in  concrete. 

Where  the  shop  coat  has  become  damaged  before  or  after 
erection,  through  any  cause  whatever,  it  shall  be  renewed 
with  the  same  kind  of  paint  as  originally  used. 

Structural  steel  and  rods  which  are  to  be  imbedded  in  con- 
crete shall  be  protected  from  the  weather  before  being  put  in 
place,  and  shall  be  cleaned  and  scale  and  rust  removed  before 
being  incased  in  the  concrete.  Rods  shall  not  be  painted. 

After  erection  the  metal  shall  be  thoroughly  cleaned  of  all 
dirt,  rust  or  scale  by  stiff  wire  brushes  or  sand  blast,  as  di- 
rected, and  afterward  dusted.  The  Engineer  may  require 
that  all  steel  after  cleaning  shall  be  wiped  with  a  cloth  dipped 
in  a  mixture  composed  <  f  one-half  (J/2)  benzine  ajid  one-half 
(^)  turpentine.  When  the  above  mixture  has  practically 
dried  but  before  becoming  absolutely  dry,  the  steel  shall  be  thor- 
oughly and  evenly  painted  with  the  second  coat  prescribed 

63 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

herein.     No  paint  shall  be  applied  until  the  cleaning  has  been 
passed  upon  by  the  Inspector. 

The  finishing  coat  shall  be  applied  at  such  time  after  the 
application  of  the  second  coat  and  before  final  acceptance  of 
the  work,  as  in  the  judgment  of  the  Engineer  shall  be  advis- 
able. All  steel  work  for  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad 
adjacent  to  concrete,  such  as  flanges  of  roof  beams  and  exposed 
surfaces  of  wall  columns,  shall  be  painted  with  the  gray  finish- 
ing coat.  All  other  steel  work  for  the  subsurface  portion  of 
the  Railroad  shall  be  painted  with  the  black  finishing  coat. 

SECTION  No.  262.  Surfaces  of  exposed  members  inacces- 
sible after  erection,  shall  be  cleaned  and  painted  before  erec- 
tion. 

All  recesses  that  might  contain  water,  or  through  which 
water  could  enter,  shall  be  filled  with  thick  paint  or  a  water- 
proof cement  of  ground  skins  before  receiving  the  final  paint- 
ing. 

All  surfaces  so  close  together  as  to  prevent  the  insertion  ot 
a  brush  shall  be  painted  thoroughly  by  using  a  piece  of  cloth, 
if  necessary. 

SECTION  No.  263.  All  paint  shall  be  well  brushed  out  -o 
as  to  show  a  smooth,  even  film  of  uniform  thickness.  Round 
brushes  shall  be  used  exclusively  in  applying  paint. 

SECTION  No.  264.  Painting  in  rainy  or  freezing  weather  or 
on  wet  or  damp  surfaces  will  not  be  permitted. 


SUBDIVISION  17 
DRAINS  AND  PUMPS 

SECTION  No.  266.  The  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad 
must,  so  far  as  possible,  be  so  arranged  that  any  water  finding 
access  thereto  will  be  led  away  automatically  to  the  City  sewers. 

SECTION  No.  267.  Where  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Rail- 
road is  on  an  inclined  gradient  and  is  constructed  in  dry,  porous 
soil,  the  floor  of  the  Railroad  may  be  depended  on  to  act  as  a  con- 
duit. At  the  bottom  of  the  inclined  gradient  connections  shall  be 
made  with  a  sewer  or  with  subdrains  lying  beneath  the  Railroad 
and  draining  into  the  sewers. 

SECTION  No.  268.  Along  such  parts  of  the  subsurface  portion 
of  the  Railroad  where  the  soil  is  not  porous,  or  where  the  floor  of 
the  Railroad  cannot,  in  the  judgment  of  the  Commission,  be  used 
as  a  conduit,  there  shall  be  laid,  beneath  the  rail  level  and  on  a 
continuous  descending  gradient,  drain  pipes  of  vitrified  salt-glazed 
stoneware,  of  the  quality  described  in  these  specifications  for 
sewer  pipe.  These  drain  pipes  shall  be  of  such  diameter  not  ex- 
ceeding twelve  (12)  inches,  as  the  Commission  may  direct.  Each 
drain  shall  be  laid  in  the  concrete  or  directly  in  the  soil  with 
tight  or  open  joints,  as  directed,  and  in  such  manner  and  in 
such  position  as,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer,  local  circum- 
stances require. 

SECTION  No.  269.  Where  drain  pipes  connect  with  the 
City  sewers,  the  junction  shall  be  protected  by  suitable  traps 
and  back-pressure  valves  or  gate  valves  where  necessary,  to 
prevent  back  rush  of  water  or  gas  from  the  sewers.  Connec- 
tions with  the  Railroad  shall  be  as  necessity  demands  and  as 
directed  by  the  Commission.  Cross  drains  to  connect  with  the 
main  drains,  also  vertical  drains  at  the  sides  of  the  Railroad, 
shall  be  placed  at  such  places  and  in  such  manner  as  the  Com- 
mission shall  direct.  These  drains  shall  be  of  vitrified  or  cast- 
iron  pipe  as  directed  by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  270.  Broken  stone  shall  be  placed  for  the 
purposes  of  drainage  as  indicated  on  the  drawings  or  as  re- 
quired by  the  Commission. 

65 


SPECIFICATIONS DRAINS  AND   PUMPS 

SECTION  No.  271.  At  the  low  points  of  the  grade  of  the 
Railroad  where  the  invert  lies  below  the  bottom  of  adjacent 
sewers  there  shall  be  constructed  sumps  connected  with  the 
subdrains  or  the  floor  of  the  Railroad.  Such  sumps  shall  be 
water-tight,  with  a  capacity  of  not  less  than  eight  hundred  (800) 
gallons  each. 

SECTION  No.  272.  The  Contractor  shall  keep  the  subsurface 
portion  of  the  Railroad  dry  until  the  final  acceptance  of  the  work. 
For  that  purpose  he  shall  provide  such  pumps  as  may  be  neces- 
sarv. 


66 


SUBDIVISION  18 
SEWERS 

SECTION  No.  278.  All  sewers  and  appurtenances  shall  be 
built  of  the  materials,  to  the  sizes  and  dimensions,  on  the  lines 
and  grades,  at  the  depths,  with  the  connections  and  in  the 
manner  called  for  by  these  specifications  and  shown  on  the 
drawings. 

SECTION  No.  279.  If,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Commission,  it  is 
impracticable  during  the  progress  of  the  work  to  construct 
any  sewers,  manholes,  or  other  appurtenances  according  to  the 
drawings,  owing  to  the  presence  of  unknown  subsurface  struc- 
tures or  other  contingencies,  the  Contractor  shall  construct  such 
sewers,  manholes  or  appurtenances  in  the  location  given  by  and 
according  to  the  directions  of  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  280.  The  general  clauses  relating  to  excava- 
tion, backfilling,  cement,  mortar,  masonry,  waterproofing,  pil- 
ing, timber  work  of  all  kinds,  care  of  streets  and  public  places, 
maintenance  of  surface,  subsurface  and  overhead  structures, 
protection  of  persons  and  property,  repaving  or  restoring  of 
the  surface  of  the  street  or  other  public  places,  authority  of 
the  Engineer  to  examine  and  condemn  materials,  and  the 
power  of  the  Commission  and  the  Engineer  in  all  or  any  other 
respects,  apply  to  the  construction  and  reconstruction  of 
sewers,  both  along  the  route  occupied  by  the  Railroad  and 
elsewhere,  except  as  herein  otherwise  expressly  provided. 

SECTION  No.  283.  Not  more  than  one  hundred  (100)  feet 
of  trench  in  sewers  off  the  line  of  the  Railroad  shall  be  opened 
at  any  one  time  in  advance  of  the  sewer  already  completed, 
unless  by  permission  of  the  Engineer  and  then  only  for  such 
distance  as  he  shall  specify. 

SECTION  No.  284.  The  excavation  of  trenches  shall  be 
fully  completed  a  sufficient  distance  in  advance  of  the  laying 
of  the  sewer,  and  the  exposed  end  of  the  sewer  shall  in  all 
cases  be  fully  protected. 

.    SECTION   No.  286.     Where  the  ground  does  not  afford  a 
sufficiently  solid  foundation,  the  trench  shall  be  excavated  to 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

Mich  increased  depth  as  the  Engineer  may  deem  necessary, 
and  this  extra  depth  and  all  other  irregularities  in  the  bottom 
of  the  trench  shall  be  filled  up  to  the  required  level  and  form 
with  such  material  and  in  such  manner  as  the  Engineer  shall 
direct.  If  so  directed  by  the  Commission,  piles  shall  be  driven 
and  a  timber  or  reinforced  concrete  foundation  shall  be  con- 
structed, as  elsewhere  provided  in  these  specifications,  to  support 
the  sewer. 

SECTION  No.  287.  When  the  trench  is  properly  prepared, 
and  before  laying  any  sewer,  the  Contractor  shall  notify  the 
Engineer,  who  will  thereupon  cause  the  grades  for  the  sewer 
to  be  tested,  and  if  correct  the  sewer  shall  then  be  laid  in  the 
presence  of  the  Inspector,  and  no  construction  work  shall  be 
done  in  his  absence. 

SECTION  No.  288.  The  trenches  shall  be  kept  entirely  free 
from  water  while  the  foundation  and  the  masonry  are  being 
constructed  or  the  sewer  laid.  In  no  case  shall  water  be  al- 
lowed to  flow  over  the  invert  or  foundation  or  through  the 
sewer  until  the  mortar  is  thoroughly  set. 

SECTION  No.  289.  At  all  times,  gutters  shall  be  kept  open 
for  surface  drainage,  and  the  streets  and  sidewalks  shall  be 
kept  clear  and  free  for  the  passage  of  carts,  wagons,  carriages 
and  street  railroad  cars  or  pedestrians,  and  as  otherwise  pro- 
vided in  these  specifications. 

SECTION  No.  290.  Where  any  cross-walk  or  roadway  is  cut 
by  the  trench,  it  shall  be  temporarily  replaced  by  a  timber 
bridge  with  side  railings,  according  to  the  direction  and  ap- 
proval of  the  Engineer.  The  work  shall  at  all  times  be  con- 
ducted so  as  to  cause  as  little  inconvenience  as  practicable  to 
the  public. 

SECTION  No.  291.  All  curb,  gutter,  flagging,  paving  and 
macadam  stones,  necessary  to  be  removed,  which  in  the  judg- 
ment of  the  Engineer  are  suitable  to  be  used  again,  shall  be 
stored  in  such  places  as  the  Engineer  shall  direct,  or  shall  be 
removed  as  provided  in  these  specifications ;  in  all  cases  a 


68 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

passageway  on  the  sidewalks  and  in  the  roadway  shall  be  pre- 
served free  from  obstructions. 

SECTION  No.  292.  The  Contractor  shall  provide  for  the 
flow  of  all  sewers,  drains  and  water-courses  interrupted  during 
the  progress  of  the  work,  shall  restore  and  make  good  all  con- 
nections, and  shall  immediately  cart  away  all  offensive  matter, 
in  such  manner  and  with  such  precautions  as  the  Engineer 
may  direct.  All  temporary  house  connections  shall  be  made 
by  closed  iron  pipes,  with  suitable  provision  for  preventing 
leakage  at  joints.  Wooden  troughs  for  such  connections  will 
not  be  permitted. 

SECTION  No.  293.  In  the  construction  of  brick  masonry 
none  but  the  best  quality  of  common  brick  burned  hard  en- 
tirely through,  regular  and  uniform  in  shape  and  size  and  of 
compact  texture,  shall  be  used.  They  shall  be  culled  as  they 
are  brought  on  the  ground,  and  bats  and  bricks  of  improper 
quality  shall  be  removed  from  the  work.  A  limited  number 
of  bats  may  be  used  in  manholes  and  closures,  and  in  the 
outer  ring  of  the  sewers  where  more  than  two  (2)  rings  of 
bricks  are  required. 

SECTION  No.  294.  The  bricks  shall  be  properly  wet  imme- 
diately before  laying.  Every  brick  shall  be  laid  in  a  full  joint 
of  mortar,  made  as  described  in  these  specifications,  on  its 
bed,  end  and  side,  at  one  operation.  In  no  case  shall  mortar 
be  slushed  or  grouted  in  afterward.  The  bricks  shall  be  neatly 
and  truly  laid,  every  second  course  to  line,  and  the  joints 
shall  be  carefully  struck  on  the  inside. 

SECTION  No.  295.  All  brick  work,  as  it  progresses,  shall  be 
racked  back  in  courses,  and  in  no  case  will  it  be  allowed  to  be 
toothed,  unless  by  special  permission  from  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  296.  All  inverts,  or  bottom  curves,  shall  be 
formed  from  profiles  accurately  made  according  to  the  dimen- 
sions of  the  sewer,  and  correctly  set  according  to  the  grades 
furnished.  The  masonry  shall  be  allowed  to  set  for  twenty- 
four  (24)  hours  before  the  arch  is  turned.  Vitrified  brick  or 
granite  paving  blocks  shall  be  used  for  the  inner  ring  of  the 

69 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

invert  when  required  by  the  Commission,  and  whenever  so  used 
they  shall  be  thoroughly  jointed,  so  as  to  be  water-tight  along 
the  inner  surface  of  the  iewer.  The  last  course  of  the  invert 
masonry  below  the  springing  line  shall  be  laid  as  headers. 

SECTION  No.  297.  The  arches  or  upper  curves  shall  be 
formed  on  strong  centers  of  correct  form,  according  to  the 
sizes  and  shapes  required,  and  keyed  with  stretchers  in  full 
joints  of  mortar.  The  extrados  of  the  arch  shall  be  plastered 
with  mortar  one  (i)  inch  thick,  mixed  in  the  proportion  of 
one  (i)  part  of  cement  to  two  (2)  parts  of  sand.  The  centers 
shall  not  be  removed  or  withdrawn  in  less  than  thirty-six 
(36)  hours,  or  until  the  work  is  thoroughly  set,  and  until  the 
filling  in  of  the  arch  is  properly  put  into  place  to  a  depth 
which  is  at  least  one  (i)  foot  above  the  crown  of  the  arch. 
The  centers  in  all  cases  shall  be  struck  and  not  drawn,  so  as 
not  to  crack  or  injure  the  work.  Should  any  crack  or  settle- 
ment appear  in  the  arch  after  the  centers  are  removed,  so 
much  of  the  work  as  the  Engineer  may  require  shall  be  taken 
down  immediately  and  replaced. 

SECTION  No.  298.  Vitrified  or  cast-iron  sewer  pipes  or 
spurs,  equal  in  every  respect  to  those  described  elsewhere  in 
these  specifications,  and  of  a  size  required  by  the  Commission, 
but  not  less  than  six  (6)  inches  interior  diameter  with  hubs 
moulded  for  house  connections,  and  of  sufficient  length  to 
project  at  least  four  (4)  inches  beyond  the  exterior  of  the 
sewer,  shall  be  built  into  the  walls  of  brick  sewers  and  at  such 
an  angle  as  may  be  indicated  on  the  drawings  or  as  the  Engineer 
may  direct. 

SECTION  No.  299.  Spurs  shall  be  built  in  wherever  similar 
house  connections  exist  in  the  present  sewer  which  is  to  be 
reconstructed,  but  in  no  case  shall  the  distance  be  more  than 
twenty  (20)  feet  between  spurs.  In  the  case  of  the  construc- 
tion of  new  sewers  where  no  sewers  existed  previously,  ex- 
cept sewers  crossing  intersecting  streets,  they  shall  be  built 
opposite  each  house,  and  where  there  are  no  houses,  they  shall 
be  not  more  than  fifteen  (15)  feet  apart  on  each  side  of  the 
sewer  or  at  such  frequent  intervals  as  local  conditions  may 
require.  They  shall  be  set  so  that  their  inner  ends  shall  be 

70 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

flush  with  the  inner  face  of  the  sewer,  at  such  height  in  the 
walls  as  the  Engineer  may  direct,  and  each  pipe  shall  be 
sealed  on  the  outside  with  an  approved  earthen-ware  cover 
set  in  mortar. 

SECTION  No.  300.  Where  the  sewers  to  be  built  will  be  at 
a  depth  greater  than  thirteen  (13)  feet  below  the  established 
grade  of  the  street  (or  below  the  surface  of  the  street  where 
final  grades  have  not  been  established),  cast-iron  spurs  or 
bends  of  the  design  shown  on  the  drawings,  not  less  than  six 
(6)  inches  in  diameter  and  of  the  weight  of  extra  heavy  soil 
pipe,  shall  be  used  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the  Engineer. 
Where  house  drains  are  to  be  connected  to  these  spurs,  extra 
heavy  soil  pipe  and  fittings  shall  be  used  for  the  riser  between 
the  spur  and  the  house  drain.  Where  spurs  are  provided  for 
future  connections,  risers  of  extra  heavy  soil  pipe  shall  be 
placed  in  each  spur  and  shall  be  brought  to  a  point  thirteen 
(13)  feet  below  the  established  grade  of  the  street,  the  end 
of  which  shall  be  sealed  with  an  approved  cover  laid  in  cement 
mortar.  The  joints  of  this  pipe  shall  be  packed,  leaded  and 
caulked  in  accordance  with  these  specifications  for  laying 
water-mains. 

•  * i. ' 

SECTION  No.  301.  Wherever  the  sewer  passes  under  an- 
other structure,  extra  heavy  soil  pipe  shall  be  laid  from  the 
spur  to  the  outside  of  such  structure,  brought  up  to  a  point 
thirteen  (13)  feet  below  the  established  grade  of  the  street, 
caulked  and  sealed  as  provided  above.  All  pipes  passing  un- 
der such  structures  shall  be  laid  in  concrete. 

SECTION  No.  302.  If,  during  the  construction  of  the 
sewers,  it  is  deemed  advisable  to  interchange  concrete  and 
brick,  the  Contractor  may,  with  the  approval  of  the  Commission, 
build  such  sewers  of  either  kind  and  quality  herein  specified. 

SECTION  No.  303.  Concrete  sewers  shall  be  reinforced 
with  steel  bars,  if  so  indicated  on  the  drawings  or  directed  by 
the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  304.  Proper  profiles  for  the  concrete  inverts 
shall  be  set  up  at  the  required  distances,  and  the  concrete 


SPECIFICATIONS — SEWERS 

for  the  bottom  and  invert  of  the  sewer  shall  be  deposited  in 
place  and  rammed  and  worked  down  to  the  required  shape. 
The  concrete  for  the  bottom  and  invert,  if  so  directed,  shall 
be  placed  in  alternate  lengths  extending  between  every  other 
pair  of  profiles,  so  that  opportunity  may  be  given  to  properly 
work  the  concrete  into  place. 

SECTION  No.  305.  The  concrete  of  the  invert  shall  be  pro- 
tected during  the  progress  of  the  work  with  planking,  or  by 
such  other  suitable  methods  as  the  Engineer  shall  direct  and 
for  so  long  a  time  as  he  may  require. 

SECTION  No.  306.  Suitable  forms  or  moulds,  of  the  size 
and  design  to  be  approved  by  the  Engineer,  shall  be  provided 
by  the  Contractor  to  support  the  concrete  of  the  side  walls 
and  roof  while  the  concrete  is  being  rammed  into  the  perma- 
nent work. 

SECTION  No.  307.  If  any  irregular  or  defective  work  is 
discovered  upon  removing  the  forms  or  moulds,  such  work 
shall  be  cut  out  and  the  space,  also  any  void  spaces,  filled  with 
a  rich  concrete  or  mortar  mixed  in  such  proportions  and  of 
such  materials  as  are  provided  elsewhere  in  •these  specifica- 
tions. 

SECTION  No.  308.  No  joints  between  different  sections  of 
the  walls  of  a  sewer  shall,  in  any  case,  be  a  straight  line,  but 
shall  always  be  stepped  or  toothed,  so  as  to  give  a  broken 
joint  in  the  manner  to  be  approved  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  309.  In  so  far  as  they  will  be  applicable  to 
sewers  constructed  of  concrete,  the  provisions  and  require- 
ments for  spurs,  branches,  etc.,  in  brick  sewers  shall  be  un- 
derstood to  govern  in  such  construction. 

SECTION  No.  310.  Tile  pipe  sewers  shall  be  built  of  vitri- 
fied, salt  glazed  stone-ware  pipe,  with  extra  deep  and  wide 
sockets  and  corrugated  spigot  ends.  The  pipe  shall  be  of  the 
best  quality,  thoroughly  and  perfectly  burnt,  without  warps, 
cracks  or  imperfections,  well  and  smoothly  glazed  over  the 
entire  inner  and  outer  surfaces  and  perfect  in  shape.  The 

72 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

pipe  shall  be  subject  to  all  tests  ordered  in  conformity  with 
any  requirements  of  the  Bureau  of  Sewers  of  the  Borough  of 
Brooklyn,  at  any  time  previous  to  its  being  used. 

SECTION  No.  311.  The  sizes  of  the  pipes  shall  be  designated 
by  their  interior  diameters.  Each  pipe  shall  be  a  true  cylinder, 
of  even  thickness  throughout,  and  shall  conform  to  the  following 
scheduled  dimensions : 

DOUBLE  STRENGTH  TILE  PIPE;  EXTRA  DEEP  AND  WIDE  SOCKETS 

Diameter.    Thickness    Depth  of     Length  of    Weight  of    Annular 
of  shell.         socket.         plain,  pipe          space. 

straight  pipe,     per  ft. 
6"  5/s"  2^" 

10"  %"  2^4" 

12"  i"  3" 

i5"  IJ4"  3" 

1 8"         \y2"         3%" 

20"  1 2/3"         3^" 

22"  i  5/6"         3^4" 

24"  2"  4" 

SECTION  No.  312.  All  "special"  vitrified  pipe  shall  con- 
form to  the  dimensions  given  for  plain,  straight  pipe. 

SECTION  No.  313.  Pipes  having  spurs  not  less  than  six  (6) 
inches  in  diameter  with  hubs  moulded  thereon  for  house  con- 
nections shall  be  furnished  and  laid  at  such  points  as  in- 
dicated on  the  drawings  or  as  directed  by  the  Commission,  and 
when  not  immediately  used,  they  shall  be  sealed  on  the  out- 
side with  approved  vitrified  earthen-ware  covers  set  in  mor- 
tar. 

SECTION  No.  314.  The  provisions  for  risers  on  brick  sewers 
shall  also  apply  to  pipe  sewers. 

SECTION  No.  315.  All  pipes  shall  be  laid  in  concrete 
cradles  of  the  required  form  and  dimensions.  The  minimum 
thickness  of  concrete  under  the  outside  of  the  shell,  or  barrel, 


2' 

16  Ibs. 

H" 

3' 

25  " 

H" 

3' 

37" 

H" 

3' 

45  " 

H" 

3' 

75  " 

y&" 

3' 

118  " 

y&" 

3' 

148  " 

H" 

3' 

157  " 

y&" 

3' 

190  " 

M" 

SPECIFICATIONS — SEWERS 

shall  be  six  (6)  inches.  The  first  layer  of  concrete  shall  be 
for  the  full  width  of  the  cradle,  and  shall  be  deposited  con- 
tinuously to  the  height  of  the  outside  bottom  of  the  shell  of 
the  pipe;  before  the  concrete  has  set  the  pipe  shall  be  firmly 
bedded  therein  true  to  line  and  grade  and  the  remainder  of 
the  concrete  immediately  deposited  and  carefully  tamped  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  avoid  disturbing  the  sewer.  The  ends 
of  the  pipes  shall  abut  against  each  other  in  such  manner  that 
there  shall  be  no  shoulder  or  unevenness  of  any  kind  along 
the  bottom  half  of  the  sewer  on  the  inside.  Unless  other- 
wise ordered,  not  less  than  fifteen  (15)  feet  of  pipe  shall  be 
laid  at  any  one  time,  in  any  one  length  of  trench,  and  it  shall 
be  exposed  for  at  least  twenty-four  (24)  hours  for  inspection. 

SECTION  No.  316.  Before  inserting  the  spigot  end  of  the 
pipe  into  the  hub  or  socket,  the  lower  half  of  each  socket  shall 
be  plastered  on  the  inside  with  a  layer  of  cement  mortar 
mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement  to  one  and 
one-half  (i/^)  parts  of  sand  and  of  a  sufficient  thickness  to 
bring  the  inverts  of  the  abutting  pipes  flush  and  even  with 
the  established  flow  line.  After  pipes  are  fitted,  the  space 
between  the  inside  of  the  upper  half  of  each  socket  and  the 
outside  of  the  entering  pipe  shall  be  filled  with  cement  mor- 
tar, mixed  as  above  specified,  and  the  outside  of  the  joint 
shall  be  thoroughly  sealed  with  the  same  kind  of  mortar  and 
the  joints  carefully  wiped  to  a  smooth  bevel  outside,  and  all 
mortar  that  may  be  left  on  the  inside  of  the  pipe  shall  be 
thoroughly  removed  and  the  inside  of  the  pipe  left  clean 
and  smooth  throughout. 

The  ends  of  pipes,  which  enter  masonry,  shall  be  neatly  cut 
to  fit  the  face  of  the  masonry.  When  directed,  such  cutting  shall 
be  done  before  the  pipes  are  built  in. 

SECTION  No.  317.  Sewers  of  iron  pipe,  of  the  quality  and 
laid  in  the  manner  described  elsewhere  in  these  specifications 
for  the  laying  of  water  mains,  shall  be  laid  wherever  indi- 
cated on  th£  drawings  or  at  such  places  as  the  Commission  shall 
direct. 

SECTION  No.  318.  Wherever  such  pipes  are  laid  through 
vaults,  they  shall,  when  required  by  the  Commission,  be  provided 

74 


SPECIFICATIONS — SEWERS 

with  special  castings  for  manholes,  which  shall  be  fitted  with 
a  cover  bolted  on  so  as  to  make  an  air-tight  joint,  according 
to  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  319.  Whenever,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Commis- 
sion, it  becomes  necessary  to  provide  ventilation  for  sewers 
under  other  structures,  iron  pipe  shall  be  laid  from  the  sewer 
to  the  surface  of  the  street  and  fitted  with  proper  gratings 
according  to  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  320.  All  existing  sewers,  culverts,  drains  and 
house  connections  intercepted  by  the  proposed  sewers,  cul- 
verts or  receiving  basins  shall  be  connected  with  the  new 
work  by  proper  curves  and  grades  and  in  such  manner  as  the 
Commission  shall  direct;  and  all  drains,  basins  or  culverts  ren- 
dered unnecessary  or  becoming  disused  by  the  work  herein 
contemplated  shall  be  filled  in  and  made  solid  with  good, 
wholesome  earth  in  the  manner  directed.  Provision  shall 
also  be  made  for  the  connection  of  future  sewers  or  basins 
by  constructing  brick  spurs  or  inserting  vitrified  pipe  at  the 
points  indicated  on  the  drawings  and  at  other  points  as  the  Com- 
mission may  direct.  These)  connections  shall  be  closed  with  bulk- 
heads not  less  than  eight  (8)  inches  in  thickness  and  of  the 
quality  specified  for  brick  masonry. 

SECTION  No.  321.  All  fresh  work  shall  be  carefully  pro- 
tected from  injury  in  every  way.  No  wheeling  or  walking 
will  be  allowed  on  it  and  any  portion  injured  shall  be  relaid 
by  the  Contractor ;  no  walking  or  working  over  the  pipes 
after  they  are  laid,  except  as  may  be  necessary  in  tamping 
the  earth  and  backfilling,  will  be  allowed  until  there  is  at  least 
two  and  one-half  (2^2)  feet  of  earth  over  them. 

SECTION  No.  322.  The  interior  of  pipe  sewers  shall  be 
carefully  freed  from  all  dirt,  cement  and  superfluous  material 
of  every  description  as  the  work  progresses,  for  which  pur- 
pose a  disc,  mould  or  plate,  attached  to  a  rod  sufficiently  long 
to  pass  two  (2)  joints  from  the  end  of  the  pipe  last  laid,  shall 
be  continuously  worked  through. 

SECTION  No.  323.     The  exposed  ends  of  pipe  sewers  shall, 

75 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

in  all  cases,  be  protected  with  a  board  or  other  stopper  care- 
fully fitted  to  the  pipe,  to  prevent  earth  or  other  substances 
from  washing  in,  and  in  no  case  shall  brick  or  stone  be  used  for 
that  purpose. 

SECTION  No.  324.  The  masonry  of  manholes  shall  be  car- 
ried up  so  that  the  top  of  the  iron  head  when  set  shall  be  at 
the  level  of  the  established  grade  of  the  street  at  that  point 
or  to  such  height  as  the  Commission  may  direct,  and  from  tem- 
plates correctly  made  and  set  at  top  and  bottom,  between 
which  not  less  than  eight  (8)  lines  shall  be  drawn.  Where 
manholes  are  not  built  to  the  established  grade  of  the  street, 
they  shall  be  covered,  when  necessary,  by  selected  bluestone 
slabs  eight  (8)  inches  in  thickness,  to  support  the  manhole 
heads.  All  joints  shall  be  neatly  struck  and  pointed  on  the 
inside.  Each  manhole  shall  be  plastered  thoroughly  on  the 
outside  with  cement  mortar  one  (i)  inch  in  thickness,  mixed 
in  the  proportion  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement  to  two  (2)  parts 
of  sand. 

SECTION  No.  325.  The  foundations  for  manholes  shall  be 
of  concrete  or  masonry  of  the  kind  indicated  on  the  drawings 
and  shall  not  be  less  than  twelve  (12)  inches  below  the  invert 
elevation  of  the  sewer,  except  as  otherwise  indicated  on  the 
drawings.  When  any  foundation  additional  to  that  indicated  on 
the  drawings  is  required,  it  shall  be  built  as  directed  by  the 
Commission. 

SECTION  No.  326.  Sewer  pipes  shall  be  built  in  and  trimmed, 
when  necessary,  so  as  to  be  flush  with  the  inner  face  of  the  man- 
hole, and  an  arch,  laid  in  cement  mortar,  shall  be  turned  over 
the  pipe. 

SECTION  No.  327.  The  invert  shall  be  built  of  vitrified 
brick,  granite  paving  blocks  or  concrete  masonry,  as  indi- 
cated on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  328.  A  reasonable  number  of  bats  not 
smaller  than  half  bricks  may  be  used  in  the  construction  of 
manholes  or  receiving  basins,  provided  all  interstices  are  com- 
pletely filled  with  mortar. 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

SECTION  No.  329.  Standard  steps  of  good  quality  of  gal- 
vanized wrought  iron,  of  the  size,  length  and  shape  required 
for  steps,  shall  be  built  into  the  interior  sides  of  all  manholes 
at  a  distance  apart  of  not  more  than  fifteen  (15)  inches  ver- 
tically and  they  shall  be  so  arranged  that  the  lowest  step 
shall  be  not  more  than  two  (2)  feet  above  the  bench  at  the 
bottom  of  the  manholes  nor  more  than  two  (2)  feet  above 
the  invert  of  the  sewer  where  there  is  no  bench.  Each  man- 
hole head  shall  be  cast  with  a  wrought-iron  step  on  the  in- 
side, when  directed  by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  330.  Hammer-dressed  bluestone  of  the  form 
and  thickness  required  shall  be  furnished  and  laid  as  indicated 
on  the  drawings  or  as  otherwise  directed  by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  331.  A  cast-iron  manhole  head  and  cover  of 
the  quality  specified  for  cast  iron,  and  except  in  special  cases, 
of  the  pattern  adopted  by  the  President  of  the  Borough  in 
which  the  work  is  located,  and  in  dimensions,  weight  and  all 
other  respects  satisfactory  to  the  Commission  shall  be  fitted  on 
a  bed  of  mortar  to  each  of  the  above  described  manholes. 
Manhole  heads  and  covers  which  do  not  conform  to  these 
specifications  shall  be  removed  at  once  from  the  work. 

SECTION  No.  332.  Covers  to  be  used  on  manholes  in  the 
street  shall  be  perforated.  Those  used  on  sidewalk  manholes 
shall  be  tight-fitting,  without  perforations. 

SECTION  No.  333.  Each  manhole  head  and  cover  shall 
have  its  weight  distinctly  marked  upon  it  with  oil  paint.  The 
following  shall  be  allowed  as  the  minimum  and  maximum 
weights : 

Street  manhole  head,  475  to  500  pounds ; 

Street  manhole  cover,  135  to  150  pounds; 

Sidewalk  manhole  head,  300  to  310  pounds; 

Sidewalk  manhole  cover,  100  to  no  pounds. 

SECTION  No.  334.  When  the  pavement  of  the  street  is  as- 
phalt or  wooden  block,  the  manhole  shall  be  fitted  with  a 
noiseless  head  and  cover,  to  be  approved  by  the  Commission, 
where  new  heads  and  covers  are  necessarv. 


77 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

SECTION  No.  335.  All  manholes  in  vaults  or  other  struc- 
tures shall  be  provided  with  sealed  manhole  heads  and  covers 
according  to  the  design  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  336.  Where  a  sewer  crosses  under  the  Rail- 
road, emergency  manholes  shall  be  provided  when  directed 
by  the  Commission  and  according  to  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  337.  Manholes  shall  in  all  cases  be  fully  and 
completely  built  and  fitted  with  their  covers  as  the  work  pro- 
gresses, and  the  sewers  shall  not  be  laid  beyond  or  in  advance 
of  any  uncompleted  manhole. 

SECTION  No.  338.  Receiving  basins  shall  be  built  as  lo- 
cated on  the  drawings  or  as  the  Commission  shall  direct  and  in 
accordance  with  the  drawings.  Each  portion  of  the  basin  shall 
be  built  to  the  size  and  of  the  materials  designated  on  the  draw- 
ings and  shall  be  thoroughly  plastered,  both  inside  and  outside, 
with  cement  mortar  in  the  proportion  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement 
to  two  (2)  parts  of  sand. 

SECTION  No.  339.  The  foundations  for  receiving  basins 
shall  be  of  concrete  or  masonry  of  the  kind  indicated  on  the 
drawings  and  shall  extend  not  less  than  twelve  (12)  inches 
below  the  finished  floor  of  the  basin,  except  as  otherwise  in- 
dicated on  the  drawings.  When  additional  foundation  is  re- 
quired, it  shall  be  built  as  directed  by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  340.  The  flooring  shall  be  of  hammer-dressed 
North  River  bluestone  flagging,  not  less  than  three  (3)  inches 
thick,  in  not  more  than  two  (2)  pieces,  and  shall  be  well  set 
in  a  full  bed  of  mortar  and  rammed  into  place.  The  floor 
may  be  finished  with  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion 
of  one  (i)  part  of  cement  to  one  (i)  part  of  sand  if  so  di- 
rected by  the  Commission.  The  mortar  shall  be  spread,  while 
fresh,  upon  the  concrete  base  and  before  the  latter  shall  have 
reached  its  first  set;  it  shall  be  in  such  quantity  that  after 
thorough  manipulation  it  shall  be  one  (i)  inch  in  thickness. 

SECTION  No.  341.  Where  head  stone  and  gutter  stone  are 
required  they  shall  be  of  sound,  durable  granite  of  the  dimen- 

78 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

sions  indicated  on  the  drawings,  hammer  dressed  to  an  even 
surface  and  cut  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Engineer.  Cast- 
iron  basin  heads  and  gutter  pieces  of  the  design  indicated  on 
the  drawings  shall  be  set  instead  of  the  above  when  required  by 
the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  342.  A  cast-iron  cover  of  a  pattern  approved  by 
the  Commission  weighing  not  less  than  eighty  (80)  pounds  nor 
more  than  ninety-five  (95)  pounds  shall  be  fitted  to  the  opening 
in  the  head  stone. 

SECTION  No.  343.  A  grate  bar  made  according  to  the 
drawings  shall  be  fastened  solidly  into  the  head  stone  in  the 
manner  indicated. 

SECTION  No.  344.  A  cast-iron  trap  of  the  form  and  dimen- 
sions indicated  on  the  drawings,  free  from  inperfections,  and 
properly  coated  with  coal-tar  pitch  varnish  shall  be  furnished 
and  built  into  place  as  directed  by  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  345.  The  joints  shall  be  tightly  fitted  with  an 
oakum  gasket  or  with  cement  mortar  if  so  directed. 

SECTION  No.  346.  Galvanized  iron  steps  of  the  same  de- 
sign as  required  for  manholes  shall  be  built  into  the  walls. 

SECTION  No.  347.  The  culvert  pipe  for  connections  with 
sewers  shall  be  twelve  (12)  inch  vitrified  pipe  unless  other- 
wise indicated  on  the  drawings,  and  of  the  kind  and  quality 
previously  described,  and  shall  be  laid,  in  all  cases,  in  a  con- 
crete cradle  of  the  form  and  dimensions  required  for  pipe 
sewers,  in  accordance  with  the  directions  of  the  Engineer.  In 
case  it  becomes  necessary  to  connect  any  basin  already  built 
with  the  work  to  be  constructed,  so  much  of  such  culverts 
as  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer  may  be  necessary  shall  be 
taken  up  and  rebuilt  or  relaid  with  vitrified  pipe  or  brick  as 
the  case  may  be,  in  the  manner  described  above  and  recon- 
nected in  a  straight  line  from  the  basin  to  the  sewer. 

SECTION  No.  348.  Automatic  flush  tanks  of  a  type  ap- 
proved by  the  Commission  shall  be  built  where  indicated  on  the 
drawings  or  where  directed  by  the  Commission. 

79 


SPECIFICATIONS SEWERS 

SECTION  No.  349.  Whenever,  in  the.  opinion  of  the  Com- 
mission, it  is  necessary  to  waterproof  a  sewer,  chamber  or  re- 
ceiving basin,  or  its  appurtenances,  it  shall  be  done  as  indi- 
cated on  the  drawings  or  as  directed  by  the  Commission  and  in 
the  manner  described  elsewhere  in  these  specifications. 

SECTION  No.  350.  All  masonry  shall  be  laid  in  Portland 
cement  mortar  of  the  quality  described  in  Subdivision  9.  It 
shall  be  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement  to 
two  (2)  parts  of  sand,  except  as  otherwise  specifically  pro- 
vided. 

SECTION  No.  351.  All  concrete  for  sewers  shall  be  made 
in  the  proportion  of  one  (i)  part  of  cement  to  two  (2)  parts 
of  sand  and  four  (4)  parts  of  stone  of  the  quality  described  in 
Subdivision  n. 

SECTION  No.  352.  On  the  completion  of  each  section  of 
one  hundred  (100)  feet  of  sewer,  the  sidewalks  and  roadway 
shall  be  restored  as  provided  under  Subdivision  22. 

SECTION  No.  353.  The  Commissioner  of  Public  Works 
bhall  have  the  right  to  connect  any  sewer  or  sewers  with  the 
sewers  herein  described  or  to  grant  permits  to  any  person  or 
persons  to  make  connections  therewith  at  any  time  before 
they  are  finally  completed,  and  the  Contractor  shall  not  in- 
terfere with  or  place  obstructions  in  the  way  of  such  person 
or  persons  as  may  be  employed  in  building  such  new  sewer 
or  sewers  or  in  making  such  connections.  This  is  not  to  be 
construed,  however,  as  permitting  the  introduction  of  storm 
water  or  sewage  into  any  sewer  being  constructed  before  its- 
final  completion. 

SECTION  No.  354.  During  the  progress  of  the  work,  and 
until  the  entire  completion  and  final  acceptance  thereof,  the 
sewers,  drains,  basins,  culverts  and  connections  shall  be  kept 
thoroughly  cleaned  throughout,  and  left  clean,  and  the  drain- 
age of  any  old  sewer  that  may  be  taken  up  or  intercepted 
shall  be  provided  for  and  taken  care  of  by  the  Contractor. 


80 


SUBDIVISION  19 
REQUIREMENTS   i  OK   I'II-KS 

SECTION  No.  363.  Whenever  it  is  necessary  to  relay  any 
water  main,  all  new  material  required  for  the  same  shall  1  e 
of  the  quality  and  laid  in  the  manner  specified  below,  and 
subject  to  the  various  clauses  of  these  specifications  applicable 
thereto. 

SI-XT i ON  No.  364.  The  pipes  shall  be  circular  cylinders, 
with  the  inner  and  outer  surfaces  concentric,  and  of  the  full 
interior  diameter  required. 

SECTION  No.  365.  The  hub  or  socket  and  the  spigot  end 
.shall  be  shaped  in  exact  conformity  with  the  standards  of  the 
Department  of  Water  Supply,  to  be  furnished  by  the  Commis- 
sion, and  will  be  tested  by  circular  gauges. 

SECTION  No.  366.  The  seat  or  shoulder  of  the  socket  and 
the  end  of  the  spigot  shall  be  straight  and  even,  and  at  right 
angles  to  the  axis  of  the  pipe,  so  as  to  make  a  smooth,  tight 
joint.  Special  care  will  be  required  in  making  the  sockets  and 
spigots  to  conform  to  the  drawings  and  all  pipes  will  be  rigor- 
ously inspected  at  these  points.  No  pipe  will  be  received 
whose  eccentricity  at  either  the  spigot  or  socket  end  exceeds 
one-eighth  (%)  of  an  inch. 

SECTION  No.  367.  The  pipes  shall  be  designated  by  dimen- 
sions of  the  interior  diameter. 

SECTION  No.  368.  Bands,  lugs,  buttons,  or  ribs  of  such 
forms  and  dimensions  as  the  Commission  may  direct,  shall,  if  re- 
quired, be  cast  on  the  pipes. 

SECTION  No.  369.  The  straight  pipe  shall  be  twelve  (12) 
feet  long,  exclusive  of  hub ;  other  pipe  as  may  be  directed. 

SECTION  No.  370.  All  straight  pipes  shall  be  straight  in  the 
direction  of  the  axis  of  the  cylinder. 


81 


SPECIFICATIONS REQUIREMENTS    FOR    PIPES 

SECTION  No.  371.  The  thickness  of  pipe,  branches  and 
special  castings  shall  be  in  strict  accordance  with  the  standard  of 
the  Department  of  Water  Supply,  Gas  and  Electricity. 

SECTION  Xo.  372.     The  weights  for  straight  pipe  shall  be  as 
follows,  in  pounds  per  length : 
For  Low-pressure  Pipes : 

6o-inch  pipes,  special  weight. 

48-inch  pipes,  9,886  pounds  each. 
42-inch  pipes,  special  weight. 

36-inch  pipes,  5,920  pounds  each. 

3O-inch  pipes,  4,460  pounds  each. 

24-inch  pipes,  2,965  pounds  each. 

2O-inch  pipes,  1,979  pounds  each. 

i6-inch  pipes,  1,458  pounds  each. 

12-inch  pipes,  1,018  pounds  each. 

8-inch  pipes,      542  pounds  each. 

6-inch  pipes,      416  pounds  each. 

4-inch  pipes,      286  pounds  each. 

SECTION  No.  373.  The  thickness  of  the  metal  of  the  pipes 
and  special  castings  will  be  tested  by  calipers  after  the  castings 
have  been  freed  from  sand  and  cleaned. 

SECTION  No.  374.  For  low-pressure  pipes  the  inside  diam- 
eter of  the  bells  and  the  outside  diameter  of  the  spigot  ends  of 
the  pipes  shall  not  vary  from  the  standard  dimensions  of  the  pipe 
by  more  than  the  following: 

For  pipes  16"  or  less  in  diam.  0.06  of  an  inch. 

For  pipes  20"  and  24"  in  diam.  0.08  of  an  inch. 

For  pipes  30",  36"  and  42"  in  diam.  o.io  of  an  inch;  and 

For  pipes  48"  in  diam.  0.12  of  an  inch. 

The  inside  diameter  of  the  bells  and  the  outside  diameter  of 
the  spigot  ends  of  special  castings  for  low-pressure  mains  shall 
not  vary  from  the  standard  dimensions  by  more  than  the  follow- 
ing: 

For  castings  16"  or  less  in  diam.  0.08  of  an  inch. 

For  castings  20"  or  24"  in  diam.  o.io  of  an  inch. 

For  castings  30",  36"  and  42"  in  diam.  0.13  of  an  inch. 

For  castings  48"  in  diam.  0.16  of  an  inch. 

82 


SPECIFICATIONS REQUIREMENTS    FOR    PIPES 

SECTION  No.  375.  Any  straight  pipe  the  weight  of  which  is 
deficient  by  more  than  the  following  stated  percentages  of  the 
standard  weight,  will  be  rejected: 

For  pipe  16"  or  less  in  diameter,  5% 

For  pipe  over  16"  in  diameter,  4% 

Any  special  casting  the  weight  of  which  is  deficient  by  more 
than  the  following  stated  percentages  of  the  standard  weight,  will 
be  rejected  : 

For  special  castings  12"  or  less 

in  diameter   10% 

For  special  castings  over  12" 

in  diameter    8% 

SECTION  No.  376.  All  straight  pipes  shall  be  cast  vertically, 
and  all  pipes  twelve  (12)  inches  or  more  in  diameter  shall  be 
cast  with  the  hub  end  down. 

SECTION  No.  377.  All  the  castings  shall  be  made  in  such 
moulding-sand  or  loam  as  will  leave  the  surface  clean  and 
smooth. 

SECTION  No.  378.  All  the  castings  shall  have  cast  on  the 
outer  side  in  raised  letters  of  not  less  than  two  (2)  inches  in 
length  and  one-eighth  (J/£)  of  an  inch  in  relief,  in  such  manner 
as  the  Engineer  may  designate,  the  year  in  which  they  are  cast, 
the  running  number  of  the  castings  of  the  same  size  and  form, 
the  letters  D.  W.  S.,  and  the  initials  or  name  of  the  Contractor, 
and  of  the  foundry  where  cast,  and  in  case  any  pipe  shall  be 
condemned,  the  letters  D.  W.  S.  shall  be  erased  by  the  Con- 
tractor. 

SECTION  No.  379.  The  metal  of  which  the  castings  are  to 
be  cast  (which  shall  be  remelted  in  a  cupola  or  air-furnace) 
shall  be  pig-iron,  made  without  any  admixture  of  cinder-iron 
or  other  inferior  metal,  and  shall  be  of  such  character  as  to 
make  a  pipe  strong,  tough  and  of  an  even  grain,  entirely  free 
from  uncombined  carbon  when  seen  under  the  microscope, 
and  such  as  will  bear,  satisfactorily,  drilling  and  cutting,  and 
shall  have  a  tensile  strength  of  at  least  sixteen  thousand 
(16,000)  pounds  to  the  square  inch. 

83 


SPECIFICATIONS REQUIREMENTS    FOR    PIPES 

SECTION  No.  380.  The  castings  shall  be  free  from  scoria, 
sand  holes,  air  bubbles,  and  other  defects  and  imperfections. 

SECTION  No.  381.  The  castings  shall  be  perfectly  cleaned 
and  no  lumps  shall  be  left  on  the  inner  surface  of  the  barrels 
or  sockets,  or  on  the  outer  surface  of  the  spigot  end.  The  cast- 
ings shall  be  subject  to  hammer  inspection.  Iron-wire  brushes 
shall  be  used,  as  well  as  softer  brushes,  to  remove  the  loose 
dust.  No  acid  or  other  liquid  shall  be  used  in  cleaning  the 
castings. 

SECTION  No.  382.  Every  pipe,  branch  and  special  casting 
shall  be  carefully  coated  inside  and  out  with  coal-tar  pitch  and 
oil.  Every  casting  shall  likewise  be  entirely  free  from  rust 
when  the  coating  is  applied.  If  the  casting  cannot  be  dipped 
immediately  after  being  cleaned,  the  surface  shall  be  oiled 
with  linseed  oil,  to  preserve  it  until  it  is  ready  to  be  dipped. 
No  casting  shall  be  dipped  after  rust  has  set  in. 

SECTION  No.  383.  The  coal-tar  pitch  shall  be  made  from 
coal-tar  distilled  until  the  naphtha  is  entirely  removed  and  the 
material  mixed  with  linseed  oil  so  as  to  make  a  smooth,  tough 
and  tenacious  coating.  Pitch  which  becomes  hard  and  brittle 
when  cold  will  not  answer  for  this  use. 

SECTION  No.  384.  Pitch  of  the  proper  quality  having  been 
obtained,  it  shall  be  carefully  heated  in  a  suitable  vessel  to  a 
temperature  of  three  hundred  (300)  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and 
shall  be  maintained  at  not  less  than  this  temperature  during 
the  time  of  dipping.  The  material  will  thicken  and  deteriorate 
after  a  number  of  pipes  have  been  dipped ;  fresh  pitch  shall, 
therefore,  be  frequently  added,  and  occasionally  the  vessel 
shall  be  entirely  emptied  of  its  old  contents  and  refilled  with 
fresh  pitch. 

SECTION  No.  385.  Every  casting  shall  attain  a  temperature 
of  three  hundred  (300)  degrees  Fahrenheit,  before  being  re- 
moved from  the  vessel  of  hot  pitch.  It  shall  then  be  slowly  re- 
moved and  laid  on  skids  to  drip. 


SPECIFICATIONS — REQUIREMENTS    FOR   PIPES 

SECTION  No.  386.  No  casting  shall  be  dipped  until  the  In- 
spector has  examined  it  as  to  cleaning  and  rust,  and  subjected 
it  thoroughly  to  the  hammer  test.  It  may  then  be  dipped, 
after  which  it  will  be  passed  to  the  hydraulic  press  to  meet 
the  required  water  test.  The  proper  coating  shall  be  tough 
and  tenacious  when  cold  on  the  pipes,  and  not  brittle  or  with 
any  tendency  to  scale  off. 

SECTION  No.  387.  The  castings  shall  be  capable  of  sustain- 
ing a  pressure,  in  the  hydraulic  press,  of ^  two  hundred  and  fifty 
(250)  pounds  per  square  inch,  and  any  casting  which  shows  any 
defect  by  leaking,  sweating  or  otherwise,  will  be  rejected.  This 
test  shall  be  made  at  the  foundry. 

SECTION  No.  388.  The  castings  shall  be  weighed,  and  the 
weight  distinctly  marked  on  the  castings  in  white  paint.  The 
Contractor  shall  provide  at  the  foundry  where  the  pipes  and 
castings  are  to  be  manufactured  proper  sealed  scales  and 
weights  for  weighing  the  castings. 

SECTION  No.  389.  On  low-pressure  mains,  unless  otherwise 
ordered,  each  pipe  twenty-four  inches  and  larger  in  diameter 
shall  be  placed  in  the  trench  on  two  blocks  and  four  wedges  of 
sound  hemlock  lumber,  the  wedges  to  rest  on  the  blocks  and  the 
pipe  on  the  wedges.  Where  the  bottom  of  the  trench  is  rock,  or 
if  ordered  by  the  Engineer,  the  1 2-inch,  1 6-inch  and  2O-inch  pipe 
shall  also  be  placed  on  blocks  and  wedges. 

The  blocks  for  the  48-inch  and  36-inch  pipe  shall  be  forty- 
eight  inches  long,  twelve  inches  wide  and  six  inches  thick,  with 
wedges  eighteen  inches  long,  six  inches  wide,  four  inches  thick 
on  one  end  and  one-half  inch  thick  on  the  other ;  the  blocks  for 
3O-inch  and  24-inch  pipe  shall  be  thirty  inches  long,  twelve  inches 
wide  and  four  inches  thick,  with  wedges  fifteen  inches  long,  five 
inches  wide,  three  inches  thick  on  one  end  and  one-half  inch  thick 
on  the  other.  The  blocks  for  the  2O-inch  pipe  shall  be  twenty 
inches  long,  eight  inches  wide  and  four  inches  thick;  the  wedges 
six  inches  long,  four  inches  wide  and  three  inches  thick  on  one 
end  and  one-half  inch  on  the  other.  The  blocks  for  the  i6-inch 
and  12-inch  pipe  shall  be  sixteen  inches  long,  six  inches  wide 
and  four  inches  thick;  the  wedges  six  inches  long,  four  inches 


SPECIFICATIONS — RKOl'lRKM  KNTS    KOR    PIPES 

wide  and  three  inches  thick  on  one  end  and  one-half  inch  on  the 
other. 

SECTION  No.  391.  The  spigot  end  of  the  pipe  shall  be  in- 
serted into  the  hub  to  the  full  depth  of  the  bell,  and  the  space 
around  the  pipe  -shall  be  equalized  so  as  to  give  as  nearly  as 
possible  an  equal  space  for  the  packing.  The  space  between 
the  pipe  and  hub  shall  be  packed  with  clean,  sound  jute  pack- 
ing yarn,  free  from  tar,  far  enough  to  leave  the  proper  space 
for  lead.  The  remaining  space  shall  then  be  filled  by  running 
it  full  of  lead  to  a  depth  of  four  (4)  inches,  with  a  bead  out- 
side of  the  face  of  the  hub  large  enough  to  allow  for  caulking, 
so  that  when  the  joint  is  properly  caulked  the  lead  will  be 
flush  with  the  hub  of  the  pipe.  After  the  joint  shall  have  been 
run  with  lead,  it  shall  be  caulked  by  means  of  proper  tools,  so 
as  to  make  a  water-tight  joint. 

SECTION  No.  392.  The  lead  to  be  used  shall  be  of  the  best 
quality  of  pure,  soft  lead,  and  in  every  respect  suitable  for  the 
purpose. 

SECTION  No.  393.  In  case  it  becomes  necessary  to  cut  any 
connection  with  any  other  main,  house  or  hydrant,  or  in  any 
way  to  interfere  with  the  continuous 'and  normal  flow  of  water, 
due  notice  shall  be  sent  at  least  forty-eight  (48)  hours  in  ad- 
vance to  the  Engineer,  the  Commissioner  of  Water  Supply  and 
the  consumers,  and  the  Contractor  shall,  if  so  ordered,  make  a 
temporary  by-pass  or  other  arrangement  to  preserve  the  flow  of 
water  while  breaking  connections. 

SECTION  No.  394.  All  connections  cut,  interfered  with  or 
injured  shall  be  restored  under  the  directions  of  the  Engineer, 
without  delay  and  in  accordance  with  the  rules  and  regulations 
of  the  Department  of  Water  Supply  governing  such  matters, 
to  a  suitable  condition  as  good  as  existed  before  commencing 
work. 

SECTION  No.  395.  Stop  cocks,  boxes,  branches,  curved  pipe, 
and  other  specials  according  to  the  standards  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Water  Supply  shall  be  set  where  necessary. 

86 


SPECIFICATIONS REQUIREMENTS     FOR     PIPES 

SECTION  No.  396.  For  all  pipes,  other  than  water  mains, 
the  standard  weights  and  all  other  requirements  shall  be  in 
accordance  with  the  standard  specifications  and  requirements 
of  the  several  owners  of  such  structures. 


SUBDIVISION  20 
RAILROAD  DUCTS 

SECTION  No.  397.  The  ducts  to  contain  cables  for  trans- 
mitting electricity  for  the  operation  of  the  Railroad  shall  be  of 
the  one-way  form  with  circular  holes. 

SECTION  No.  398.  The  dimensions  and  form  of  each  piece 
shall  conform  to  the  following  requirements: 

The  length  shall  be  eighteen  (18)  inches,  except  that  a  suf- 
ficient number  of  short  pieces  of  various  lengths  shall  be  fur- 
nished to  lay  on  curves  and  to  piece  out  at  manholes,  so  as  to 
bring  the  ends  of  all  ducts  into  a  vertical  plane. 

The  minimum  inside  diameter  of  holes  shall  be  such  as  to 
pass  a  mandrel  three  and  one-half  (3^)  inches  in  diameter. 

The  outside  width  shall  be  not  less  than  five  (5)  inches  nor 
more  than  five  and  one-fourth  (5^4)  inches  measured  at  right 
angles  to  the  flat  of  each  side. 

The  thickness  of  the  walls  measured  at  the  thinnest  part 
of  the  body  of  the  duct  shall  be  not  less  than  five-eighths  (^) 
of  an  inch. 

The  ducts  shall  be  made  square  on  outer  lines.  Ducts 
shall  have  the  outside  corners  cut  off  to  leave  a  flat  surface 
of  not  less  than  two  and  three-fourths  (2^4)  inches,  the  ends 
to  be  cut  smooth  and  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  duct 
and  beveled  on  the  inside  for  one-half  (^2)  of  an  inch. 

SECTION  No.  399.  Ducts  shall  be  combed  on  each  face  with 
at  least  five  (5)  longitudinal  combings,  each  combing  to  have 
a  width  of  one-fourth  (%)  of  an  inch  and  a  depth  of  not  less 
than  one-sixteenth  (1/16)  nor  more  than  one-eighth  (*4} 
of  an  inch. 

SECTION  No.  400.  All  ducts  shall  be  manufactured  of  the 
best  clay,  mixed  thoroughly  and  in  proper  proportions,  burnt 
hard  through  their  entire  thickness  until  well  vitrified  but  in 
no  case  so  burnt  as  to  be  fused  or  scoriated.  The  clay  used 
shall  be  plastic  and  smooth,  perfectly  free  from  limestone, 
lime  pebbles,  pyrites  and  chalk,  and  sufficiently  fireproof  to 
acquire  proper  density  before  vitrification  takes  place.  The 
clay  shall  be  well  pulverized  and  made  perfectly  homogeneous, 

88 


SPECIFICATIONS RAILROAD    DUCTS  ( 

and  the  surface  of  each  piece  both  inside  and  outside  shall  be 
thoroughly  glazed  in  the  most  approved  manner  with  good 
salt  glaze.  The  ducts  shall  be  sound  and  without  soft  spots, 
stones,  gravel,  cracks,  breaks  or  blisters,  and  the  interior  sur- 
face shall  be  free  from  warts,  tits,  nodules,  chips,  breaks,  rough 
spots  or  cracks  that  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer  may  prove 
injurious.  Each  duct  shall  be  practically  straight  and  under 
no  circumstances  will  any  piece  be  accepted  which  shall  have 
a  bow,  curve  or  kink  sufficient  to  prevent  the  passage  of  a 
mandrel  three  and  one-half  (3^)  inches  in  diameter  and 
twenty-four  (24)  inches  long.  No  piece  will  be  accepted  if  k 
shall  have  a  bow,  bend  or  kink  in  more  than  one  direction. 
Throughout  its  entire  length  the  bore  shall  be  straight,  smooth 
rnd  circular.  The  center  of  the  bore  shall  be  exactly  in  the 
center  of  the  ducts.  , 

SECTION  No.  401.  All  ducts  shall  be  subject  to  inspection 
at  the  place  of  manufacture  and  on  the  work  and  at  any  other 
time  and  place  required  by  the  Engineer.  All  rejected  ducts 

shall  l:e  promptly  removed  by  the  Contractor. 

SECTION  No.  402.  The  ducts  shall  be  laid  in  beds  of  cement 
mortar,  about  one-fourth  '(%)  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  with 
broken  joints  both  horizontally, and  vertically,  true  to  line  and 
grade,  and  so  placed  that  there  shall  be  no  shoulders  or  offsets 
in  the  bore.  All  interstices  shall  be  filled  with  mortar.  In 
laying  ducts  care  shall  be  taken  to  close  abutting  joints  so  that 
the  ends  of  all  consecutive  ducts  shall  be  practically  in  contact 
on  all  sides. 

SECTION  No.  404.  Two  (2)  strips  of  thick,  unbleached  mus- 
lin six  (6)  inches  wide  and  coated  with  neat  cement  mortar 
shall  be  used  to  wrap  each  joint,  the  ends  of  the  wrap  to  lap 
four  (4)  inches.  The  muslin  shall  be  not,  less  than  56x60 
count,  weight  not  less  than  four  (4)  ounces  to  the  yard  and 
width  thirty-six  (36)  inches.  Where  ducts  are  laid,  on  curves, 
the  wraps  shall  be  doubled  if  required,  to  protect  the  openings 
between  the  ends  of  the  ducts  on  the  outer  line  of  the  duct 


Sl'iX  'I  7 1  CATIONS RAILROAD   DUCTS 

and  to  exclude  all  mortar  from  duct  openings.     Metal  wraps 
will  not  be  permitted. 

SECTION  No.  405.  Ducts  shall  be  laid  with  a  link  mandrel 
<u  a  length  and  diameter  to  be  prescribed,  which  shall  be 
drawn  through  each  duct  as  it  is  laid,  so  as  to  remove  all  pro- 
jections of  mortar  that  may  be  in  the  ducts;  the  mandrel  shall 
also  be  equipped  with,  a  suitable  swab  to  remove  all  loose 
material  in  the  ducts ;  the  mandrel  shall  be  left  in  each  duct 
until  the  succeeding  duct  is  laid. 

The  ducts  shall  be  laid  within  a  concrete  envelope  four  (4) 
inches  thick  on  the  top  and  bottom  and  three  (3)  inches  thick  on 
the  sides,  well  tamped  into  place. 

SECTION  No.  406.  After  the  duct  bank  has  been  completed 
and  the  trench  backfilled,  the  manholes  built  and  heads  set, 
the  ducts  shall  be  rodded  by  pushing  a  wooden  mandrel 
through  the  bore.  This  mandrel  shall  be  of  approved  design, 
three  and  one-fourth  (3J4)  inches  in  diameter,  eight  (8) 
inches  long  and  screwed  to  the  end  of  the  rod.  If  obstruc- 
tions are  found  in  rodding  the  ducts  which  cannot  be  removed 
by  cleaners  so  as  to  give  a  clear  and  smooth  opening  sufficient 
to  pass  the  above  mandrel  without  damaging  the  duct,  the 
duct  shall  be  removed  and  relaid.  All  ducts  during  construc- 
tion and  after  being  rodded  shall  be  plugged  with  suitable 
plugs  to  be  furnished  by  the  Contractor.  If  wooden  plugs 
are  used  they  shall  be  immersed  in  water  for  at  least  eight 
(8)  hours  before  being  put  in  place. 

SECTION  No.  408.  Generally  the  Railroad  duct  line  will  be 
constructed  as  indicated  on  the  detailed  plans,  but  to  escape  sub- 
surface structures  it  may  be  placed  in  another  location  as 
ordered  by  the  Commission.  Railroad  duct  manholes  shall  be 
built  as  indicated  on  the  drawings  or  as  directed  by  the  Commis- 
sion. These  manholes  shall  be  generally  at  intervals  of  about  four 
hundred  (400)  feet.  They  may  vary  in  form  to  adapt  the  work 
to  local  conditions. 

The  drain  pipes  for  the  duct  manholes  shall  be  vitrified 
pipe  of  the  best  quality,  thoroughly  and  perfectly  burnt,  with- 
out imperfections,  well  and  smoothly  glazed  inside  and  out- 
side and  perfect  in  shape. 

90 


SUBDIVISION  22 
SURFACES  RESTORED 

SECTION  No.  420.  As  soon  as  the  structure  in  any  excava- 
tion or  trench  made  within  a  street  (including  the  roadways 
in  Eastern  Parkway)  shall  be  completed  and  the  trench  per- 
manently backfilled,  a  temporary  pavement  shall  be  laid  and 
maintained  for  at  least  four  (4)  months  in  a  condition  satis- 
factory to  the  Engineer ;  and  whenever  after  such  time  the 
earth  shall,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer,  have  become  suffi- 
ciently settled,  the  Contractor  shall  proceed  to  restore  the 
surface  to  a  condition  similar  to,  and  equally  as  good  as,  that 
existing  previous  to  the  commencement  of  construction.  In 
cases  where  a  temporary  backfilling  is  placed  pending  further 
work  to  be  done  in  the  same  excavation,  a  satisfactory  tempo- 
rary pavement  for  proper  maintenance  of  traffic  shall  be  laid  if 
deemed  necessary  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  421.  All  the  requirements  as  to  street  and 
park  surface  restored  shall  apply  to  the  trenches  for  sewers, 
pipes,  Railroad  ducts  or  other  subsurface  structures  along  or  oft" 
the  line  of  the  Railroad. 

SECTION  No.  422.  Nothing  contained  in  these  specifications 
shall  be  understood  or  construed  as  prohibiting  the  Contractor 
from  making  any  arrangement  with  the  President  of  the  Bor- 
ough or  the  Commissioner  of  Parks  or  such  other  officer  of  the 
City  as  may  be  in  charge  of  the  roadway  pavement,  sidewalk 
or  other  surface  covering  (including  the  roadway  and  park 
surfaces  in  Eastern  Parkway)  to  lay  a  better  or  other  form  of 
roadway  pavement,  sidewalk  or  other  surface  covering  in 
place  of  the  roadway  pavement,  sidewalk  or  other  surface 
covering  taken  up ;  in  which  case  the  Contractor  shall  file  with 
the  Commission  a  copy  of  his  contract  with  such  municipal 
officer  duly  acknowledged  in  writing  by  both  parties. 

In  case  the  municipal  officer  in  charge  of  the  roadway  pave- 
ment, sidewalk  or  other  surface  covering  (including  the  road- 
way and  park  surfaces  in  Eastern  Parkway)  desires  to  lay  a 
roadway  pavement,  sidewalk  or  other  surface  covering  differ- 
ent from  the  one  removed  and  shall  notify  the  Commission  in 
writing  that  he  has  failed  to  make  satisfactory  arrangements 


SPECIFICATIONS — SURFACES  RESTORED 

for  such  work  with  the  Contractor  or  in  case  the  Commission 
shall  for  any  other  reason  deem  it  advisable  so  to  do,  then  the 
Commission,  in  its  discretion,  may  direct  the  Contractor  to 
finish  and  dress  off  the  filling  over  his  work  to  such  grade  as 
the  Commission  may  select  and  further  direct  him  to  remove 
from  the  area  to  be  restored  all  material  of  whatever  nature 
not  required  to  be  relaid  and  to  permit  another  contractor  to 
lay  such  roadway  pavement,  sidewalk  or  other  surface  cover- 
ing; in  which  case  the  liability  of  the  Contractor  shall  cease, 
as  far  as  that  part  of  his  work  is  concerned,  whenever  the 
instructions  of  the  Commission  have  been  complied  with,  exactly 
the  same  as  if  the  Contractor  had  fully  completed  the  restoration 
as  hereinbefore  provided. 

When  required  by  the  Commission,  the  Contractor  shall  fur- 
nish and  set  contiguous  to  ventilating  grating  work  and  sta- 
tion vault  light  work  new  bluestone  or  eight  (8)  inch  granite 
curb  dressed  to  fit  the  structure. 

When  required  by  the  Commission,  the  Contractor  shall  set 
such  new  curbs,  or  restore  the  old  curbs  contiguous  to  such 
grating  and  vault  light  work  when  new  ones  are  not  ordered, 
at  a  new  line  to  be  established  by  the  President  of  the  Bor- 
ough or  the  Commissioner  of  Parks  or  other  proper  officer  of 
the  City. 

SECTION  No.  425.  All  street  and  park  surface  either  along 
or  off  the  line  of  the  Railroad,  that  may  have  become  damaged, 
directly  or  indirectly,  as  a  result  of  the  Contractor's  operations, 
shall  be  restored  by  the  Contractor  to  a  condition  similar  to 
and  equally  as  good  as  that  existing  previous  to  the  com- 
mencement of  construction. 

Where  any  grass  plots  or  trees  exist  along  any  street  occu- 
pied by  the  Contractor,  proper  precautions  must  be  taken  to 
protect  them  from  injury.  For  every  tree  removed,  injured 
or  destroyed,  the  Contractor  shall  set  out  a  new,  thrifty  tree 
of  the  same  kind  as  the  tree  removed,  injured  or  destroyed, 
and  not  less  than  fifteen  (15)  feet  in  height  and  not  less  than 
three  and  one-half  (3^2)  inches  in  diameter  measured  two  (2) 
feet  above  the  surface  of  the  ground,  and  in  such  position  as 
the  Commissioner  of  Parks  shall  indicate.  All  grass  plots. 


92 


SPECIFICATIONS — SURFACES  RESTORED 

shrubbery  and  other  plants  removed  or  affected  by  the  con- 
struction of  the  Railroad,  shall  be  restored  as  soon  as-possible 
to  as  good  a  condition  as  existed  before  the  commencement 
of  the  work.  In  replanting  trees  and  the  replanting  of  grass 
plots  and  shrubbery  and  other  plants  the  Contractor  must  be 
governed  by  the  reasonable  requirements  of  the  Commissioner 
of  Parks  or  by  other  authorities  specially  charged  with  the 
care  of  these  trees,  grass  plots,  shrubbery  or  other  plants, 
and  the  nature  and  depth  of  the  soil  to  be  placed  therein 
must  be  as  approved  by  such  authorities  and  by  the  Com- 
mission. 

In  any  park  or  parkway  the  Contractor  must  take  proper 
precautions  to  protect  from  injury  all  trees,  roads,  cross-paths, 
grass  plots,  shrubbery  and  other  plants  and  other  park  fea- 
tures, and  when  the  same  are  removed,  injured  or  destroyed 
by  the  construction  of  the  Railroad,  they  (except  trees)  shall 
be  restored  as  soon  as  possible  to  as  good  a  condition  as  ex- 
isted before  the  commencement  of  the  work.  The  nature  and 
the  depth  of  the  soil  to  be  placed  and  all  other  work  in  con- 
nection with  such  restoration  must  be  governed  by  the  reason- 
able requirements  of  the  Commissioner  of  Parks  or  of  other 
authorities  responsible  for  the  care  of  such  parks  or  parkways. 
For  every  tree  removed,  injured  or  destroyed,  the  Contractor 
shall  set  a  new  tree,  as  provided  in  the  preceding  paragraph 
of  this  section. 

Nothing  contained  in  the  foregoing  provisions  of  this  Subdi- 
vision 22  shall  be  construed  as  applying  to  the  trees  in  Eastern 
Parkway,  the  matter  of  the  maintenance,  protection,  preservation, 
removal  and  replacing  of  said  trees  being  governed  by  the  provi- 
sions of  Section  No.  425-3. 

SECTION  No.  425-3.  The  Contractor  shall  maintain,  protect 
and  preserve  in  place  undisturbed  and  in  as  good  a  condition  in 
all  respects  as  existed  before  construction  was  begun  all  the  trees 
in  Eastern  Parkway  which  are  four  (4)  feet  or  more  outside  the 
net  outside  lines  of  the  Railroad  structure  measured  horizontally 
from  such  net  outside  lines  to  the  nearest  point  of  the  trunk  of 
the  tree  at  a  height  two  (2)  feet  above  the  surface  of  the 
ground  at  the  tree,  together  with  the  soil  within  a  radius  of 
six  (6)  feet  of  the  outside  of  the  trunk  of  said  trees  and  for  a 


93 


SPECIFICATIONS SURFACES  RESTORED 

depth  within  said  radius  of  eight  (8)  feet  from  the  surface  of 
the  ground  at  the  tree. 

The  Contractor  may  remove  any  trees  in  Eastern  Parkway 
which  are  within  the  net  outside  lines  of  the.  Railroad  struc- 
ture or  which  are  less  than  four  (4)  feet  outside  such  net  out- 
side lines  measured  horizontally  from  such  net  outside  lines 
to  the  nearest  point  of  the  trunk  of  the  tree  at  a  height  two 
(2)  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  ground  at  the  tree. 

Where  the  Contractor  is  permitted  to  remove  any  tree  in 
Eastern  Parkway  and  does  remove  the  same,  he  shall,  if  required 
by  the  Commission,  replace  the  tree  so  removed  with  a  new  thrifty 
elm  tree  six  (6)  inches  in  diameter  measured  two  (2)  feet  above 
the  surface  of  the. ground,  such  replacing  to  be  satisfactory  to  the 
Commission  and  in  accordance  with  the  reasonable  requirements 
of  the  Commissioner  of  Parks. 


94 


SUBDIVISION  23 
GRATINGS 

SECTION  No.  426.     Steel  gratings  shall  be  provided  and 
placed   over   fan   and   other  ventilating  chambers   at  places 

shown  on  the  drawings  or  at  other  places  if  required  by  the  Com- 
mission.    They  shall  be  constructed  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 


93 


SUBDIVISION  24 
REINFORCED  CONCRETE   ELEVATED  RAILROAD 

SECTION  No.  427.  Besides  the  concrete  usually  required  in 
subway  and  elevated  railroad  construction  work  as  specified 
in  Subdivision  n,  a  portion  of  the  Railroad  will  be  constructed 
as  a  reinforced  concrete  open  cut  and  elevated  railroad,  extend- 
ing from  about  Station  109  f  65  to  about  Station  1144-65,  as 
shown  on  the  drawings.  Such  portion  of  the  Railroad  to  be  built 
as  a  reinforced  concrete  open  cut  and  elevated  railroad  is  referred 
to  in  these  specifications  as  the  "reinforced  concrete  elevated  Rail- 
road." The  reinforced  concrete  for  such  reinforced  concrete  ele- 
vated Railroad  shall  be  constructed  in  accordance  with  the  re- 
quirements of  Subdivision  11  (except  the  requirements  of  Sec- 
tion No.  137  or  as  otherwise  qualified  in  this  subdivision),  and 
also  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  this  subdivision. 

SECTION  No.  428.  The  lumber  for  wooden  forms  and  cen- 
ters shall  be  spruce  or  Norway  pine  or  other  approved  wood, 
sound  and  free  from  knots,  shakes  and  rot.  The  lumber  for 
forms  shall  be  tongued  and  grooved,  dressed  on  the  side  next 
to  the  concrete  surfaces  which  will  be  exposed  in  the  finished 
work,  and  also  dressed  in  any  other  manner  which  may  be 
necessary  to  secure  water-tight  and  smooth  fitting  forms. 

SECTION  No.  429.  Metal  forms,  if  used,  shall  be  made  of 
metal  sufficiently  thick  to  retain  their  shape  without  the  use 
of  wood.  No  forms  made  of  wood  and  covered  with  iron  will 
be  permitted. 

SECTION  No.  430.  Forms  shall  be  constructed  by  experi- 
enced and  capable  workmen  and  shall  be  of  first-class  work- 
manship throughout.  For  exposed  surfaces  of  concrete  the 
boards  shall  be  carefully  matched.  The  forms  shall  be  con- 
structed so  as  to  secure  beveled  or  chamfered  edges  for  beams 
and  columns  where  ordered,  and  .when  required  the  edges  or 
corners  of  the  forms  shall  be  rounded  at  interior  angles  formed 
between  intersecting  concrete  surfaces.  The  forms  shall  be 
constructed  so  that  the  lagging  can.  be  removed  without  d*sr 
turbing  the  support  for  the  concrete,  in  order  that  the  con- 
crete surface  may  be  subjected  to  a  finishing  process  when 

96 


SPECIFICATIONS REINFORCED  CONCRETE  ELEVATED  RAILROAD 

the  concrete  has  reached  the  proper  age  for  treatment.  Ail 
forms  shall  be  lubricated  with  a  thick  and  heavy  filler  oil  of 
a  quality  known  as  "sludge"  or  its  equal.  Just  before  being 
used  forms  shall  be  carefully  cleaned  of  all  cement,  dirt  and 
debris  in  order  to  insure  a  perfectly  smooth  surface  on  the 
concrete  which  is  to  remain  exposed. 

SECTION  No.  431.  Every  precaution  shall  be  taken  in  plac- 
ing or  assembling  the  forms  to  do  so  in  such  a  manner  that 
when  removed,  after  the  concrete  has  been  placed,  the  faces 
of  the  concrete  that  are  to  remain  exposed  shall  present  a 
smooth  and  even  surface. 

SECTION  No.  432.  Forms  shall  be  removed  as  soon  after 
the  concrete  has  been  placed  as  may  be  done  with  safety  to  the 
work,  but  no  forms  shall  be  removed  without  previous  notifi- 
cation to  the  Engineer.  Such  notification  shall  not  relieve 
the  Contractor  of  responsibility  for  the  construction  and  for 
the  removal  of  such  forms  and  for  the  proper  execution  of 
the  work.  Immediately  on  the  removal  of  the  forms  the  faces 
of  the  concrete  that  will  remain  exposed  shall  be  carefully 
examined  and  any  irregularities  of  the  surface  corrected ;  pro- 
jections shall  be  removed  and  voids  filled  with  mortar.  All 
projecting  wires,  bolts  or  other  devices  that  are  used  for  hold- 
ing forms  and  that  pass  through  the  concrete  shall  be  cut  off 
at  least  one  (i)  inch  beneath  the  finished  surface  and  the  ends 
covered  with  mortar.  Care  shall  be  taken  to  form  perfectly 
all  edges,  arrises  and  mouldings.  If  after  the  removal  of  the 
forms  it  is  found  that  any  of  these  lines  are  imperfect,  the 
cement  film  shall  be  cut  away  to  insure  a  proper  bond  and  such 
lines  shall  be  restored.  In  order  to  secure  a  uniform  surface 
color  and  texture,  the  mortar  to  be  used  for  filling  voids,  to 
cover  the  ends  of  projecting  wires,  bolts  or  other  devices  and 
to  restore  edges,  arrises  and  mouldings  shall  be  of  the  sam? 
materials  and  of  the  same  proportions  as  that  contiguous  to 
such  restored  work. 

SECTION  No.  433.  Concrete  to  which  waterproofing  is  to 
be  applied  shall  be  made  smooth  at  the  time  of  laying  and 
shall  be  carefully  protected  from  injury  until  thoroughly  set. 


SPECIFICATIONS — REINFORCED  CONCRETE  ELEVATED  RAILROAD 

SECTION  No.  434.  It  is  intended  to  obtain  concrete  imper- 
vious to  water ;  the  concrete  shall  be  mixed  and  deposited 
with  this  end  in  view,  and  if  required,  it  shall  be  carefully 
troweled  as  may  be  directed  in  order  to  add  to  its  impervious- 
ness.  Surfaces  which  require  special  provision  for  drainage 
shall  be  troweled. 

SECTION  No.  435.  Arch  centers  shall  be  constructed  so  as 
to  remain  as  nearly  as  possible  constant  in  level  and  form 
from  the  time  they  are  ready  for  the  concrete  until  the  time 
of  their  removal  from  under  the  arches ;  they  shall  also  be 
constructed  so  that  they  may  be  removed  with  ease  and  with- 
out shock  or  jar  to  the  concrete  masonry.  The  main  mem- 
bers of  centers  shall  be  bolted  together  at  the  joints.  Centers 
shall  not  be  removed  from  under  the  arches  in  less  than 
twenty-eight  (28)  days  after  the  concrete  of  the  arch  is  en- 
tirely in  place. 

SECTION  No.  436.  All  surfaces  of  the  concrete  masonry  for 
the  reinforced  concrete  elevated  Railroad  which  are  to  remain 
exposed  (except  the  inside  faces  of  the  walls  adjacent  to  the 
tracks,  below  the  balustrades)  shall  be  tooled  with  pneumatic 
hammers  to  uniform  surfaces,  the  surfaces  where  irregular  to 
be  dressed  back  to  true  planes.  Edges  or  arrises,  borders,  etc., 
shall  be  rubbed  to  a  smooth  surface. 

Immediately  following  the  removal  of  the  forms  (or  lag- 
ging only  if  directed),  followed  by  the  removal  of  the  projec- 
tions and  the  filling  of  the  voids,  etc.,  as  herein  provided,  the 
inside  faces  of  the  walls  adjacent  to  the  tracks,  below  the  bal- 
ustrades, shall  be  rubbed  down  in  such  a  manner  as  may  be 
directed  and  so  as  to  insure  a  generally  smooth,  uniform,  and- 
finished  natural,  concrete  surface,  in  accordance  with  Section 
No.  155. 

SECTION  No.  437.  Where  surfaces  of  the  concrete  are  to 
remain  exposed,  care  shall  be  taken  to  insure  the  flushing  of 
the  cement  against  the  forms.  This  shall  be  done  by  careful 
spading  and  puddling  while  the  concrete  is  being  placed,  for 
which  special  tools  shall  be  provided  as  required. 

SECTION  No.  439.  In  order  to  remove  the  cement  film  and 
to  obtain  the  desired  tooled  surfaces,  the  pneumatic  hammer 
or  hand  tools  ordinarily  used  for  dressing  stone  surfaces  shall* 
be  used  when  required. 

98 


PART   SECOND— STATION   FINISH  WORK 

. 
SUBDIVISION  1 

GENERAL 

SECTION  No.  120.  The  general  provisions  and  requirements 
for  workmanship  and  material  given  in  Part  First  of  these  speci- 
fications are  to  be  deemed  to  apply  to  Part  Second  of  the  specifi- 
cations to  the  extent  to  which  they  are  applicable. 

The  Contractor  shall  furnish  such  samples  as  may  be  required 
by  the  Engineer  of  materials  and  models  of  all  ornamental  work 

and   lettering. 

\ 

SECTION  No.  121.  The  Contractor,  in  order  to  prevent  the 
access  of  unauthorized  persons  to  the  Railroad  structure  and  to 
protect  stations  from  vandalism,  shall  board  up  all  station  stair- 
way entrances  as  soon  as  the  stairways  are  constructed  and  shall 
keep  a  watchman  at  each  station  at  all  times  until  the  final  ac- 
ceptance of  the  work.  The  Contractor  shall  also  keep  the  sta- 
tions and  station  approaches  free  from  ice  and  snow  until  the 
final  acceptance  of  the  work. 


SUBDIVISION  2 
TILE 

SECTION  No.  122.  All  tile  shall  be  of  first  quality  and  equal 
to  the  sample  on  file  in  the  office  of  the  Commission.  Tile  on  walls 
in  toilet  rooms  shall  in  general  be  white  glazed  tile. 

All  tile  shall  be  brought  to  the  work  in  large  quantities,  care- 
fully sorted  as  to  size  and  shade.  No  broken  or  imperfect  tile 
shall  be  used,  and  the  tile  work  shall  be  perfectly  true,  plumb  and 
straight;  tile  shall  be  furnished  to  lay  in  courses  made  up  of  the 
sizes  indicated  on  the  drawings  and  shall  be  jointed  in  colors  as 
directed  by  the  Commission.  The  height  of  the  tiled  wall  surfaces. 
c  s  indicated  on  the  drawings,  has  been  figured  for  a  certain  num- 
ber of  courses  with  an  allowance  for  joints,  and  the  Contractor 
will  be  required  to  adhere  to  these  figures.  All  corners  and 
angles  shall  be  rounded  and  shall  have  curved  tile  to  conform  to 
the  radii  indicated  on  the  drawings.  Mitre  pieces  shall  be  used  at 
the  intersection  of  all  angles  and  corners.  Some  tiles  shall  be  cut 
to  special  widths  and  lengths,  and  special  tiles  shall  be  furnished 
where  required.  Combination  (straight  and  curved)  tile  shall  be 
generally  used  on  all  corners  and  angles,  and  angle  bead  tile  of 
any  radius  will  not  be  used  unless  specifically  called  for  on  the 
drawings. 

SECTION  No.  123.  All  tile  work  shall  be  set  in  Portland 
cement  mortar. 

SECTION  No.  124.  Where  the  scratch  coat  for  tile  is  applied 
to  metal  lath,  the  first  coat  shall  consist  of  a  mixture  of  one  ( I ) 
volume  of  cement,  two  and  one-half  (23/2)  volumes  of  sand,  a 
volume  of  hydrated  lime  equal  to  ten  per  centum  (10%)  of  the 
volume  of  cement  and  sand,  and  a  proper  quantity  of  long  goat 
hair.  The  second  coat  shall  consist  of  a  mixture  of  one  (i) 
volume  of  cement  and  three  (3)  volumes  of  sand,  put  on  per- 
fectly straight  and  true,  and  of  thickness  necessary  to  conform 
to  the  finished  lines  established  by  the  Commission. 

Where  the  scratch  coat  for  tile  is  applied  to  concrete  or  other 
masonry  it  shall  be  the  same  as  specified  for  the  second  coat  on 
metal  lath.  The  surface  of  the  concrete  shall  be  well  hacked  or 
roughened  in  order  to  obtain  a  good  bond. 


100 


SPECIFICATIONS TILE 


SECTION  No.  125.  Before  final  acceptance  of  the  tile  work, 
the  Contractor  shall  remove  all  condemned  tiles  and  replace 
them  with  approved  tiles  and,  if  required  by  the  Engineer,  shall, 
at  any  time  during  the  progress  of  the  work  and  prior  to  the 
final  acceptance  of  same,  submit  a  statement  from  the  manufac- 
turer certifying  to  the  quantity  and  quality  of  tile  furnished  for 
each  station. 

SECTION  No.  126.  Samples  of  all  tiles  which  the  Contractor 
proposes  to  furnish  shall  be  approved  by  the  Engineer  before 
proceeding  with  the  work,  but  the  approval  of  samples  shall  not 
be  considered  as  modifying  the  requirements  of  these  specifica- 
tions, nor  as  relieving  the  Contractor  of  his  responsibility  under 
his  guarantee. 

SECTION  No.  127.  The  Contractor  shall  guarantee  all  tile 
work  not  to  craze,  crack  or  fall  off  for  three  (3)  years  from  the 

date  of  the  completion  of  the  Works. 


TOT 


»^»-\-    *  5  *,*/<%*> 

SUBDIVISION  3 

PLASTERING  AND  METAL  LATH 

SECTION  No.  129.  All  surfaces  which  are  to  be  plastered, 
other  than  masonry  surfaces,  shall  first  be  covered  with  metal 
lath. 

The  first  coat  on  metal  lath  shall  be  as  hereinbefore  specified 
lor  first  coat  on  metal  lath  for  tile.  The  plaster  coat  on 
masonry  surfaces  and  the  second  coat  on  metal  lath  shall, 
unless  otherwise  specified,  be  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  four 
(4)  barrels  of  cement  (three  and  one  half  (3^)  cubic  feet  per 
barrel),  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  cubic  yards  of  sand  and  one- 
half  (y2)  package  [fifty  (50)  pounds]  hydrated  lime.  The 
surface  of  the  plaster  shall  unless  otherwise  specified  be  given 
a  smooth  troweled  finish.  All  concrete  or  other  masonry  which 
is  to  be  plastered  shall  be  given  one  (i)  coat  as  specified  for 
the  second  coat  on  metal  lath.  The  surfaces  shall  be  thor- 
oughly cleaned  and  wet  before  the  plaster  is  applied.  The  sur- 
face of  the  concrete  shall  be  well  hacked  or  roughened  in  order 
to  obtain  a  good  bond. 

Metal  lath  shall  be  galvanized  wire  lath  No.  18  gauge,  U.  S. 
standard,  one-half  (J/£)  inch  mesh.  It  shall  be  secured  to  the 
wood  furring  with  galvanized  wire  staples  and  so  stretched  that 
there  shall  be  no  bulges  or  irregularities. 

Where  required  the  metal  lath  shall  be  secured  to  metal  fur- 
ring with  galvanized  lacing  wire,  No.  14  gauge,  U.  S.  standard. 
The  metal  furring  shall  consist  of  steel  angles. 

The  Contractor  shall  guarantee  all  plastering  not  to  crack 
or  fall  off  within  three  (3)  years  from  the  date  of  completion 
of  the  Works. 


102 


SUBDIVISION  4 
ASPHALT  AND  CEMENT  FLOORS,  BASES  AND  COVES 

SECTION  No.  131.  The  floors  of  mezzanines,  except  in  toilet 
rooms  and  under  stove  recesses,  will  in  general  consist  of  a  rock- 
asphalt  floor  laid  on  an  underflooring  of  wood.  Where  the 
floors  of  mezzanines  are  supported  on  concrete  slabs  the  floors 
shall  in  general  have  a  cement  finish.  At  the  intersection  of 
asphalt  and  of  cement  floors  with  the  sidewalls  a  sanitary  cove 
of  two  (2)  inch  radius  shall  be  formed.  Coves  shall  be  of  the 
same  material  as  the  floor  finish. 

Asphalt  floors  shall  in  general  be  laid  on  an  underflooring  of 
yellow  pine,  as  specified  in  Section  No.  157  of  this  Part.  This 
pine  floor  shall  be  covered  with  one  (i)  ply  of  untreated  felt  or 
imsurfaced  building  paper  without  binder.  Where  the  asphalt 
floor  is  laid  on  concrete  the  felt  or  paper  shall  be  omitted. 

SECTION  No.  132.  The  surface  mixture  shall  consist  of  the 
following  proportions,  by  weight:  eleven  and  one-half  (n1/?) 
parts  asphalt,  ten  and  one-half  (ioJ/£)  parts  sand,  thirty  (30) 
parts  grit,  forty-four  (44)  parts  limestone  dust  and  four  (4) 
parts  Portland  cement. 

Asphalt  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  Subdivision  14 
of  Part  First,  except  that  the  penetration  shall  be  between  ?o 
and  50  at  77  degrees  Fahr. 

Sand  shall  be  clean,  sharp,  and  free  from  dirt,  mica  and 
vegetable  matter.  It  shall  contain  both  coarse  and  fine  par- 
ticles and  shall  be  graded  according  to  the  percentages  herein 
specified.  Sand  which  does  not  fulfill  the  above  requirements  in 
its  natural  condition  shall  be  screened,  washed,  or  mixed  with 
other  sand  to  produce  a  result  in  accordance  with  said  require- 
ments. Of  the  ten  and  one-half  (IOT^)  parts  of  sand 

100%  shall  pass  through  a  lo-mesh  sieve, 
40%  shall  pass  through  a  4O-mesh  sieve, 
10%  shall  pass  through  an  So-mesh  sieve. 

All  grit  shall  pass  through  a  4-mesb  sieve,  thirty  per  centum 
(30%)  through  an  8-mesh  sieve  and  one  hundred  per  centum 
(  TOO%  )  shall  be  retained  on  a  i6-mesh  sieve. 


103 


SPECIFICATIONS — ASPHALT  AND  CEMENT  FLOORS,  BASES  AND  COVES 

All  limestone  dust  shall  be  of  such  fineness  that  it  shall  leave 
a  residue  of  not  more  than  twenty  per  centum  (20%)  on  a  100- 
mesh  sieve,  and  not  mprc  than  ninety  per  centum  (90%)  on  a 
2OO-mesh  sieve. 

Portland  cement  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  Sub- 
division 8  of  Part  First. 

All  proportions  herein  mentioned  shall  be  by  weight. 

SECTION  No.  133.  The  sand,  grit,  limestone  dust  and  asphalt 
shall  be  heated  to  approximately  325  degrees  Fahr.,  the  asphalt 
being  heated  separately.  The  maximum  temperature  of  the 
sand,  grit  and  limestone  dust  as  delivered  at  the  mixing  kettle 
shall  not  exceed  375  degrees  Fahr.  and  the  maximum  tempera- 
ture of  the  asphalt  shall  not  exceed  350  degrees  Fahr.  The 
Portland  cement,  heated  to  not  over  325  degrees  Fahr.,  shall 
be  thoroughly  mixed  with  the  heated  sand,  grit  and  limestone 
dust.  The  asphalt  shall  then  be  mixed  with  the  sand,  grit  and 
limestone  dust  and  Portland  cement  until  a  homogeneous  mix- 
ture is  produced,  in  which  all  particles  are  thoroughly  coated 
with  asphalt.  The  mastic  may  be  mixed  in  an  approved  mixing 
machine. 

The  surface  mixture  shall  be  prepared  on  or  close  to  the 
work  and  in  amounts  not  exceeding  that  which  can  be  laid  in 
one  forking  day.  The  maximum  temperature  of  any  batch 
of  surface  mixture  immediately  after  being  mixed  shall  not  ex- 
ceed 325  degrees  Fahr.  and  the  minimum  temperature  of  the 
surface  mixture  when  delivered  on  the  pine  floor  shall  be  not 
less  than  275  degrees  Fahr. 

If  the  surface  mixture  contains  materials  which  will  become 
separated  by  subsidence  while  the  asphalt  is  in  a  melted  con- 
dition, it  shall  be  thoroughly  agitated  before  being  drawn  and 
while  in  the  supply  kettles.  Approved  methods  of  agitation 
which  will  not  injure  the  surface  mixture  shall  be  used. 

The  Contractor  shall  provide  a  sufficient  number  of  accurate, 
efficient  thermometers  for  determining  temperatures  at  all  stages 
of  the  work. 

After  the  mixture  has  been  spread  and  compressed  to  a 
uniform  thickness  of  one  (i)  inch  it  shall  be  rubbed  to  a 
smooth  surface  with  a  wooden  float.  Expansion  joints  shall  be 
provided  where  necessary. 

104 


SPECIFICATIONS ASPHALT  AND  CEMENT  FLOORS,   BASES  AND  COVES 

SECTION  No.  134.  The  floors  of  mezzanines  where  indicated 
on  the  drawings  shall  consist  of  a  reinforced  concrete  slab  fin- 
ished with  another  layer  of  concrete  and  a  cement  finish.  The 
cement  finish  for  floors,  bases  and  coves  shall  be  in  the  propor- 
tions, by  volume,  of  one  (i)  part  cement  to  two  (2)  parts  sand. 
The  under  side  of  the  concrete  slab  shall  be  rubbed  to  a  smooth 
and  even  finish. 

In  general  the  floors  of  enclosures  between  stations  shall  be 
of  plain  or  reinforced  concrete  as  indicated  on  the  drawings  and 
shall  have  a  cement  finish. 

SECTION  No.  135.  The  top  of  the  plain  or  reinforced  con- 
crete slab  shall  be  left  three  (3)  inches  below  and  parallel  to 
the  finished  floor  elevation,  and  after  this  concrete  slab  has 
set,  a  two  (2)  inch  layer  of  concrete  shall  be  spread  thereon 
to  an  even  thickness  and  rammed  so  that  its  top  surface  shall 
be  one  (i)  inch  below  and  parallel  to  the  finished  floor  eleva- 
tion. Before  this  layer  of  concrete  has  set,  a  one  (i)  inch 
layer  of  cement  finish  shall  be  spread  over  its  surface  and  well 
floated  to  grade  to  fill  all  voids  and  hollows.  A  dry  mixture  of 
one  (i)  part  of  an  approved  concrete  hardener  and  one  (i) 
part  of  Portland  cement  (by  weight)  mixed  to  an  even  color, 
shall  then  be  sprinkled  over  the  surface  and  floated  thoroughly 
and  troweled  to  a  smooth,  uniform,  hard  finished  surface. 

Cement  floors  shall  be  laid  out  in  blocks  about  three  (3) 
feet  square.  These  blocks  shall  be  formed  by  cutting  through 
the  two  (2)  inch  concrete  layer,  before  it  has  begun  to  set, 
with  a  tool  which  will  make  a  one- fourth  (%)  inch  joint.  The 
cement  finish  shall  be  marked  with  a  suitable  tool  directly  over 
the  joint  above  described. 

SECTION  No.  136.  A  cement  wainscot  or  base,  of  the  height 
indicated  on  the  drawings,  shall  be  formed  of  the  same  materials 
as  used  for  the  cement  finish.  The  cement  wainscot  or  base  shall 
project  beyond  and  conform  to  the  line  of  the  finished  wall. 


105 


SUBDIVISION  5 
CONCRETE  WORK 

SECTION  No.  139.  Concrete  copings  shall  be  reinforced  with 
steel  rods  placed  as  directed  by  the  Engineer  should  he  con- 
sider reinforcement  necessary,  and  finished  on  all  exposed  sur- 
faces with  a  finish  coat  of  one  (i)  inch  minimum  thickness. 
The  face  of  the  copings  shall  be  washed  with  a  cement  grout 
before  the  concrete  is  thoroughly  set  (where  practicable,  im- 
mediately after  the  removal  of  the  forms)  and  rubbed  down  to 
a  hard,  even  finish.  The  cement  grout  shall  be  colored  with 
lampblack  as  directed. 

SECTION  No.  140.  The  finish  for  copings  shall  be  as  herein- 
before specified  for  cement  floors,  and  shall  be  colored  with 
lampblack  where  required. 

The  core  concrete  and  finish  coat  of  copings  shall  be  filled 
into  the  forms  at  the  same  time  and  in  such  a  manner  that  they 
will  set  as  one  mass. 

SECTION  No.  141.  Steel  beams,  girders  and  columns  where 
required  by  the  Engineer,  shall  be  wrapped  with  special  wire 
forms,  of  a  type  and  weight  approved  by  the  Engineer,  and  en- 
cased in  concrete. 

SECTION  No.  142.  Concrete  foundations  shall  be  provided 
for  columns  as  specified  in  Part  First  and  after  the  columns  are 
secured  in  place  the  concrete  shall  be  carried  up  around  the  col- 
umns, enclosing  the  base  as  indicated  on  the  drawings.  The  sur- 
face of  the  concrete  around  stairway  columns  above  the  surface 
of  the  street  shall  be  given  a  troweled  finish. 

SECTION  No.  143.  Concrete  street  landings  at  the  foot  of 
stairways  shall  be  reinforced  with  steel  rods,  and  concrete  foun- 
dation walls  shall  be  provided  for  the  support  of  the  landings. 
The  portions  of  the  street  landings  above  the  surface  of 
the  street  shall  have  a  cement  finish  one  (i)  inch  thick, 
mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  (i)  volume  of  cement  and  two 
(2)  volumes  of  sand,  colored  with  lampblack.  The  cement 
finish  shall  be  placed  in  the  forms  at  the  same  time  as  the  con- 
crete so  as  to  set  as  one  mass. 

Where  necessary,  the  foundations  in  poor  ground  shall  be 
increased  in  size  to  obtain  a  proper  distribution  of  the  load. 

SECTION  No.  144.  Manholes  of  concrete  or  brick  masonry 
shall  be  provided,  as  hereinafter  specified,  for  enclosing  the  main 
traps  and  water  supply  valves. 

106 


SPECIFICATIONS CONCRETE  WORK 

SECTION  No.  145.  The  track  floors  over  mezzanines  shall 
consist  of  reinforced  concrete,  waterproofing  and  protective 
concrete.  The  upper  surf:  cc  of  the  protective  concrete  over 
the  waterproofing  shall  be  troweled  smooth  and  carefully 
graded  to  provide  proper  drainage.  The  under  side  of  the 
concrete  track  floors  shall  be  rubbed  to  a  smooth  and  even 
finish.  Reinforcing  metal  shall  consist  of  steel  rods.  Wood 
sleepers,  bolted  to  the  girders,  shall  be  provided  where  indicated 
on  the  drawings  in  the  under  side  of  the  track  floors  for  securing 
the  walls  of  mezzanines.  Galvanized  wrought  iron  pipe  ferrules 
with  galvanized  iron  flanges  and  nuts  shall  be  provided  for  drain- 
age. 

SECTION  No.  146.  The  portion  of  the  train  platforms  over 
the  mezzanines,  where  indicated  in  the  drawings,  shall  consist 
of  reinforced  concrete,  waterproofing,  protective  concrete  and 
wood  flooring.  The  protective  concrete  over  the  waterproof- 
ing shall  have  wood  sleepers  imbedded  therein  to  provide  nail- 
ing for  the  platform  floor  as  hereinafter  specified.  Ferrules  for 
smoke  flues  shall  be  set  in  the  concrete  platforms.  Sleeves  for 
expansion  bolts  to  support  the  wood  facias  may  be  imbedded 
in  the  exposed  edge  of  the  concrete  platforms.  The  under  side 
of  the  concrete  train  platforms  shall  be  rubbed  to  a  smooth  and 
even  finish.  Reinforcing  metal  shall  consist  of  steel  rods.  (See 
Section  No.  162  of  this  Part.) 

SECTION  No.  147.  Stove  recesses  formed  of  concrete  rein- 
forced with  expanded  metal  or  steel  rods  shall  be  provided  where 
indicated  on  the  drawings,  and  particular  care  shall  be  taken  with 
the  forms  for  this  work  so  as  to  carry  out  the  design  indicated. 
Where  indicated  on  the  drawings  the  sides  of  the  stove  re- 
cesses shall  be  extended  over  the  wood  framing  of  the  adjacent 
walls  by  the  use  of  metal  lath  and  plaster,  as  hereinbefore  speci- 
fied, and  the  surface  of  the  plaster  shall  be  finished  the  same 
as  the  surface  of  the  concrete  stove  recesses.  The  surface  of 
the  concrete  shall  be  washed  with  a  cement  grout  and  rubbed 
down  to  a  smooth,  hard,  even  finish.  The  concrete  and  grout 
for  stove  recesses  shall  be  colored  with  lampblack.  The  ex- 
panded metal  shall  be  of  No.  25  gauge,  U.  S.  standard,  three  (3) 
pounds  per  square  yard,  without  paint  or  other  coating.  The 
Contractor  may,  with  the  approval  of  the  Engineer,  substitute 
other  reinforcement  in  place  of  the  expanded  metal.  One  (i) 
cast-iron  cover  and  one  (i)  cast-iron  register  shall  be  provided 
for  each  stove  recess.  Covers  and  registers  shall  have  a  bronze 
plated  finish. 

107 


SUBDIVISION  6 
WOODWORK 

SECTION  No.  151.  Spruce  shall  be  a  northern,  selected  grade, 
sound,  seasoned,  free  from  wanes,  loose,  large  or  decayed  knots, 
rots,  shakes  or  any  other  imperfection  impairing  its  durability, 
strength  or  appearance  for  the  use  specified.  It  may  contain  a 
number  of  small,  tight  knots  varying  in  size  from  a  lead  pencil 
to  a  silver  quarter.  Bright  sap  will  be  permitted  but  no  stain  sap 
will  be  accepted. 

Yellow  pine  shall  be  first  growth,  long  leaf  Southern  yellow 
pine,  straight,  square  edged,  close  grained,  and  free  from  wanes, 
loose,  large  or  decayed  knots,  splits,  shakes,  rots  or  any  other 
defect  which  may  impair  its  strength  or  durability  for  the  use 
specified.  In  no  case  will  any  stick  be  accepted  with  less  than 
three  (3)  heart  corners  or  with  more  than  one  (i)  inch  of  sap 
on  the  fourth  corner,  or  with  more  than  two  and  one-half  (2^/2) 
inches  of  sap,  measured  across  the  face  anywhere  in  the  length 
of  the  piece. 

White  pine  shall  be  soft,  close-grained  and  free  from  shakes, 
rot  or  any  other  defects  which  may  impair  its  strength, 
durability  or  appearance  for  the  use  specified.  A  small  percent- 
age of  bright  sap  will  be  permitted  on  all  surfaces,  and  stained 
sap  and  a  few  knots  not  exceeding  one-half  (l/2)  of  an  inch  in 
diameter  will  be  permitted  on  surfaces  which  will  not  be  exposed 
in  the  finished  work,  but  except  as  specified  above  all  exposed 
surfaces  of  the  finished  work  shall  show  clear. 

Oak  shall  be  a  selected  grade  of  plain  red  or  white  oak, 
straight  grained.  All  surfaces  exposed  to  view  shall  be  free 
from  knots,  shakes,  sap,  worm  holes,  rot,  checks  and  other 
defects ;  in  other  words,  exposed  surfaces  to  show  clear. 

All  wood  unless  otherwise  specified  shall  be  spruce.  Sills 
shall  in  general  be  three  (3)  inches  by  six  (6)  inches;  plates 
shall  in  general  be  two  (2)  inches  by  four  (4)  inches;  studding 
shall  in  general  be  two  (2)  inches  by  four  (4)  inches;  joists 
shall  be  three  (3)  inches  by  ten  (10)  inches;  rafters  for  enclos- 
ures between  stations  shall  be  two  (2)  inches  by  six  (6)  inches, 
dressed  three  (3)  sides  and  sawed  to  pattern;  canopy  rafters 
shall  be  three  (3)  inches  by  six  (6)  inches,  dressed  three  (3) 
sides  and  sawed  to  pattern ;  framing  for  canopy  valleys  shall  be 

108 


SPECIFICATIONS — WOODWORK 

three  (3)  inches  by  ten  (10)  inches,  and  bridging  shall  he  two 
(2)  inches  by  four  (4)  inches;  wood  furring  shall  be  one  (i) 
inch  by  two  (2)  inches,  laid  horizontally  and  spaced  not  more 
than  twenty  (20)  inches  on  centers.  Wood  furring  for  metal 
lath  shall  be  not  more  than  sixteen  (16)  inches  on  centers.  Vari- 
ations may  be  made  from  the  above  sizes  in  special  cases,  as  or 
dered.  All  the  above  dimensions  are  for  undressed  lumber.  In 
general,  dimensions  of  parts  other  than  those  mentioned  above 
shall  apply  to  dressed  work. 

The  exposed  surfaces  of  all  wood,  and  covered  surfaces 
where  required,  shall  be  dressed.  Grounds  shall  be  provided 
where  required.  Stop  beads  .shall  be  of  the  sizes  indicated  on 
the  drawings,  and  (except  for  casement  windows)  shall  be  se- 
cured with  brass  screws  and  washers,  spaced  not  more  than 
eighteen  (18)  inches  on  centers. 

All  woodwork  shall  be  thoroughly  secured  with  spikes,  nails 
or  bolts,  unless  otherwise  specified,  and  the  spikes,  nails  and  bolts 
shall  be  of  such  size  and  weight  as  may  be  required  to  secure  the 
woodwork  firmly  in  place.  Each  board  shall  be  nailed  to  each 
bearing,  and  all  joints  shall  be  made  over  the  centers  of  bearings. 

All  doors  and  all  window  sash  shall  have  mortised  and 
tenoned  stiles  and  rails,  pinned  and  glued,  and  rabbeted  where 
directed.  Window  and  door  frames  shall  be  rabbeted,  mortised 
and  tenoned,  and  pinned  where  required. 

All  sash  unless  otherwise  specified  shall  be  glazed  with  double- 
thick  glass  selected  from  glass  graded  as  "A".  It  shall  be  free 
from  any  perceptible  amount  of  air  bubbles,  blisters,  sulphur 
stain,  burnt  specks,  burns,  cords  and  strings,  shall  show  a  good 
gloss  and  even  surface  and  shall  be  well  flattened.  The  thickness 
shall  be  uniform,  and  not  more  than  nine  (9)  lights  shall  have  a 
total  thickness  of  one  (i)  inch.  Each  light  shall  weigh  not  less 
than  twenty-four  (24)  ounces  to  the  square  foot. 

Plate  glass  shall  be  polished,  not  less  than  three-sixteenths 
(3/16)  of  an  inch  in  thickness  and  shall  be  free  from  open  or 
large  bubbles. 

All  glass  unless  otherwise  specified  shall  be  secured  with 
wooden  strips  and  shall  be  bedded  in  an  approved  mixture  of 
white  lead  and  putty. 


iog 


SPECIFICATIONS WOODWORK 

SECTION  No.  152.  Studs  shall  be  spaced  not  more  than  six- 
teen (16)  inches  on  centers,  shall  be  doubled  at  all  corners  and 
openings  and  shall  have  horizontal  bridging  at  half  their  height. 

Joists  shall  be  doubled  and  tripled  where  indicated.  All  plat- 
form joists  shall  be  yellow  pine.  They  shall  be  set  level, 
and  shall  be  sized  to  the  steel  so  as  to  bring  the  finished 
platform  to  the  required  elevation.  All  joists  having  a  span 
of  from  eight  (8)  feet  to  sixteen  (16)  feet  shall  have  one  (i) 
row  of  cross-bridging;  spans  of  over  sixteen  (16)  feet  shall 
have  two  (2)  rows  of  cross-bridging.  Bridging  shall  be  accu- 
rately cut  and  fitted  and  shall  be  nailed  at  each  end.  The  lower 
ends  of  bridging  shall  not  be  nailed  until  after  the  floor  is  laid. 

Sills  and  plates  shall  be  bolted  to  the  concrete  with  expansion 
bolts  or  to  the  steel  with  one-half  (y2)  inch  or  five-eighths  (^) 
inch  bolts  as  directed,  provided  with  washers  and  spaced  not 
more  than  thirty  (30)  inches  on  centers,  or  nailed  to  wood 
sleepers  embedded  in  the  concrete. 

Rafters  shall  be  framed  upon  plates  and  purlins,  and  shall 
be  well  spiked  at  all  bearings  and  intersections. 

SECTION  No.  153.  Stairway  canopies  shall  be  furnished  with 
two  (2)  inch  by  three  (3)  inch  plates  dressed  three  (3)  sides,  to 
provide  a  fastening  for  the  roof  boarding.  These  plates  shall  be 
bolted  to  the  canopy  steel  as  indicated.  Roof  boarding  for  cano- 
pies over  train  platforms,  passageways,  stairways  and  roofs  of 
mezzanines  extending  beyond  the  main  structure,  shall  be  yellow 
pine,  showing  one  ( I )  heart  face,  clear  from  all  defects.  It  shall 
be  three  and  one-half  (3^2)  inches  wide  by  seven-eighths  (%) 
of  an  inch  thick,  dressed  one  (i)  side,  with  "V"  joints  and 
tongued  and  grooved.  Roof  boarding  for  enclosures  between 
stations  shall  be  yellow  pine,  showing  one  ( i )  heart  face,  clear 
from  all  defects.  It  shall  be  seven-eighths  (%)  of  an  inch  thick, 
dressed  one  ( i )  side,  tongued  and  grooved. 

SECTION  No.  154.  The  exterior  walls  of  mezzanines  and 
enclosed  stairways  shall,  unless  otherwise  indicated  on  the  draw- 
ings, be  built  up  of  two  (2)  inch  by  four  (4)  inch  studs  with 
plates  and  sills,  framed  for  openings  and  to  accommodate  steel 
hangers,  flues  and  pipes,  conduits  and  other  electric  work  and 
where  covered  with  copper  shall  be  sheathed  on  the  outside  with 


i  10 


SPECIFICATIONS  —  WOODWORK 


spruce  boards  seven-eighths  (%)  of  an  inch  thick,  dressed  one 
(i)  side,  tongued  and  grooved,  laid  diagonally,  carried  down  to 
the  sills  and  blocked  off  with  planed  and  trued  wood  to  form  a 
solid  backing  for  rails,  stiles  and  panel  work.  This  blocking 
shall  be  laid  on  top  of  the  roofing  fabric  specified  in  Section  No. 
156  of  this  Part,  and  the  metal  panels  shall  bear  directly  on  the 
roofing  fabric  next  to  the  sheathing.  The  space  between  studs 
where  indicated  on  the  drawings  shall  be  filled  with  hollow  terra 
cotta  blocks  laid  in  cement  mortar. 

The  inside  of  exterior  walls  of  mezzanines  shall,  unless 
otherwise  indicated  on  the  drawings,  be  furred  as  hereinbefore 
specified,  and  then  sheathed  with  two  and  one-half  (2^/2)  inch 
by  thirteen-sixteenths  (13/16)  inch  oak,  with  "V"  joints,  tongued 
and  grooved,  and  applied  vertically.  Bases,  sills,  aprons,  stools, 
stop  beads  and  mouldings  of  oak  shall  be  formed  as  indicated. 
At  least  ninety  per  centum  (90%)  of  the  sheathing  shall  be  in 
single  lengths.  Before  placing  oak  sheathing  on  masonry-filled 
walls  or  walls  finished  on  one  side  with  tile  the  back  of  the 
sheathing  shall  be  given  two  (2)  coats  of  an  approved  paint. 

Inside  trim  shall  be  oak,  hollow  backed.  Stops  shall  be  put 
on  with  stop  bead  screws.  All  trim  shall  be  mitred,  and  door 
trim  shall  stop  on  top  of  base  block. 

Partition  walls  on  mezzanines  shall,  unless  otherwise  indi- 
cated on  the  drawings,  be  built  up  of  two  (2)  inch  by  four  (4) 
inch  studs,  framed  for  openings  and  to  accommodate  steel 
hangers,  flues  and  pipes,  conduits  and  other  electric  work  and 
(except  the  walls  of  toilet  rooms,  closets  and  booths  other  than 
ticket  booths)  shall  be  finished  on  both  sides  with  oak  sheathing, 
bases  and  trim  as  specified  for  inside  of  exterior  walls  of  mezza- 
nines. Partition  walls  shall  be  supported  on  and  secured  to  the 
wood  underflooring  or  to  the  concrete  floor.  The  space  between 
studs  where  indicated  on  the  drawings  shall  be  filled  with  hollow 
terra  cotta  blocks  laid  in  cement  mortar. 

SECTION  No.  155.  The  exterior  walls  of  enclosures  between 
stations  shall  be  built  up  of  studs  bolted  to  the  steel  framing  and 
with  bridging,  sills,  plates,  outside  sheathing  and  copper  covering 
as  hereinbefore  specified  for  the  exterior  walls  of  mezzanines. 
The  partition  walls  of  enclosures  between  stations  shall  be  built 
cf  studs,  bridging,  sills  and  plates  as  hereinbefore  specified  for 

in 


SPECIFICATIONS WOODWORK 

partition  walls  in  mezzanines.  The  inside  wall  finish  shall  be  as 
hereinafter  specified. 

Rafters  and  cross-ties  ihall  be  of  yellow  pine,  two  (2)  inches 
by  six  (6)  inches,  not  more  than  twenty  (20)  inches  on  centers; 
ridge  pieces  shall  be  two  (2)  inches  by  eight  (8)  inches,  and 
plates  three  (3)  inches  by  six  (6)  inches.  Standing  gutters  shall 
be  built  up  over  the  eaves. 

The  interior  walls  and  inside  of  exterior  walls  of  enclosures 
between  stations  shall  be  furred  or  sheathed  and  finished  with 
galvanized  iron,  plaster,  slate  or  other  materials  as  herein  else- 
where specified  and  as  indicated  on  the  drawings.  Framing  shall 
be  arranged  to  accommodate  flues  and  pipes,  conduits  and  other 
electric  work. 

SECTION  No.  156.  Immediately  after  the  ander-boarding  is 
laid  an  approved  tar  paper  shall  be  laid  as  directed  upon  the 
under-boarding  of  all  roofs  which  are  to  be  covered  with  tin. 
An  approved  red  rope  roofing  fabric  shall  be  laid  on  all  under- 
boarding  which  is  to  be  covered  with  other  sheet  metal  and  else- 
where where  required.  The  red  rope  roofing  fabric  shall  be 
lapped  and  nailed  and  shall  not  be  put  in  place  until  the  sheet 
metal  or  other  covering  is  about  to  be  laid. 

SECTION  No.  157.  The  wood  underflooring  of  mezzanines 
shall  consist  of  sills  and  planks.  Planks  shall  be  two  (2)  inch 
by  six  (6)  inch  yellow  pine,  tongued  and  grooved,  dressed 
one  (i)  side,  laid  across  the  sills,  breaking  joints,  and  nailed 
at  each  sill  or  bearing.  Pieces  shall  be  cut  in  between  the  sills 
to  form  panels  on  the  under  side  of  flooring.  The  upper  floor- 
ing shall  consist  of  an  asphalt  composition  as  specified  in  Sub- 
division 4  of  this  Part  Second.  Copings  and  facia  pieces  of  yel- 
low pine  shall  be  provided  in  single  lengths  at  stairwells  where 
concrete  is  not  used.  Wood  flooring  for  passageways  at  stations 
shall  be  as  hereinafter  specified  for  train  platforms  and  shall  be 
supported  on  wood  sills. 

SECTION  No.  158.  The  parting  strips  and  pulley  stiles  of  win- 
dow frames  shall  be  made  of  clear  yellow  pine.  Window  sills 
which  are  to  be  covered  with  copper  shall  be  made  of  spruce. 
All  other  parts  of  window  frames  shall,  unless  otherwise  speci- 

112 


SPECIFICATIONS — WOODWORK 

fied,  be  made  of  white  pine.  Cox  frames  with  pockets  for  weights 
shall  be  made  for  double  hung  sash.  The  pockets  for  weights 
shall  be  easily  accessible  and  the  covers  shall  be  secured  with 
screws. 

The  interior  trim,  stools  and  aprons  of  windows  in  exterior 
walls  of  mezzanines  shall,  in  general,  be  built  of  oak,  except  in 
toilet  rooms  and  porters'  closets. 

All  double  hung  sash  shall  be  made  of  white  pine,  and 
shall  have  checked  meeting  rails.  Sash  shall  be  hung  with 
approved  sash  cord  of  best  quality  and  evenly  balanced  with 
weights  of  cast  iron,  and  shall  be  provided  with  two  and  one- 
fourth  (2*4)  inch  extra  strong,  ball-bearing  pulleys  having  brass 
wheels  and  rectangular  brass  faces.  Hinged  sash  shall  be  hung 
to  swing  as  indicated. 

Sash  and  frames  for  partition  walls  of  mezzanines  in  wait- 
ing rooms  shall  be  made  of  oak.  Sash  and  frames  for  casement 
windows  shall  be  made  of  white  pine. 

All  sash,  unless  otherwise  specified,  shall  be  one  and  three- 
fourths  (i^4)  inches  thick,  and  shall  be  divided  into  lights  as 
indicated  on  the  drawings.  All  sash  in  toilet  rooms  and  elsewhere 
where  indicated  on  the  drawings  shall  be  glazed  with  Florentine 
glass.  Plate  glass  shall  be  used  for  all  glazed  door  panels  and 
for  sash  in  enclosures  beween  stations  where  indicated  on  the 
drawings. 

SECTION  No.  159.  Frames  for  doors  at  stations  shall  be  made 
of  one  and  three-fourths  (i?4)  inch  oak,  rabbeted  for  the  doors 
and  well  nailed  to  the  studs.  All  moulding  and  trim  shall  be  as 
indicated  on  the  drawings. 

Frames  for  doors  to  enclosures  between  stations  shall  be  made 
of  yellow  pine,  one  and  three-fourths  (ij4)  inches  thick,  rabbeted 
for  the  doors  and  well  secured  to  the  studding.  Moulding  and 
trim  shall  be  as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

Doors  for  enclosures  between  stations  shall  be  made  of  white 
pine,  one  and  three-fourths  (i-}4)  inches  thick,  paneled  as 
directed.  Panels  shall  consist  of  not  more  than  three  (3)  pieces, 
slip-tongued  and  glued.  Batten  doors  with  oak  or  pine  facing 
shall  be  provided  where  required  in  interior  walls  of  mezzanines. 

SECTION  No.  160.     Doors  at  stations  unless  otherwise  speci- 


SPECIFICATIONS — WOODWORK 

fied,  shall  be  built  up  of  soft  pine  cores,  properly  framed  and 
glued  together,  paneled  and  glazed  as  indicated,  and  veneered  on 
both  sides  with  oak.  Doors  shall  be  one  and  three-fourths  (i}4) 
inches  thick  with  six  (6)  inch  stiles,  and  panels  shall  be  three  (3) 
ply. 

Doors  for  toilet  stalls  shall  be  built  of  oak,  framed  and  glued 
together.  Doors  shall  be  one  and  one-fourth  ( i  J4 )  inches  thick 
and  paneled  as  indicated. 

All  window  and  door  frames,  sash  and  wind  screens,  unless 
of  oak,  shall  be  painted  on  all  sides,  before  being  brought  upon 
the  work,  with  a  priming  coat  of  "E"  paint  as  specified  in  Sec- 
tion No.  288  of  this  Part,  reduced  with  one  ( i )  quart  of  benzol 
per  gallon  of  paint.  Parting  strips  and  pulley  stiles  shall  be  given 
two  (2)  coats  of  raw  linseed  oil  only.  Other  painting  shall  be 
as  hereinafter  specified. 

SECTION  No.  161.  Vent  doors  shall  be  provided  in  the  walls 
of  mezzanines,  where  indicated  on  the  drawings.  The  doors 
shall  be  made  of  yellow  pine  or  oak  as  may  be  ordered  by  the 
Commission.  The  doors  shall  be  one  and  three-fourths  (i^4) 
inches  thick,  paneled  as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  162.  Wood  flooring  for  train  platforms  shall 
be  two  (2)  inch  by  six  (6)  inch  yellow  pine,  dressed  four  (4) 
sides,  laid  transversely,  with  one-eighth  (j/£)  inch  open  joints, 
double  nailed  to  each  bearing  and  neatly  sawed  to  line  at  both 
nosings.  At  least  sixty  per  centum  (60%)  of  the  flooring  shall 
be  in  single  lengths,  but  no  piece  laid  shall  be  less  than  five  (5 ) 
feet  long.  Joists  shall  be  three  (3)  inch  by  ten  (10)  inch  spruce, 
dressed  three  (3)  sides,  spaced  twenty  (20)  inches  on  centers, 
doubled  where  indicated  and  fastened  to  the  steel  beams  with 
approved  clips.  A  one  and  one-eighth  (i/4)  inch  yellow  pine 
facia  shall  be  provided  on  the  outside  of  the  floor  joists  and 
shall  be  furred  out  from  the  edge  of  the  joists.  Where  platform 
construction  is  of  concrete,  as  specified  in  Section  No.  146,  sleep- 
ers shall  be  provided  in  the  concrete  as  indicated  for  nailing 
flooring.  The  sleepers  shall  be  coated  with  an  approved  preserva- 
tive before  being  laid,  and  the  joints  in  this  portion  of  the  flooring 
shall  be  filled  with  an  approved  elastic  cement.  Holes  two  (2) 
inches  in  diameter  shall  be  provided  in  floors  of  island  platforms 
un'der  free  standing  lamp  standards,  and  in  floors  of  side  platforms 

114 


SPECIFICATIONS WOODWORK 

under  the  end  post  of  Type  ''1C"  railings  nearest  the  wind  screens. 
The  floor  joists  shall  be  doubled  atound  all  stairwells,  and  a 
two  and  seven-eighths  (2j£)  inch  by  seven  and  three-fourths 
(7^4)  inch  yellow  pine  plank  shall  be  framed  around  stairwells 
to  form  a  coping  where  concrete  is  not  used. 

SECTION  No.  163.  Platform  edge  construction  for  concrete 
platforms  shall  consist  of  a  two  (2)  inch  yellow  pine  facia  bolted 
to  the  edge  of  the  concrete  slabs  with  expansion  bolts.  The 
surface  of  the  facia  in  contact  with  the  concrete  shall  be  coated 
with  white  lead  just  before  being  put  into  place,  in  order  to  effect 
a  water-tight  joint,  and  the  flooring  shall  be  secured  to  the  facia. 

SECTION  No.  164.  Wind  screens  with  drop  sash  on  train 
platforms  shall  be  built  of  white  pine,  and  shall  be  provided  with 
removable  panels  and  with  pockets  for  drop  sash.  Panels  shall 
be  slip-tongued  to  avoid  opening  and  parting  and  no  panel  shall 
consist  of  more  than  three  (3)  pieces.  Access  to  the  pockets  shall 
be  provided  by  removable  baseboards,  secured  in  place  by  screws. 
Movable  sills  shall  be  provided  over  the  sash  pockets  and  shall 
be  secured  with  brass  screws  and  washers.  The  wind  screens 
shall  be  secured  to  the  canopy  steel  at  the  top  and  to  the  platfor:.n 
flooring  at  the  bottom,  and  to  the  steel  uprights  supporting  the 
canopy. 

Panels  for  name  tablets  shall  be  formed  where  indicated  on 
the  drawings,  and  fixed  sash  shall  be  provided  above  these  panels. 
Sash  shall  be  made  of  white  pine,  one  and  three-fourths  (i^4) 
inches  thick. 

SECTION  No.  165.  The  risers,  treads  and  flooring  for  land- 
ings for  stairways,  unless  otherwise  indicated  on  the  drawings, 
shall  be  built  of  yellow  pine.  Wood  treads  shall  be  two  (2)  inches 
thick,  with  rounded  nosings,  and  shall  be  secured  to  angles 
with  round  headed  bolts,  four  (4)  to  each  tread.  Wood 
risers  shall  be  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inches  thick.  Wood  treads 
and  risers  shall  be  dressed  two  (2)  sides  and  furnished  in  single 
lengths.  Wood  flooring  for  landings  shall  be  two  (2)  inches 
by  six  (6)  inches,  tongued  and  grooved,  the  joints  made  with 
white  lead,  and  shall  be  secured  to  the  angles  with  round 
headed  bolts  with  washers,  two  (2)  bolts  to  each  bearing.  All 


SPECIFICATIONS WOODWORK 

wood  risers  and  treads  in  stairways  shall  be  set  in  white  lead. 
Wooden  ladders  at  ends  of  train  platforms  shall  consist  of 
stringers  and  treads  of  yellow  pine  and  the  ladders  shall  be  se- 
cured to  the  platforms  and  to  the  service  walks  as  indicated  on 
the  drawings. 

All  stairways  and  stairway  landings  shall  unless  otherwise 
indicated  on  the  drawings  be  provided  on  each  side  with  a  sea- 
soned white  oak  hand-rail  of  approved  cross-section  for  their 
entire  length.  Hand-rails  shall  be  straight  grained  and  free  from 
knots,  checks,  warp  or  any  other  imperfections  that  will  impair 
their  strength  or  durability.  They  shall  be  supported  on  and 
secured  to  cast-iron  brackets  spaced  not  more  than  five  (5)  feet 
six  (6)  inches  on  centers.  Additional  brackets  shall  be  pro- 
vided at  all  bends  and  returns  where  required.  Special  bends 
and  returns  shall  be  provided  and  the  hand-rails  shall  return 
to  sockets  on  the  railings  at  the  top  and  bottom  of  stairs.  The 
hand-rails  shall  be  secured  to  the  sockets  with  long  screws  pass- 
ing through  the  socket  and  into  the  end  of  the  hand-rail.  All 
bends  and  returns  shall  be  neatly  curved  and  finished,  shall  be 
secured  at  joints  with  rail  bolts  and  shall  be  doweled. 

SECTION  No.  168.  Frames  for  ticket  booths  shall  be  built 
of  two  (2)  inch  by  three  (3)  inch  studs,  with  plates  and  sills  of 
the  same  size.  Floors  shall  be  supported  on  three  (3)  inch  by 
four  (4)  inch  sleepers  eighteen  (18)  inches  on  centers,  and 
sleepers  and  sills  shall  be  laid  flat  on  the  wood  underfboring  or 
concrete.  Framing  shall  be  arranged  to  accommodate  conduits 
and  other  electric  work. 

The  exterior  and  interior  of  the  ticket  booths,  including  ticket 
shelves,  drawers,  closets  and  doors,  shall,  unless  otherwise  speci- 
fied, be  made  of  oak.  The  exterior  of  the  ticket  booths  shall- 
consist  of  one  and  one-eighth  (ij^)  inch  panel  frames,  with 
seven-eighths  (%)  inch  panel  stiles  and  rails,  and  one-half 
(l/2^  inch  panels  set  in  from  the  back  and  nailed  on  one 
side.  Bases  shall  be  seven-eighths  (J^)  inch,  and  cornices  shall 
be  built  up  as  indicated  on  the  drawings  and  provided  with 
hinged  vent  panels.  Doors  shall  be  one  and  three-fourths  (i£4) 
inches  thick,  veneered  on  soft  pine  cores,  and  panels  shall  be 
three  (3)  ply.  The  interior  of  ticket  booths  shall  be  furred, 
sheathed  vertically  with  five-eighths  ($/%)  inch  by  three  (3) 

116 


SPECIFICATIONS — WOODWORK 

inch  oak,  tongued  and  grooved,  with  "V"  joints,  and  pieces  of 
quarter-round  oak  shall  be  set  in  all  angles. 

Ticket  shelves  shall  be  of  oak,  two  (2)  inches  thick,  sup- 
ported on  bronzed  iron  brackets.  A  coin  shelf  of  plate  or 
other  approved  glass,  with  or  without  change  pockets,  as  de- 
termined by  the  Commission,  shall  be  furnished  for  each  ticket 
window,  and  shall  be  let  into  the  oak  ticket  shelves  so  as  to 
finish  flush  with  the  tops  of  the  shelves.  Special  cement  or  a 
sheet  of  felt  as  directed  shall  be  placed  under  each  coin 
shelf.  Cash  drawers  and  change  pockets  of  oak  shs.ll 
be  divided  inside  as  directed,  and  each  drawer  shall  be 
fitted  with  one  (i)  pair  of  metal  rollers  and  one  (i)  stop. 
Closets  with  shelves  and  doors  shall  be  provided.  A  foot 
rail  of  oak  supported  on  galvanized  iron  brackets  shall  be 
provided  below  each  ticket  window. 

Flooring  for  ticket  booths  shall  consist  of  seven-eighths 
(%)  inch  by  two  and  one-half  (2^2)  inch  clear  maple  flooring, 
hollow-backed,  tongued  and  grooved,  laid  with  close  joints  in 
courses  and  blind  nailed  to  every  bearing.  Flooring  shall  be 
of  a  minimum  length  of  four  and  one-half  (4^2)  feet.  No  short 
pieces  will  be  allowed.  Flooring  shall  be  hand  smoothed  and 
cleaned,  after  which  it  shall  be  covered  with  building  paper 
and  protected  until  the  completion  of  the  station.  The  space 
between  the  flooring  of  the  mezzanine  and  the  flooring  of  th? 
ticket  booth  shall  be  closely  packed  with  an  approved  asbestos 
fibre.  The  flooring  shall  not  be  laid  until  ordered  by  the  Engineer. 

All  ticket  windows  shall  have  grilles  of  bronze  tubing  or 
bars.  The  main  pieces  of  grilles  shall  be  five-sixteenths 
(5/16)  of  an  inch  by  one-half  (%)  inch  with  one-fourth  (^4) 
inch  square  pieces  for  filling.  Grilles  shall  be  secured  with  oval- 
head  bronze  screws.  Sash  and  sash  frames  shall  be  of  No.  18 
gauge  rust-proof  iron,  as  described  in  Section  No.  234-A  of  this 
Part.  They  shall  be  finished  in  an  approved  color  in  the  manner 
specified  for  hollow  metal  work.  All  sash  frames  and  panels  shall 
be  glazed  with  plate  glass.  The  sash  frames  shall  have  hinged  fold- 
ing panels  arranged  to  swing  inward  and  the  lower  panels  shall  b? 
stationary.  A  simple  fastening  shall  be  provided  for-each  panel 
On  the  booth  side  of  the  stationary  panel  a  brass  sliding  door  with 
knob,  fastener  and  roller  guide  shall  be  provided.  The  door  shall 
slide  on  a  top  track  of  brass  and  against  knee  pieces  secured  to  the 

117 


SPECIFICATIONS WOUDWOR  K 

glass  shelf  below.  A  plate  glass  sign  with  copper  letters  shall  be 
provided  for  each  ticket  window.  All  glass  in  ticket  booths  shall 
be  set  in  place  without  the  i.se  of  putty,  and  rubber  tape  or  other 
approved  material  shall  be  used  as  a  cushion  for  the  glass. 
Copper  letters  shall  be  formed  of  cold  rolled  copper  and  shall 
be  similar  to  the  samples  on  file  in  the  office  of  the  Commission. 
Coat  and  hat  hooks  shall  be  secured  to  the  walls  of  the  ticket 
booths. 

No  part  of  the  ticket  booths  shall  be  nailed  to  the  mezza- 
nine structure,  but  iron  knees  with  bronze  finish  shall  be 
provided  where  necessary  for  securing  the  booths  in  place. 
Conduit  and  outlet  boxes  shall  be  built  into  the  ticket  booths 
as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

The  ticket  booths  will  generally  be  scribed  to  the  ceilings 
of  the  mezzanines.  The  ceilings  are  of  different  heights  and 
where  the  ticket  booths  are  not  scribed  to  the  ceilings  a  wood 
ceiling  and  roof  shall  be  provided  for  the  booths  as  indicated 
on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  169.  Panel-board  boxes  in  mezzanines  shall 
have  doors  and  trim  of  oak,  and  doors  shall  be  glazed  with  plate 
glass.  Trim  shall  be  secured  to  the  boxes  with  special  brass 
machine  screws  and  nuts.  Panel-board  boxes  in  wind  screens 
shall  be  set  into  the  framing  of  the  wind  screens  and  shall  have 
doors  of  white  pine  backed  with  sheet  steel. 

SECTION  No.  170.  All  seats  shall  be  built  of  oak.  (See  Sec- 
tion No.  203  of  this  Part.) 


SUBDIVISION  7 
ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

SECTION  No.  184.  All  bars,  shapes  and  plates  shall,  unless 
otherwise  specified,  be  made  of  open-hearth  steel.  All  wrought 
iron  shall  be  double  rolled,  fibrous  and  uniform  in  character. 
It  shall  be  thoroughly  welded  in  rolling  and  shall  be  free  from 
surface  defects.  All  iron  castings  shall  be  made  of  tough 
gray  pig  iron,  shall  be  not  less  than  one-fourth  (%)  of  an 
inch  thick  and  shall  have  cast  lugs,  as  may  be  required,  for 
connections.  All  joints  shall  be  cut  and  filed  to  a  close  fit;  all 
bolt  and  screw  holes  shall  be  drilled  (not  cored)  ;  all  joints 
shall  be  made  with  red  lead  putty  and  where  exposed 
shall  be  filled  flush  with  an  approved  cement.  All  sizes  and 
shapes  shall  be  as  indicated  on  the  drawings.  Mitre  joints  in 
cast-iron  work  will  not  be  permitted,  and  all  joints  shall  be 
made  in  horizontal  or  vertical  planes.  All  square  steel  tubing 
shall  be  cold  drawn  seamless  tubing.  The  thickness  of  the 
walls  of  one  (i)  inch  square  tubing  shall  be  not  less  than  No. 
TI  gauge  and  of  two  and  one-half  (2^)  inch  square  tubing 
not  less  than  three-sixteenths  (3/16)  of  an  inch. 

Castings  shall  be  sharp,  sound,  true  to 'pattern,  free  from 
cracks,  flaws  and  excessive  shrinkage,  and  shall  have  smooth, 
clean  surfaces.  They  shall  be  neatly  chiseled  and  wire- 
brushed  before  leaving  the  foundry.  Castings  shall  accurately 
conform  to  the  cross-section  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  185.  Machine  bolts  and  screws  shall  have 
U.  S.  standard  threads,  and  threads  shall  be  coated  with  graph- 
ite or  other  approved  material  to  prevent  corrosion.  Bolts 
and  screws  of  brass  or  bronze  shall  be  used  where  required  by 
the  Commission. 

Expansion  bolts  shall  be  of  an  approved  type.  Holes  for 
expansion  bolts  shall  be  drilled  to  the  exact  size  for  the  bolt  or 
sleeve,  and  no  packing  shall  be  used. 

Gate  ropes  shall  be  made  of  No.  9  drab  bell  cord.  Provi- 
sion shall  be  made  for  easy  access  to  all  electric  conduit,  wir- 
ing, outlets  and  gate  ropes  by  providing  removable  panels  or 
handholes  with  cover  plates. 

Holes  shall  be  provided  in  the  steel  framing  where  neces- 
sary for  conduit  and  pipes. 

119 


SPECIFICATIONS ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

Post  caps  of  special  pattern  shall  be  furnished  where  re- 
quired in  order  to  make  a  proper  connection  to  the  structure. 
Outriggers  of  plates  or  bars  shall  be  provided  where  necessary 
to  secure  the  tops  of  the  posts.  Steel  braces  shall  be  provided 
where  necessary  to  give  additional  support  to  the  posts. 

Bronze  top  rails  shall  be  made  of  extruded  metal  not  less 
than  one-eighth  (*/£)  of  an  inch  thick,  or  of  cast  bronze  not 
less  than  three-sixteenths  (3/16)  of  an  inch  thick. 

All  castings  shall  be  sharp  and  smooth,  free  from  blow 
holes  or  other  "Defects,  and  true  to  pattern. 

Gauge  numbers  used  herein  and  on  the  drawings  refer  to 
U.  S.  standard. 

Conduit  and  outlets  shall  be  provided  for  and  secured  to 
all  illuminated  signs  and  lamp  standards. 

Railing  posts  in  mezzanines  shall  be  supported  on  the  con- 
crete floors  or  wood  underflooring.  The  posts  shall  be  secured 
to  wood  blocks  set  on  top  of  the  underflooring. 

SECTION  No.  187.  Outer  stringers  for  stairways  and  stairway 
landings  from  the  street  to  mezzanines  shall  be  built  of  steel 
channels,  spliced  at  landings,  bolted  to  cast-iron  canopy  posts 
and  to  concrete  landings  at  the  foot  of  stairways,  supported  on 
and  riveted  to  transverse  channels  and  column  brackets  under 
intermediate  landings  or  supported  on  and  riveted  to  steel 
hangers  or  brackets,  arid  riveted  to  steel  floor  beams  at  the 
top  of  stairways.  In  wide  stairways  an  intermediate  built-up  or 
channel  stringer  may  be  required.  Steel  angles  for  supporting 
risers,  treads  and  landings  shall  be  riveted  to  the  stringers,  and 
cross  ties  of  angles  or  other  sections  shall  be  provided  as  indicated. 
The  risers,  treads  and  landings  shall  in  general  be  made  of  wood. 
Steel  channels  under'  intermediate  stairway  landings  shall  be 
riveted  to  the  column  brackets.  Stairways  and  stairway  land- 
ings from  the  mezzanines  to  the  train  platforms  shall  be  as 
specified  for  stairways  and  stairway  landings  from  the  street 
to  mezzanines,  but  shall  be  riveted  to  the  steel  floor  beams  at 
the  foot  of  stairways.  Steel  framing  for  stairwell  openings  shall 
be  provided  where  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  188.  Steel  columns  for  stairways  and  stairway 
landings  shall  consist  of  built-up  sections  of  plates  and  angles 
riveted  together  and  shall  be  secured  to  the  concrete  foundations 


120 


SPECIFICATIONS — ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

with  steel  anchor  bolts,  nuts  and  washers  as  indicated.  As  the 
heights  of  stairway  landings  above  the  street  surface  will  vary, 
the  columns  will  be  of  varying  lengths  for  the  different  stairways. 
Steel  hangers  and  brackets  for  supporting  stairways  shall 
consist  of  built-up  sections  of  plates  and  angles  or  other 
shapes,  as  may  be  required,  and  shall  be  riveted  to  the  railroad 
structure. 

SECTION  No.  189.  The  ornamental  canopy  posts  at  the 
foot  of  stairways  shall  be  of  cast  iron,  not  less  than  three- 
eighths  (Y&y  of  an  inch  thick,  and  shall  be  securely  bolted  to 
the  concrete  street  landings  with  expansion  bolts  and  pro- 
vided with  lugs  for  bolting  as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

Intermediate  posts  for  supporting  stairway  canopies  shall 
be  of  two  and  one-half  (2^2)  inch  square  steel  tubing,  and 
shall  be  supported  on  cast-iron  shoes  at  the  bottom,  with 
cast-iron  caps  at  the  top,  and  secured  to  shoes  and  caps  with 
countersunk  machine  screws. 

Cast-iron  shoes  shall  be  bolted  to  the  steel  stringers  and 
shall  extend  up  into  and  be  fitted 'to  the  steel  tubing.  Cast- 
iron  caps  shall  be  fitted  to  the  steel  tubing  and  the  top  flange 
shall  conform  to  the  rake  of  the  stairway  so  as  to  avoid 
fillers  or  wedges  and  shall  be  bolted  to  the  steel  canopy  fram- 
ing. 

SECTION  No.  190.  The  framing  for  stairway  canopies  shall 
be  built  up  of  steel  sections  as  indicated  on  the  drawings  and 
shall  be  riveted  together  and  neatly  fitted  at  all  splices  and 
connections. 

SECTION  No.  191.  Frames  for  signs  over  street  landings 
shall  be  built  up  of  steel  sections  and  shall  generally  be  se- 
cured to  the  canopy  framing  and  cast-iron  posts.  Enameled 
signs,  lettered  as  directed,  shall  be  provided  for  one  side  of 
the  sign  frames. 

SECTION  No.  192.  Railings  on  stairways  and  stairway 
landings,  Type  "A",  from  the  street  to  the  mezzanines  shall 
consist  of  three-fourths  (^4)  inch  square  steel  bars  riveted  to 
a  steel  angle  at  the  bottom  and  to  a  steel  bar  at  the  top.  A 


121 


SPECIFICATIONS ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

cast-iron  top  rail  shall  be  bolted  to  the  top  bar  with  counter- 
sunk machine  screws.  The  bottom  angle  shall  be  riveted  to 
the  top  flange  of  the  steel  channel  stringer  with  one-half  (l/2) 
inch  rivets,  and  the  railings  shall  be  bolted  to  the  canopy 
posts.  Posts  shall  be  of  two  and  one-half  (2^2)  inch  square 
steel  tubing  and  may  be  of  variable  heights  to  conform  to 
local  conditions.  Cast-iron  brackets  and  sockets  shall  be 
provided  for  supporting  the  wood  hand-rail,  and  plates  for 
the  support  of  the  brackets  and  sockets  shall  be  riveted  to 
the  bars  of  the  railings. 

SECTION  No.  194.  Railings,  Type  "C",  with  posts  sup- 
ported on  the  sides  of  existing  floor  framing  shall  consist  of 
vertical  steel  bars  with  top  bar,  top  rail  and  bottom  angle, 
all  as  hereinbefore  specified  for  railings,  Type  "A".  Posts 
shall  be  of  two  and  one-half  (2^)  inch  square  steel  tubing 
with  cast-iron  caps  and  shoes  and  may  be  of  variable  heights 
to  conform  to  local  conditions.  Shoes  shall  be  bolted  to  the 
webs  of  the  existing  floor  beams.  Railings  shall  be  secured 
to  the  posts  with  bolts  and  ferrules,  and  steel  braces  shall  be 
provided  to  give  additional  support  to  the  posts. 

SECTION  No.  195.  Train  platform  railings,  Type  "K",  shall 
consist  of  a  cast-iron  base,  bottom  rail  and  top  rail  and  three- 
fourths  (24)  inch  square  steel  bars.  The  bars  shall  be  fastened  to 
the  cast-iron  bottom  rail  with  machine  screws  tapped  into  the 
bars,  the  ends  of  screws  headed  over,  and  shall  be  riveted  to  a 
steel  channel  at  the  top.  The  cast-iron  top  rail  shall  be  se- 
cured to  the  top  channel  with  countersunk  machine  screws 
and  the  cast-iron  base  shall  be  secured  to  the  bottom  rail  in 
a  similar  manner.  Cast-iron  posts  and  lamp  standards  for 
railings,  and  frames  and  supporting  posts  for  name  tablets 
shall  be  provided.  The  lamp  standards  shall  be  made  of  two 
and  one-half  (2^)  inch  square  steel  tubing  fitted  over  the 
upper  part  of  the  cast-iron  posts  and  secured  to  the  posts  with 
countersunk  machine  screws.  Cast-iron  hoods  for  lamps,  and 
small  cast-iron  frames  for  enameled  signs  shall  be  bolted  to  the 
steel  tubing.  Hoods  shall  be  arranged  to  support  lamp  bases  and 
reflectors. 

The  cast-iron  base  and  posts  shall  be  secured  to  the  train 

122 


SPECIFICATIONS ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

platform   flooring  and   the   posts   supporting   lamp   standards 
and  sign  frames  shall  be  anchored  to  the  steel  platform  frumir.g. 

SECTION  No.  196.  Railings,  Types  "D"  and  "E",  shall  con- 
sist of  panels  of  three-fourths  (24)  inch  square  steel  bars 
bolted  to  cast-iron  top  and  bottom  rails  with  machine  screws 
tapped  into  the  bars  and  ends  headed  over.  The  upper  por- 
tion of  the  top  rail  shall  be  secured  with  countersunk  machine 
screws  and  the  cast-iron  base  of  Type  "E"  railings  shall  be 
secured  to  the  bottom  rail  in  a  similar  manner.  The  panels 
shall  be  bolted  to  intermediate  posts  of  cast  iron,  and  cast- 
iron  posts  shall  be  provided  where  indicated  on  the  drawings. 
The  posts  shall  be  bolted  to  the  steel  floor  framing. 

SECTION  No.  197.  High  railings,  Type  "G",  shall  consist 
of  panels  of  one-half  (J^)  inch  square  steel  bars,  riveted  to  a 
one  and  one-half  (ij^)  inch  by  five-eighths  (54)  inch  bar  at 
the  top  and  to  a  one  and  three-fourths  (i$4)  inch  by  one  and 
one-eighth  (iji)  inch  steel  channel  at  the  bottom,  and  with 
intermediate  horizontal  bars  of  one  (i)  inch  by  one-half  (}/£) 
inch  steel.  Panels  shall  be  supported  on  posts  of  two  and 
one-half  (2^2)  inch  square  steel  tubing.  Posts  shall  be  pro- 
vided with  cast-iron  caps  at  the  top  and  cast-iron  footings 
at  the  bottom  and  shall  be  bolted  to  the  floor  and  roof. 

SECTION  No.  198.  Additional  high  posts  in  connection  with 
lailings  shall  consist  of  two  and  one-half  (2j/£)  inch  square 
steel  tubing,  and  shall  be  provided  with  cast-iron  caps  and 
bases.  Other  high  posts  with  cast-iron  caps  and  special  cast- 
iron  bases  will  be  required  for  the  support  of  the  roof  over 
mezzanines  extending  beyond  the  main  structure. 

t     .   • 

SECTION  No.  199.  Railings  in  mezzanines,  Type  "F",  shall 
consist  of  cast-iron  posts  and  steel  panels.  The  panels  shall 
consist  of  one-half  (J^)  inch  square  steel  bars  riveted  to  a  one- 
half  (J^)  inch  by  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inch  steel  bar  at  the 
top  and  to  a  five-eighths  (^j)  inch  by  one  and  one-half  (1^2) 
inch  steel  bar  at  the  bottom.  Top  and  bottom  bars  shall  be 
bolted  to  the  cast-iron  posts.  The  bronze  top  rail  shall  be 
secured  to  the  steel  top  bar  with  countersunk  machine  screws. 
Cast-iron  posts  shall  be  secured  to  the  wood  blocking  and 

123 


SPECIFICATIONS ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

underflooring    with    lag    screws    through    holes    in    the    bottom 
flanges  of  the  posts. 

Bevel  railings,  Type  "L",  on  stairways  shall  be  as  herein- 
before specified  for  Type  "F"  railings,  except  the  top  rail, 
which  shall  be  of  cast  iron,  and  the  posts,  which  shall  be  of 
two  and  one-half  (2l/2)  inch  square  steel  tubing  with  cast 
shoes  and  caps.  Posts  may  be  of  variable  heights  to  conform  to 
local  conditions. 

SECTION  No.  200.  Grille  railings,  Type  "B,"  shall  consist 
of  one-half  (l/2)  inch  square  steel  bars  riveted  to  a  one-half 
(l/2)  inch  by  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inch  top  bar  and  to  a 
five-eighths  (JH$)  inch  by  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inch  bottom 
bar,  and  with  intermediate  bars  of  the  same  size  as  top  bars. 
Top,  intermediate  and  bottom  bars  shall  be  bolted  to  steel 
posts.  Posts  shall  be  of  two  and  one-half  (2^/2)  inch  square 
steel  tubing  and  shall  be  furnished  with  cast-iron  caps,  shoes 
and  flanges  as  indicated.  Cast-iron  shoes  and  flanges  shall 
be  bolted  to  the  steel  channel  stringers  or  to  the  flooring 
and  the  cast-iron  caps  shall  be  bolted  to  the  roof. 

SECTION  No.  201.  Pipe  railings  shall  be  made  of  galvan- 
ized wrought-iron  pipe,  and  shall  have  special  fittings  and 
bases  of  galvanized  cast  iron ;  bases  shall  be  secured  to  the 
stairways,  stairway  landings,  mezzanine  floors,  platforms, 
ladders  and  ladder  platforms  with  bolts  or  lag  screws. 

SECTION  No.  202.  Free  standing  lamp  standards  on  island 
train  platforms  shall  consist  of  two  and  one-half  (2^2)  inch 
square  steel  tubing  supported  on  posts  of  cast  iron  and  the 
tubing  shall  be  fitted  over  the  top  of  the  posts  and  secured 
with  'countersunk  machine  screws.  Cast-iron  hoods  shall  be 
secured  to  the  lamp  standards.  Hoods  shall  be  arranged  to 
support  lamp  bases  and  reflectors.  Lamp  standards  shall  be 
anchored  to  the  steel  or  wood  floor  framing  or  to  concrete 
platforms  as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  203.  Enameled  sign  plates  and  reflectors  shall 
be  made  of  the  best  charcoal  iron,  No.  18  gauge,  pickled  and 
freed  from  rust,  and  shall  be  drilled  before  being  enameled. 


124 


SPECIFICATIONS ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

Enamel  shall  be  fused  to  the  iron,  and  not  less  than  two  (2) 
coats  of  enamel  shall  be  used  for  each  color.  Colors  shall  be 
as  directed. 

Frames  for  enameled  signs  on  mezzanines  shall  be  built  up 
of  cast-iron  and  steel  sections,  and  shall  be  either  built  into 
the  railing  panels  or  supported  on  high  posts  over  the  railing 
as  indicated  on  the  drawings.  Enameled  sign  plates  shall  be 
provided  for  both  sides  of  the  sign  frames. 

Frames  for  suspended  signs  shall  consist  of  frames  built  up 
of  steel  plates  and  angles  and  cast  iron.  The  frames  shall  be 
suspended  by  square  steel  tubing  attached  to  the  structure. 
Enameled  sign  plates  shall  be  provided  for  both  sides  of  sign 
frames. 

Sign  frames  on  train  platform  railings  shall  be  built  up  of 
cast  iron  and  steel  plates  and  angles.  The  frames  shall  be  bolted 
to  the  top  rail  of  the  platform  railing.  The  cast-iron  railing  posts 
shall  be  extended  to  the  top  of  the  sign  frames  to  provide  addi- 
tional support.  Enameled  sign  plates  shall  be  provided  for  one 
side  of  sign  frames. 

Sign  frames  for  name  tablets  on  island  train  platforms  shall 
consist  of  cast  iron  and  steel  plates  and  angles  and  shall  be  se- 
cured to  posts  of  two  and  one-half  (2j/£)  inch  square  steel  tub- 
ing having  cast-iron  caps  and  bases.  The  posts  shall  be  anchored 
as  hereinbefore  specified  for  free-standing  lamp  standards  and 
shall  be  securely  braced.  Enameled  sign  plates  shall  be  provided 
for  both  sides  of  the  sign  frame.  Oak  seats  shall  be  constructed 
between  the  steel  posts.  Provision  shall  be  made  for  supporting 
the  seats  and  the  seats  shall  be  neatly  fitted  to  the  steel  supports. 
Where  indicated  on  the  drawings,  panels  of  No.  14  gauge  steel 
shall  be  provided  between  the  steel  posts  in  place  of  the  oak  seats. 
The  panels  shall  be  subdivided  by  one  and  one-fourth  (i^4) 
inch  by  one-fourth  (*4)  inch  bars  and  shall  be  riveted  to  an 
angle  frame.  The  frame  shall  be  secured  to  the  posts  with  coun- 
tersunk machine  screws  and  shall  also  be  secured  to  the  flooring 
by  intermediate  cast-iron  footings. 

SECTION  No.  204.  All  sliding  gates  shall  be  run  on  ball-bear- 
ing sheaves  and  shall  be  provided  with  approved  guides,  stops, 
tracks,  ropes,  'hangers,  fittings  and  ball-bearing  pulleys.  Sliding 
gates  shall  consist  of  panels  of  square  steel  bars,  with  top,  inter- 

125 


SPECIFICATIONS ORNAMENTAL  IRON  AND  STEEL  WORK 

mediate  and  bottom  bars  of  steel,  secured  to-  a  buiU-up  frame  of 
steel  angles  and  perforated  steel  plates.  At  each  gate  opening  in 
the  railings  two  (2)  vertical  posts  of  cast  iron  or  steel  shall  be  pro- 
vided and  shall  be  secured  to  the  floor  and  ceiling  and  joined 
at  the  top  with  a  built-up  frame  of  steel  angles  and  perforated 
steel  plates.  An  enameled  "EXIT"  sign  plate  shall  be  secured  to 
one  side  of  this  frame.  The  cast-iron  or  steel  posts  shall  have 
cast-iron  footings,  floor  boxes  where  gate  ropes  are  run  below 
the  surface  of  the  floor,  supports  for  track  and  pulleys,  and  pro- 
vision fcr  the  gate  ropes  and  weights,  and  shall  be  provided 
with  hand-holes.  Where  necessary,  additional  high  posts  of 
two  and  one-half  (2l/2)  inch  square  steel  tubing  shall  be  pro- 
vided to  support  the  tracks.  Gates  shall  be  so  arranged  that  they 
may  be  operated  from  one  or  more  points  as  required  and  where 
possible  the  ropes  shall  be  concealed  from  view  by  running  them 
in  one  and  one- fourth  (i}4)  inch  galvanized  wrought-iron  pipes 
below  the  surface  of  the  floor  or  in  one  (i)  inch  square  steel 
tubing  suspended  from  the  ceiling.  In  general  the  gate  ropes  will 
be  run  in  tubing  suspended  from  the  ceiling  and  only  in  special 
cases,  when  directed  by  the  Commission,  will  the  ropes  be  run  in 
pipes  below  the  surface  of  the  floor.  Gates  shall  be  properly 
balanced  with  lead  weights  and  shall  operate  smoothly.  Pulleys 
will  le  required  at  each  change  in  direction  of  the  gate  ropes 
suspended  from  the  ceilings  and  at  intermediate  points  and  all 
pulleys  shall  be  ball-bearing  and  shall  be  housed. 

Floor  boxes  shall  be  made  of  cast  iron  and  shall  be  fitted  with 
removable  cover  plates,  ball-bearing  pulleys,  and  connections  for 
gate  posts  and  pipes.  Where  floor  boxes  occur  in  ticket  booths  a 
connection  shall  be  made  to  receive  the  vertical  pipe. 

SECTION  No.  205.  Folding  gates  shall  be  of  the  pantograph 
type  and  where  required  shall  be  provided  with  guides  at  the 
top  and  bottom  of  the  end  bars,  or  hinged,  and  provided  with  an 
approved  locking  device.  The  diagonal  members  shall  consist  of 
flat  bars,  channels  or  other  approved  sections,  forming  openings 
the  maximum  dimension  of  which  shall  not  exceed  twelve  (12) 
inches  when  the  gates  are  locked  in  place  across  the  gate  openings. 
Intermediate  vertical  bars,  with  guides  at  top  and  bottom,  shall 
be  provided  where  necessary.  The  top  guides  shall  consist  of 
pulley  and  track,  with  the  track  secured  to  the  gate  posts.  The 

126 


SPECIFICATIONS — ORNAMENTAL   IRON   AND  STEEL  WORK 

bottom  guides  shall  consist  of  angles  set  flush  with  the  floor  in 
such  manner  as  to  form  the  sides  of  a  recess.  Folding  gates 
shall,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  be  made  of  a  height  six  (6) 
inches  less  than  the  clear  height  of  the  opening  from  the  floor 
to  the  under  side  of  the  cross  frames  between  gate  posts,  or  to 
the  roof  where  cross  frames  are  not  installed.  Folding  gates 
at  ticket  booths  shall  be  secured  to  a  built-up  steel  post.  Other 
folding  gates  shall  be  provided  with  posts  of  two  and  one-half 
(2^2)  inch  square  steel  tubing  on  each  side  of  the  gate  openings, 
with  cast-iron  caps  and  footings  and  a  cross  frame  of  the  same 
material  as  the  posts. 

Gate  controls  shall  consist  of  high  posts  of  square  steel  tub- 
ing on  each  side  of  ticket  chopper,  and  a  cross  frame  of  the 
same  material  as  the  posts.  The  posts  shall  have  special  cast- 
iron  footings,  floor-boxes  where  gate  ropes  are  run  below  t':c 
surface  of  the  floor,  and  shall  be  provided  with  ball-bearing  pul- 
leys and  hand-holes  for  the  gate  ropes.  Single  controls  sh  .11 
consist  of  two  (2)  posts  and  one  (i)  cross  frame. 

Chains  of  one-fourth  (}4)  inch  galvanized  wrought  iron  or 
steel  shall  be  provided  at  all  gate  controls  or  other  openings 
where  indicated  on  the  drawings.  Eye-bolts  shall  be  provided 
in  the  posts  or  walls  on  each  side  of  openings,  and  one  end  of  tr? 
chain  shall  be  securely  fastened  to  the  eye-bolt  on  one  side  of 
the  opening.  The  free  end  of  the  chain  shall  be  provided  with  a 
snap  hook. 

SECTION  No.  208.  Enameled  sign  plates,  inscribed  as  directed, 
shall  be  secured  to  the  steel  panel  plates  by  one-fourth  (%)  inch 
brass  screws  with  ends  riveted  over  nuts.  Lead  or  soft  copper 
washers  shall  be  provided  under  screw  heads  and  nuts. 

SECTION  No.  211.  Non-slip  treads  shall  be  used  on  the  treads 
and  landings  of  all  stairways  and  shall  also  be  used  on  the  floor 
of  mezzanines  where  indicated  on  the  drawings.  They  shall  have 
a  metal  base  and  an  approved  non-slipping  surface;  they  shall 
be  durable,  readily  cleaned  and  maintained  and  shall  be  arranged 
so  that  they  may  be  renewed  in  sections  without  renewing  the 
entire  tread.  Where  laid  on  wood  they  shall  be  set  in  white 
lead.  The  non-slip  treads  shall  be  secured  to  the  treads  and  land- 
ings with  brass  screws.  Where  they  are  laid  on  a  cement  finish, 

127 


SPECIFICATIONS ORNAMENTAL   IRON   AND   STEEL   WORK 

they  shall  be  secured  to  wood  blocks  and  the  blocks  shall  be  im- 
bedded in  the  concrete  and  furnished  with  iron  anchors.  Sam- 
ples of  the  non-slip  treads  \vhich  are  approved  for  the  work  can 
be  seen  at  the  office  of  the  Commission.  The  Contractor  shall  call 
at  the  office  of  the  Commission  and  inspect  these  samples  of  ap- 
proved non-slip  treads. 

Saddles  of  cast  iron  shall  be  provided  for  door  openings  where 
indicated  on  the  drawings.  They  shall  be  made  in  one  piece  and 
secured  to  wood  blocks.  The  wood  blocks  shall  be  furnished 
with  iron  anchors  and  imbedded  in  the  cement  floor  or  shall  be 
blocked  up  from  the  wood  underflooring  and  secured  with  brass 
screws. 

SECTION  No.  212.  Wire  mesh  partitions  in  enclosures  be- 
tween stations  shall  be  provided  where  indicated  on  the  drawings. 
The  wire  shall  be  No.  10  gauge,  one  (i)  inch  mesh,  secured  to  a 
steel  frame.  The  frames  shall  be  secured  to  the  partition  and 
roof  framing. 


128 


SUBDIVISION  8 
SHEET  METAL  WORK 

SECTION  No.  228.  All  roofs  shall,  unless  otherwise  speci- 
fied, be  covered  with  approved  "1C"  tinned  charcoal  iron 
plates  of  the  best  quality,  twenty  (20)  inches  by  twenty-eight 
(28)  inches,  weighing  at  least  two  hundred  and  twenty-four 
(224)  pounds  per  box  of  one  hundred  and  twelve  (112)  sheets, 
or  other  sizes  as  may  be  required.  The  coating  shall  weigh 
at  least  thirty-five  (35)  pounds  per  box  of  one  hundred  and 
twelve  (112)  sheets,  twenty  (20)  inches  by  twenty-eight  (28) 
inches,  and  the  weights  for  other  sizes  shall  be  in  the  same 
relative  proportion.  Gauge  numbers  used  herein  and  on  the 
drawings  refer  to  U.  S.  standard.  Standing  seams  shall  be 
formed  and  all  seams  shall  be  double  locked  and  soldered. 
All  roofing,  tin  shall  be  secured  with  tin  clips  two  (2)  inches 
wide,  spaced  not  over  eight  (8)  inches  on  centers.  Clips  shall 
be  locked  into  the  standing  seams  and  nailed  to  the  root" 
boarding  with  tinned  nails.  Flashing  shall  be  provided 
wherever  necessary  and  roofing  tin  shall  be  secured  to  the 
flashing. 

SECTION  No.  229.  The  outside  of  exterior  walls  of  mez- 
zanines, walls  enclosing  stairways  below  the  roof  of  the 
mezzanines  at  stations  and  the  outside  of  exterior  walls 
of  enclosures  between  stations,  excepting  sash  and  doors,  shall 
be  covered  with  sixteen-ounce  cold  rolled  copper  in  design 
as  indicated.  All  panels  shall  be  made  of  "fine  crimped" 
copper,  a  sample  of  which  shall  be  approved  by  the  Commission 
before  being  used  on  the  work.  Joints  shall  be  carefully 
soldered  and  shall  be  locked  where  required  by  the  Commission. 
All  copper  sheathing  shall  be  nailed  with  copper  nails. 

Where  indicated  on  the  drawings,  the  walls  of  mezzanines 
and  of  enclosures  between  stations  shall  be  covered  with 
crimped  galvanized  iron,  No.  24  gauge,  nailed  to  the  studs, 
furring  or  sheathing  with  tinned  nails  and  washers. 

SECTION  No.  230.  All  ornamental  work  shall  be  carried  out 
as  indicated,  bracketing  off  for  same  and  strapping  to  the  roof 
or  other  support  where  necessary.  Gutters  for  stairway  canopies 
shall  be  of  No.  24  gauge  galvanized  iron.  Gutters  for  mezzanines 

129 


SPECIFICATIONS SHEET    METAL    WORK 

at  stations  shall  be  of  sixteen-ounce  cold  rolled  copper. 

SECTION  No.  231.  Along  the  canopies  over  side  platforms 
standing  gutters  of  No.  24  gauge  galvanized  iron  shall  be 
built  up  immediately  over  the  eaves.  These  gutters  shall  be 
stayed  with  straps  and  brackets  spaced  not  over  twenty-eight 
(28)  inches  on  centers.  Hung  gutters  shall  be  made  of  gal- 
vanized iron  as  specified  for  standing  gutters,  with  roll  edge 
and  moulded  and  shall  be  well  graded  and  securely  hung  or 
braced  as  indicated.  Where  the  gutters  join  the  roofing  tin 
the  joints  shall  be  locked  and  soldered. 

SECTION  No.  232.  All  leaders,  except  where  otherwise 
specified,  shall  be  three  (3)  inches  in  diameter,  and  shall  be 
made  of  No.  24  gauge  corrugated  galvanized  iron  of  an  ap- 
proved quality. 

Leaders  next  to  copper  sheathing  shall  be  made  of  sixteen- 
ounce  cold  rolled  copper  and  shall  be  secured  with  copper  straps. 

Where  leaders  pass  through  platforms  they  shall  be  car- 
ried in  three  and  one-half  (3^2)  inch  galvanized  wrought-iron 
pipes  extending  from  six  (6)  feet  above  the  platform  to  one 
(i)  foot  below  the  platform  and  securely  fastened  to  the  can- 
opy posts.  The  pipes  shall  be  set  in  cast-iron  collars  fitted  to 
the  posts  at  the  platform  level,  and  where  these  pipes  pass 
through  the  roof  over  the  mezzanines  this  joint  shall  be  made 
water-tight. 

All  leaders  shall  be  supported  by  straps  and  shall  unless 
otherwise  specified  be  carried  to  the  street  alongside  of  the 
existing  columns.  At  the  outlet  end  three  and  one-half  (3^2) 
inch  galvanized  wrought-iron  pipe  leaders  with  elbows  at  the 
lower  end  shall  be  used  for  a  distance  of  six  (6)  feet  above  the 
street  surface. 

Leaders  of  cast-iron  pipe  shall  be  provided  where  indicated 
on  the  drawings. 

Water  on  stairway  roofs  shall  be  carried  to  the  street 
through  special  galvanized  wrought-iron  leaders  set  inside  of 
each  cast-iron  canopy  post  at  the  foot  of  stairways  and  con- 
necting to  a  galvanized  iron  pipe  laid  under  the  street  land- 
ing and  arranged  to  discharge  at  the  curb.  Galvanized  wire 
strainers,  No.  12  gauge,  shall  be  provided  for  all  leaders  ex- 


130 


SPECIFICATIONS SHEET    METAL    WORK 

rept  copper  leaders,  which   shall   have   No.   12  gauge  copper 
wire  strainers. 

SECTION  No.  233.  All  water  and  drain  pipes  which  are  ex- 
posed to  the  weather  shall  be  encased  in  No.  20  gauge  galvanized 
iron  to  protect  the  insulation  described  in  Section  No.  254  of  this 
Part,  except  where  the  pipes  are  alongside  of  the  copper  sheathing, 
when  they  shall  be  encased  in  sixteen-ounce  copper.  Casings 
shall  be  secured  in  place  with  approved  clips  or  straps,  and  shall 
be  easily  removed  and  replaced. 

SECTION  No.  234.  A  smoke  flue  of  No.  24  gauge  galvan- 
ized iron,  with  an  approved  hood  or  cowl  at  the  outlet,  shall 
he  provided  from  each  mezzanine.  Where  the  flue  passes 
through  the  wood  ceilings,  partitions,  walls  or  roofs,  an  outer 
casing  pipe  of  the  same  material  as  the  flue  and  flanged  at 
each  end  shall  be  provided.  Approved  shields  shall  be  pro- 
vided around  the  flue  to  protect  the  space  between  the  flue 
and  the  casing  pipe.  Where  the  smoke  flue  passes  through  the 
concrete  train  platform  it  shall  be  encased  in  a  wrought-iron 
pipe  ferrule,  threaded  for  and  provided  with  a  pipe  flange.  The 
joint  between  ferrule  and  concrete  shall  be  made  water-tight. 
The  smoke  flue  above  the  train  platform  shall  be  protected  with  a 
casing  made  of  steel  plates  and  angles.  The  casing  shall  be  five 
(5)  feet  high  and  shall  be  bolted  to  the  canopy  posts.  The  flue 
shall  be  wrapped  with  an  approved  asbestos  covering. 

The  interior  of  booths  on  mezzanines  other  than  ticket 
booths  shall  be  sheathed  with  stamped  sheet  steel,  No.  29 
gauge,  similar  and  equal  to  sample  on  file  in  the  office  of  the 
Commission.  The  steel  shall  be  nailed  to  the  wood  furring, 
lapped  at  joints  and  neatly  fitted  as  to  pattern  and  at  all 
corners  and  angles.  A  sample  of  the  stamped  sheet  steel  shall 
be  approved  by  the  Engineer  before  such  steel  is  used  on  the 
work. 

Galvanized  iron  roof  ventilators  for  enclosures  between 
stations  shall  be  of  an  approved  type  and  shall  be  made  of 
No.  22  gauge  galvanized  iron  and  secured  to  the  roof. 

All  sheet  metal,  except  copper,  which  is  inaccessible  for  paint- 
ing after  erection,  shall  be  given  one  ( i )  coat  of  paint,  as  herein- 
after specified,  before  it  is  set  in  place  in  the  work. 


SPECIFICATIONS — SHEET    METAL    WORK 

SECTION  No.  234-A.  Rust-resisting  iron  shall  be  used  in  hol- 
low metal  construction  and  shall  be  of  commercially  pure  iron 
having  high  rust-resisting  qualities.  It  shall  contain  a  total  of 
not  more  than  sixteen-hundredths  per  centum  (0.16%)  of  carbon, 
manganese,  phosphorus,  silicon,  sulphur  and  copper,  taken  to- 
gether. Test  specimens  shall  bend  cold  flat  on  themselves  with- 
out fracture  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

All  iron  shall  be  true  to  gauge,  free  from  defects  visible  to 
the  eye,  such  as  seams  or  cracks  at  the  sheared  edges,  slivers  or 
depressions  in  the  surface,  rust,  scale  and  pit  marks  of  any  char- 
acter. As  much  of  the  iron  as  may  be  deemed  necessary  shall 
be  cleaned  by  sand  blast  or  other  approved  method,  in  order 
to  determine  the  condition  of  the  surface.  Any  defects  disclosed 
by  such  cleaning  will  be  cause  for  rejection.  All  accepted  iron 
shall  be  marked  close  to  the  edge  with  the  Inspector's  private 
mark,  and  no  marking  shall  be  done  except  by  the  Inspector.. 
Gauge  numbers  used  herein  and  on  the  drawings  refer  to  U.  S. 
standard. 

Stall  partitions  in  toilet  rooms  of  stations  shall  consist  of 
panels  of  No.  12  gauge  iron,  with  top  and  bottom  rails  of  No.  16 
gauge  iron.  The  top  and  bottom  rails  shall  be  of  circular  cross- 
section  and  the  panels  shall  be  welded  to  them  and  to  the  posts 
described  below.  Posts  for  toilet  stall  partitions  and  for  sup- 
porting toilet  stall  doors  where  metal  panels  are  used  shall  be  built 
of  No.  16  gauge  hollow  metal  with  cast-iron  or  wrought-iron 
caps  and  footings.  The  footings  shall  be  set  into  the  floors  of 
the  toilet  rooms.  Posts  adjacent  to  walls  or  pipe  chamber  parti- 
tions shall  be  secured  to  the  walls  by  cast-iron  brackets  and  by 
wall  flanges,  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  Posts  supporting  toilet 
stall  doors  shall  be  connected  by  top  rails.  Top  rails  connecting 
posts  of  toilet  stall  partitions  shall  consist  of  extra  heavy  wrought- 
iron  pipe  one  and  one-fourth  (i^4)  inches  in  diameter,  se- 
cured to  the  posts  by  standard  pipe  fittings.  Partitions  and  posts- 
shall  be  provided  with  extra  reinforcement  where  hardware  is 
to  be  attached.  Partitions,  posts,  top  rails  and  all  fittings  shall 
be  finished  in  white  and  in  the  manner  hereinafter  specified  for 
surfaces  of  hollow  metal  work. 

All  interior  surfaces  of  hollow  metal  work  which  are  not  ac- 
cessible after  erection  shall  be  given  two  (2)  coats  of  metallic 


132 


SPECIFICATIONS SHEET    METAL    WORK 

paint  before  assembling.  All  exterior  surfaces  of  such  metal 
work  shall  be  given  seven  (7)  coats  as  follows:  filler  coat,  body 
coat,  three  (3)  coats  of  enamel  and  two  (2)  coats  of  varnish. 
Each  coat  shall  be  thoroughly  dried  and  baked  before  the  fol- 
lowing coat  is  applied.  Samples  of  all  materials  used  for  filler, 
paint,  oil  and  varnish  shall  be  approved  by  the  Engineer  before 
being  used. 


133 


SUBDIVISION  9 
HARDWARE 

SECTION  No.  236.  All  hardware,  unless  otherwise  speci- 
fied, shall  be  of  solid  bronze  metal,  without  lacquer,  and  of 
weight,  quality  and  design  equal  to  samples  on  file  in  the 
office  of  the  Commission. 

SECTION  No.  237.  All  butts  shall  be  made  of  heavy 
wrought  metal,  four  and  one-half  (4^/2)  inches  by  four  and 
one-half  (4^2)  inches,  unless  otherwise  specified,  self-lubri- 
cating, loose  pinned,  and  shall  have  bushings  running  the  full 
length  of  knuckles. 

In  general  the  heads  of  all  screws  shall  be  designed  so  as 
to  require  a  special  wrench. 

Locks  for  doors  shall  have  all  inside  works  of  brass  except 
the  three  (3)  tumblers,  which  shall  be  of  steel.  The  locks 
shall  center  on  lock  stiles  unless  otherwise  directed  by  the 
Commission  and  shall  operate  under  approved  key  systems  as 
hereinafter  specified. 

Doors  to  ticket  booths  shall  have  cylinder  locks  with  the 
cylinder  set  in  the  ornamental  escutcheon.  Panel  board  doors 
and  all  drawers  shall,  unless  otherwise  specified,  have  heavy 
pin  tumbler  cabinet  locks,  and  shall  operate  under  approved 
key  systems  as  hereinafter  specified. 

Two  (2)  keys  shall  be  furnished  for  each  lock,  except  the 
locks  on  the  doors  to  ticket  booths,  which  shall  be  furnished 
with  three  (3)  keys  each.  Each  key  shall  have  stamped  thereon 
the  number  of  the  ke^,  as  hereinafter  noted.  (See  Section  No. 

242  of  this  Part.) 

'^ft 

SECTION  No.  238.  The  key  systems  shall  correspond  with  the 
key  systems  on  said  Brooklyn-Manhattan  Rapid  Transit  Railroad, 
and  the  locks  shall  be  designed  to  accomplish  this  uniformity. 

Special  precautions  shall  be  taken  to  control  the  distribu- 
tion of  the  keys  during  construction.  All  locks  when  installed 
shall  be  arranged  by  the  Contractor  to  operate  under  one 
tumbler  or  other  approved  method,  so  as  to  permit  the  use 
of  the  locks  during  the  construction  of  the  work  under  this 
contract.  When  directed  by  the  Engineer  and  before  com- 
pletion of  all  of  the  work,  the  locks  shall  be  adjusted  by  the 
manufacturer  for  the  final  key  system.  Three  (3)  keys  shall 


SPECIFICATIONS — HARDWARE 

be  furnished  for  each  station  for  use  with  the  temporary  ar- 
rangement of  locks  in  addition  to  the  number  required  for  the 
final  key  system.  Upon  the  completion  of  the  work  a  com- 
plete set  of  keys,  as  herein  specified,  shall  be  furnished  to  the 
Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  239.  All  knobs  shall  be  of  screwless  pattern, 
with  sleeve  adjustment. 

Door  checks  shall  be  fastened  to  the  doors  with  plates, 
bolts  running  through  the  doors  and  nuts  headed  on,  or  in 
other  approved  manner. 

All  doors  shall  be  furnished  with  either  combined  door 
stops  and  hooks  or  rubber  covered  chains,  as  directed. 

SECTION  No.  240.  Spring  hinges  for  doors  to  toilet  stalls 
shall  be  of  the  pivot  type  (single  axis),  attached  to  the  lower 
corners  of  the  doors  by  means  of  vertical  and  horizontal  arms. 
The  weight  of  the  doors  shall  be  carried  by  ball  bearings 
located  at  the  end  of  the  pintle  and  the  tops  of  the  doors  shall 
be  guided  by  pivots  and  sockets.  The  sides  of  the  hinges 
shall  be  fitted  with  removable  plates  to  permit  adjustment  of 
the  springs.  A  throw  latch  of  bronze  with  wood  bumper  shall 
be  provided  for  each  pair  of  Type  "G"  doors.  A  combination 
door  stop  and  coat  hook  of  bronze  shall  be  provided  for  each 
stall  and  the  stop  shall  be  secured  to  the  panels  or  wall  and  pro- 
vided with  a  wood  bumper.  Door  stops,  latches  and  exposed 
parts  of  hinges  and  pivots  shall  have  the  same  kind  of  finish  as 
hereinbefore  specified  .for  exterior  surfaces  of  hollow  metal 
work. 

Sash  adjusters  for  one  or  more  sash,  as  required,  shall  be 
provided  where  called  for  on  the  drawings  or  ordered  by  the 
Engineer.  Casement  sash  adjusters  for  gangs  of  two  (2)  to 
six  (6)  sash  shall  have  the  gear  wheel  and  shaft  hangers  of 
cast  iron,  the  worm  of  hard  brass,  the  shafting  of  steel  and 
the  remainder  of  the  material  of  malleable  iron.  All  material 
shall  be  sherardized  throughout  except  the  worm.  Each  sash 
shall  have  one  (i)  universal  arm  and  rod  and  the  whole  apparatus 
shall  be  operated  by  means  of  a  detachable  key.  Sash  adjusters 
shall  be  bolted  through  the  sash  and  the  shaft  hangers  shall 
be  bolted  throutrh  or  screwed  into  the  walls. 


135 


SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE 

SECTION  No.  241.  Doors,  windows  and  ticket  booths  shall 
be  provided  with  hardware  as  listed  in  the  following  schedule, 
in  addition  to  the  hardware  herein  elsewhere  specified: 

Doors  to  Enclosures  betzveen  Stations 

One  (i)  heavy  mortise  lock  complete,  plain  knob  and  rosette 

both  sides. 

One  and  one-half  (i^)  pairs  loose  pin  butts. 
One  (i)  rubber  covered  chain  or  one  (i)  door  stop,  as  may 

be  designated. 

Doors  to  Toilet  Rooms  and  Waiting  Rooms 

One  (i)  heavy  mortise  dead  lock  complete. 
One  and  one-half   (1^2)   pairs  loose  pin  butts. 
One  (i)  push  plate.     (Toilet  rooms  only). 
One  (i)   door  pull.      (Toilet  rooms  only). 
Two   (2)   push  bars.     (Waiting  rooms  only). 
One  (i)  door  check; 
Two  (2)  kick  plates. 

One  (i)  rubber  covered  chain  or  one  (i)  door  stop,  as  may 
be  designated. 

Doors  to  Closets 

One  (i)  heavy  mortise  lock  complete,  ornamental  knob  and 
escutcheon  outside,  plain  knob  and  rosette  inside. 

One  and  one-half  (1^2)  pairs  loose  pin  butts. 

One  (i)  rubber  covered  chain  or  one  (i)  door  stop,  as 
may  be  designated. 

Doors  to  Toilet  Stalls 

~xJ 

One  (i)  pair  spring  hinges,  pivots  and  sockets. 
One  ( i )  throw  latch. 

Batten  Doors  and  Doors  to  Panelboard  Boxes 

One  (i)  heavy  pin  tumbler  cabinet  lock. 
One  and  one-half   (1^2)   pairs  fast  joint  butts,  three    (3) 
inches  by  three  (3)  inches. 


SPECIFICATIONS HARDWARE 

Vent  Doors 

One  (i)  pair  of  fast  joint  butts,  three  (3  )  inches  by  three  (  3  ) 

inches. 

One   (i)   transom  catch. 
Two  (2)  friction  adjusters. 

Double  Hung  Sash 

One   (i)   sash  fastener. 

One  (i)  pair  of  flush  sash  lifts. 

Sash;  Hinged  Top  or  Bottom 

One  (i)  pair  fast  joint  butts,  three  (3)  inches  by  three  (3) 

inches.  :   . 

One   (i)   transom  catch. 
One  (i)  friction  adjuster. 

Casement  Sash 

One  and   one-half    (i^)    pairs   fast  joint  butts,  three    (3) 

inches  by  three  (3)  inches. 
Sash  adjuster  to  operate  two,  three,  four,  five  or  six  sash 

in  gangs. 
(Separate  casement  adjuster  and  casement  fastener  for  sash 

in  ticket  booth  enclosures.) 

Drop  Sash 

Two  (2)  flush  lifts  (special). 

Ticket  Booths,  Type  B 

One  (i)  heavy  mortise  cylinder  lock  complete,  ornamental 
knob  and  escutcheon  outside,  plain  knob  and  escutcheon 
inside  for  each  door. 

One  and  one-half  (i^)  pairs  loose  pin  butts  for  each  door. 

One  (i)  rubber  covered  chain  or  one  (i)  door  stop  for  each 
door,  as  may  be  designated. 

One  (i)  drawer  pull  for  each. drawer. 

One-half  (^2)  dozen  coat  and  hat  hooks. 

One  (i)  heavy  pin  tumbler  cabinet  lock  for  each  drawer. 

Two  (2)  pairs  fast  joint  butts,  three  (3)  inches  by  two  and 

137 


SPECIFICATIONS — HARDWARE 

one-half  (2^2)  inches,  one  (i)  spring  cupboard  turn  and 
two  (2)  book  case  bolts  for  each  pair  of  closet  doors. 
One  (i)  pair  fast  joint  butts,  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inches 
by  one  and  one-half  (i/^>)  inches,  and  one  (i)  cupboard 
catch  for  each  hinged  ventilator. 

SECTION  No.  242. 
Key  No.  i 

Doors   to   upper   part   of    enclosure   between    stations   more 

than  one  (i)   story  in  height. 
Keys  alike,  but  different  from  Nos.  2,  3  and  4. 

Key  No.  2 

Doors  to  enclosures  between  stations  other  than  upper 
part  of  enclosures  between  stations  more  than  one  (i) 
story  in  height. 

Keys  alike,  but  different  from  Nos.  i  and  3. 

Key  No.  3 

Doors  to  waiting  rooms,  toilet  rooms  and  closets,  other  than 

transformer  closets. 
Keys  alike,  but  different  from  Nos.  I  and  2. 

Key  No.  4 

Doors  to  transformer  closets  on  mezzanines. 
Keys  alike,  but  different  from  Nos.  I,  2  and  3. 

Key  No.  5 

Doors  to  ticket  booths  and  all  drawers  in  ticket  booths. 

Keys  alike,  but  different  from  Nos.  6  and  7. 

Key  No.  6 

Doors   to  panel-boards. 

Keys  alike,  but  different  from  Nos.  5  and  6. 

Key  No.  7 

Batten  doors. 

Keys  alike,  but  different  from  Nos.  5  and  6. 


138 


SUBDIVISION  10 
PLUMBING  AND  DRAINAGE 

SECTION  No.  244.  All  cast-iron  pipes  and  fittings  shall  be 
uncoated,  sound,  cylindrical,  free  from  cracks,  sand  holes  and 
other  defects,  of  uniform  thickness  and  of  the  grade  known  in 
commerce  as  "extra  heavy".  Pipe,  including  hub,  shall  weigh 
not  less  than  the  following  average  weights  per  lineal  foot: 

Two     (2)  inches  diameter,  five  and  one-half  (5^)    pounds 
Three   (3)       "<         "       ,  nine  and  one-half   (9^/2)       " 
Four     (4)     'fr-I        "       ,  thirteen  (13) 

Five      (5)     *•#;*        "       ,seventeen  (17) 

Six        (6)       "          -"       ,  twenty  (20)       ". 

The  size  and  weight  of  pipe  and  also  the  maker's  name  shall 
be  cast  on  each  length  of  pipe. 

All  joints  in  cast-iron  sockets,  pipe  and  fittings  shall  be  made 
with  picked  oakum  and  molten  lead,  and  shall  be  thoroughly 
caulked  to  insure  gas-tight  joints.  Twelve  (12)  ounces  of  fine, 
soft  pig  lead  shall  be  used  at  each  joint  for  each  inch  in  the 
diameter  of  the  pipe. 

All  changes  in  directions  shall  be  made  with  bends  of  large 
radius,  and  all  branches  shall  be  "Y"  branches  or  curved  tees. 

SECTION  No.  245.  All  wrought-iron  pipes  shall  be  galvan- 
ized, lap  welded,  equal  in  quality  to  "Standard"  and  shall  be 
tested  by  the  manufacturer. 

Wrought-iron  pipe  fittings  for  supply,  drain  and  vent  pipes 
shall  be  malleable  iron  steam  and  water  fittings,  and  shall  be 
galvanized. 

All  joints  except  in  cast-iron  and  lead  pipe  shall  be  screw 
joints  made  up  with  red  lead,  and  the  burr  formed  in  cutting 
shall  be  carefully  reamed  out. 

Pipe  installed  in  a  vertical  position  shall  be  firmly  held  in 
place  by  strong  pipe  rests  on  supports  well  fastened  to  the  walls. 
Where  hung  from  the  ceilings  or  walls,  pipes  shall  be  held  in 
place  by  approved  iron  hangers.  Pipes  carried  above  the  floor 
shall  be  supported  at  suitable  intervals.  Special  care  shall  be 
taken  to  thoroughly  insulate  all  pipes  and  fittings  from  the  steel 
work  of  the  structure  as  directed  by  the  Commission. 

139 


SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING  AND  DRAINAGE 

SECTION  No.  246.  All  brass  pipe  shall  be  thoroughly  an- 
nealed, seamless,  drawn  brass  tubing  of  standard  iron  pipe 
gauge  and  of  the  standard  weights  specified  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Buildings. 

All  joints  shall  be  screw  joints  made  up  with  red  lead. 
Soldering  nipples  shall  be  heavy  cast  brass  or  brass  pipe,  iron 
pipe  size. 

SECTION  No.  247.  No  lead  pipes  shall  be  used  except  where 
specially  permitted  by  the  Commission.  All  lead  pipe  used,  ex- 
cept for  water  supply,  shall  be  of  the  best  quality,  known  as 
"D",  and  of  weight  as  specified  by  the  Department  of  Build- 
ings. 

Lead  pipe  used  for  water  supply  shall  be  of  the  best  qual- 
ity known  as  "AA". 

All  connections  between  lead  pipes  and  between  lead  and 
brass  pipes  shall  be  made  by  means  of  "wiped"  solder-joints. 

All  solder  shall  be  soft  and  free  from  impurities. 

All  lead  for  caulking  purposes  shall  be  soft,  pure  pig  lead, 
free  from  any  admixture  of  antimony,  zinc,  or  other  metal.  No 
scrap  lead  shall  be  used. 

SECTION  No.  248.  All  stop  valves,  except  the  valves  at  the 
street  mains,  shall  be  standard  gate  valves  with  bronze  valves  and 
valve  seats.  All  check  valves  shall  be  of  the  swinging  type  with 
bronze  valves  and  valve  seats. 

All  valves  shall  be  of  an  approved  make  and  the  valves  on 
the  street  main  shall  be  of  a  type  to  conform  to  the  require- 
ments of  the  Department  of  Water  Supply,  Gas  and  Elec- 
tricity. 

SECTION  No.  249.  The  entire  work  shall  be  arranged  and 
executed  in  strict  conformance  with  the  specifications  and  the 
drawings  showing  the  plumbing  work  and  the  location  of  the 
plumbing  fixtures,  and  in  accordance  with  the  conditions  of 
each  station,  as  actually  constructed.  Unless  special  permis- 
sion is  obtained  from  the  Commission  to  deviate  from  the  lines 
as  laid  out  in  the  drawings,  these  lines  shall  be  followed. 
Where  plumbing  work  is  installed  connection  shall  be  made 
with  sewers  and  water  pipes  where  such  sewers  and  water  pipes 
exist. 

140 


SPECIFICATIONS — PLUMBING   AND  DRAINAGE 

All  soil,  waste,  vent  and  supply  pipes,  except  where  other- 
wise indicated,  shall  be  run  in  specially  arranged  pipe  cham- 
bers between  an  outer  partition  and  the  side  walls  of  the  toilet 
rooms.  The  soil  pipes  shall  be  connected  with  the  main  drain  in 
such  a  manner  that  they  may  be  wholly  enclosed  within  the 
pipe  chambers.  All  pipes  and  valves  installed  in  the  above 
pipe  chambers  shall  be  arranged  so  as  to  be  easily  accessible 
for  maintenance  and  repairs. 

A  three  (3)  inch  fresh  air  pipe  shall  be  connected  to  the 
main  drain  above  the  street  surface  and  the  top  of  the  fresh 
air  pipe  shall  be  furnished  with  a  special  return  fitting  as  in- 
dicated on  the  drawings.  A  three  (3)  inch  vent  pipe  shall  be 
connected  to  the  upper  end  of  the  soil  pipe  in  the  stations  and  shall 
be  extended  up  and  through  the  upper  portion  of  the  mezzanine, 
and  the  end  of  the  pipe  shall  be  fitted  with  a  perforated  cap 
or  as  otherwise  indicated  on  the  drawings.  All  waste  pipes 
from  fixtures  shall  connect  to  the  three  (3)  inch  vent  through 
a  two  (2)  inch  horizontal  vent  pipe  run  at  proper  elevation 
as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 

SECTION  No.  250.  All  main  soil  pipes  shall  be  of  cast  iron 
six  (6)  inches  in  diameter  except  where  otherwise  indicated. 
All  pipe  extensions  for  ventilating  shall  be  three  (3)  inch 
wrought-iron  pipe.  All  main  waste  pipes  shall  be  of  cast  iron 
or  wrought  iron  two  (2)  inches  or  three  (3)  inches  in  diameter, 
as  may  be  required.  All  additional  vent  pipes  shall  be  of 
wrought  iron  two  (2)  inches  in  diameter.  All  soil  and  waste 
pipes  shall  have  a  fall  of  at  least  one-fourth  (%)  of  an  inch 
per  foot.  All  vent  pipes  shall  have  a  sufficient  fall  to  insure 
proper  drainage.  All  offsets  in  soil  and  vent  pipes  shall  be 
made  at  an  angle  of  not  more  than  forty-five  (45)  degrees  to 
the  center  line  of  the  pipes. 

The  main  drain  (the  pipe  connecting  the  surface  soil  pipe 
in  toilet  rooms  and  catch  basins  with  the  sewer)  shall  be  six 
(6)  inches  in  diameter,  except  where  otherwise  specified,  and 
shall  have  a  fall  of  not  less  than  one-fourth  (J4-)  of  an  inch 
per  foot.  It  shall  be  of  galvanized  wrought  iron  with  an  approved 
insulated  joint.  Cleanouts,  fitted  with  screw  plugs,  shall  be  pro- 
vided where  necessary  on  the  main  drains,  soil  and  waste  pipes. 

SECTION   No.  251.     The  main  drains  shall  be  trapped  by 


SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING   AND  DRAINAGE 

running  traps  before  connecting  with  the  sewers.  The  traps 
shall  be  placed  below  the  surface  of  the  street  and  enclosed  in 
manholes  as  indicated  on  the  drawings.  The  manholes  shall 
be  built  of  concrete  or  brick  masonry  and  shall  be  provided 
with  steel  or  cast-iron  frames  and  covers  set  flush  with  the 
pavement.  Where  the  drains  and  water  supply  pipes  are  not 
connected  to  sewers  and  water  mains  the  water  suppiy  pipe  and 
the  outlet  side  of  the  main  trap  shall  be  extended  beyond  the 
manholes ;  the  outlet  side  of  the  main  trap  shall  be  provided 
with  a  metal  plug  set  in  cement  and  the  water  supply  pipe  shall 
be  provided  with  a  brass  screw  plug. 

Each  fixture  connected  to  the  soil  or  waste  pipe  system 
shall  be  provided,  as  near  as  possible  to  its  outlet,  with  a  suitable 
trap,  of  a  type  to  be  approved  by  the  Engineer.  The  diameter 
of  trap  shall  be  the  same  as  the  waste  pipe  to  which  it  is  at- 
tached. 

All  traps  shall  be  provided  with  brass  trap  screws  placed 
on  the  inlet  side  or  below  the  water  level,  so  as  to  permit  the 
trap  to  be  cleaned. 

Trap  vent  pipes  shall  be  not  less  than  two  (2)  inches  in 
diameter  for  water  closet  traps ;  for  all  other  traps  the  vents 
shall  be  of  the  same  diameter  as  the  trap.  Branch  vents  shall 
be  set  at  such  a  height  above  the  floor  that  the  vent  cannot 
act  as  an  overflow  pipe. 

Overflow  pipes  from  fixtures  shall  be  connected  on  the  inlet 
side  of  traps. 

All  fixtures  shall  be  arranged  in  an  open  manner  unless 
otherwise  directed  by  the  Engineer. 

SECTION  No.  252.  All  supply  pipes  shall  be  of  wrought 
iron  of  the  quality  hereinbefore  specified.  Supply  pipes  shall 
not  have  any  depressions  or  sags  and  shall  be  set  to  such 
grade  that  they  may  be  easily  and  completely  emptied.  No 
check  valves  shall  be  used  unless  specially  called  for.  The 
supply  pipe  to  each  fixture  shall  be  fitted  with  a  valve  so 
that  each  fixture  may  be  independent. 

Main  supply  pipes  shall  be  two  (2)  inches  in  diameter. 
Branches  for  lavatories  in  toilet  rooms  shall  be  not  less  than 
three-fourths  (3^)  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  Flushing  pipes 
shall  be  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inches  in  diameter,  taken 
direct  from  receiving  cylinders. 

142 


SPECIFICATIONS — PLUMBING   AND  DRAINAGE 

SECTION  No.  253.  Receiving  cylinders  and  check  valves 
shall  be  provided  on  supply  mains  where  indicated.  The 
cylinders  shall  be  heavy  galvanized  iron  pipe,  twelve  (12) 
inches  in  diameter  by  thirty-six  (36)  inches  long,  rein- 
forced at  all  pipe  connections  and  attachments.  They  shall  be 
connected  with  the  street  main,  and  provided  with  check  and  gate 
valves.  A  drain  cock  shall  be  provided  in  the  bottom  of  the 
cylinders  and  an  air  cock  in  the  top.  From  each  receiving 
cylinder  a  line  of  one  and  one-half  (ij^)  inch  galvanized 
pipe  shall  be  run  to  supply  all  water  closet  bowls,  urinals  and 
slop  sinks. 

SECTION  No.  254.  In  general,  a  one  ( i )  inch  connection  shall 
be  provided  between  the  street  main  and  manhole.  From  the 
manhole  a  one  and  one-half  (ij^)  inch  galvanized  wrought-iron 
pipe  with  an  approved  insulated  joint  shall  be  carried  to  a  point 
within  the  mezzanines  or  enclosures  between  statons,  as  indicated 
on  the  drawings,  to  connect  with  the  water  meter,  and  thence  to 
the  receiving  cylinder.  Lavatories  in  toilet  rooms  shall  be  supplied 
through  a  separate  three-fourths  (%)  inch  wrought-iron  pipe 
taken  from  the  two  (2)  inch  supply  main.  An  additional  meter 
shall  be  provided  on  the  supply  to  lavatories,  if  required  by 
the  Department  of  Water  Supply,  Gas  and  Electricity.  All 
supply  mains  to  fixtures  shall  be  so  constructed  that  there 
shall  be  no  pounding  of  valves.  Enclosures  between  stations 
shall  be  supplied  through  separate  connections  to  the  street 
main. 

A  valve  and  necessary  box  and  cover  enclosing  same  shall 
l>e  provided  at  the  connection  of  the  supply  main  with  the 
street  main  in  such  manner  that  the  valve  may  be  accessible 
from  the  street  surface.  Swinging  joints  shall  be  provided 
where  required.  The  supply  main  shall  be  carried  through 
the  trap  manhole  and  shall  be  provided  with  a  roundway  stop  and 
waste  valve  within  the  manhole  as  indicated. 

If,  for  any  reason,  the  Department  of  Water  Supply,  Gas 
and  Electricity  will  not  permit  a  one  (i)  inch  connection  to 
the  street  mains,  then  such  connections  as  they  will  permit, 
and  of  at  least  equal  capacity  to  the  connections  indicated  on 
the  drawings,  shall  be  made. 

All  water  and  drain  pipes,  cylinders  and  meters  shall  be  thor- 

143 


SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING   AND   DRAINAGE 

oughly  wrapped  with  an  approved  hair  felt  insulation.  Where 
this  insulation  is  exposed  to  the  weather  it  shall  be  encased  in- 
metal  as  provided  in  Section  No.  233  of  this  Part. 

SECTION  No.  255.  A  water  meter  with  flange  con- 
nections shall  be  furnished  and  set  on  each  supply  main, 
including  the  supply  to  lavatories,  where  required  by  the  De- 
partment of  Water  Supply,  Gas  and  Electricity,  of  size  to  con- 
form to  the  requirements  of  that  Department  and  of  type  to 
be  approved  by  the  Commission.  All  meters  shall  be  properly 
tested  and  sealed  before  delivery. 

SECTION  No.  256.  The  entire  plumbing  and  drainage  sys- 
tem within  each  station  and  enclosure  between  stations  shall 
be  tested  by  the  Contractor,  in  the  presence  of  the  Engineer, 
under  a  water,  smoke  or  chemical  test  as  directed.  All  pipes 
shall  be  uncovered  in  every  part  until  they  have  successfully 
passed  the  test.  The  Contractor  shall  securely  close  all  open- 
ings as  directed,  the  use  of  wooden  plugs  for  this  purpose  be- 
ing prohibited. 

Before  the  main  drain  is  covered,  the  outlet  end  and  other 
openings  shall  be  closed,  and  the  pipe  subjected  to  pressure 
due  to  a  head  of  water  at  least  six  (6)  feet  greater  than  the 
maximum  normal  head  on  the  pipe. 

After  the  completion  of  all  the  piping  in  the  toilet  rooms 
and  before  any  fixtures  are  connected,  all  openings  of  waste, 
soil  and  vent  pipes  and  the  outlet  end  of  the  main  drain  shall 
be  securely  closed,  and.  the  whole  system  of  piping  filled  with 
water.  The  water  shall  remain  at  the  same  level  before  the 
test  will  be  satisfactory. 

All  supply  pipes  shall  be  tested  with  City  water  pressure-. 

The  entire  plumbing  work  shall  be  tested  after  completion 
by  turning  the  water  into  all  pipes,  fixtures  and  traps,  in 
order  to  detect  imperfect  joints;  and  finally  the  Contractor 
shall  make  a  smoke  or  chemical  test  of  the  whole  completed 
system  if  directed  by  the  Engineer.  All  service  pipes  shall 
be  given  two  (2)  coats  of  paint  as  hereinafter  specified,  when 
directed  by  the  Commission. 

Ferrules  for  mezzanine  roof  drainage  including  ferrules 
draining  to  gutters  shall  be  made  of  three  (3)  inch  galvanized 
wrought-iron  pipe  with  galvanized  cast-iron  screw  flanges. 

144 


SUBDIVISION  11 
PLUMBING  FIXTURES 

SECTION  No.  258.  All  plumbing  fixtures,  fittings  and  hard- 
ware in  toilet  rooms  shall  be  of  a  type  approved  by  the  Com- 
mission and  shall  be  so  designed  that  they  will  as  far  as  possible 
be  vandal-proof.  All  metal  fittings  of  plumbing  fixtures  exposed 
in  the  toilet  rooms  shall  be  covered  with  an  approved  durable  acid- 
proof  white  finish.  All  toilet  room  fixtures  shall  be  provided  with 
shut-off  valves  on  the  supply  and  flush  connections. 

All  vitreous  ware  shall  be  non-absorbent  throughout,  homo- 
geneous and  free  from  fine  cracks,  dents  and  crazes.  The  right 
is  reserved  to  test  one  piece  of  each  pattern,  make  or  design, 
selected  at  random  from  each  lot  and  broken  in  the  presence 
of  the  Engineer,  for  absorption  by  immersion  in  red  alkaline 
ink  or  other  approved  method.  If  the  piece  passes  the  test  sat- 
isfactorily, the  lot  represented  by  the  piece  tested  will  be  ac- 
cepted. If  the  piece  tested  does  not  pass  the  test  satisfactorily, 
the  whole  lot  may  be  rejected. 

All  fixtures  shall  be  ground  to  set  true  against  the  walls. 
Warped  fixtures  will  not  be  accepted.  Each  fixture  shall  be  of 
sufficient  strength  to  support,  when  in  place,  a  load  of  two  hun- 
dred and  fifty  (250)  pounds  concentrated  on  any  part  of  the 
fixture,  without  any  signs  of  failure.  All  fixtures  of  their  re- 
spective kinds  shall  be  interchangeable,  of  the  same  mould  and 
pattern,  with  supply  and  outlet  openings,  bolt  holes,  etc.,  in  the 
same  relative  position.  The  weight  of  fixtures  shall  vary  not 
more  than  five  per  centum  ($%)  from  the  weight  specified. 

SECTION  No.  259.  All  water  closet  bowls  shall  be  made  of 
the  best  vitreous  ware  and  shall  be  of  the  siphon  jet  type.  The 
bowls  shall  have  extended  front  lips,  flushing  roll  rims,  integral 
seats  with  openings  not  less  than  eight  (8)  inches  by  twelve  and 
three-fourths  (12^)  inches,  and  shall  be  supported  on  cast-iron 
wall  chairs  imbedded  in  and  anchored  to  the  floors  or  on  special 
steel  framing,  as  may  be  required  by  the  Engineer,  and  the  soil 
lines  shall  not  be  depended  upon  for  supports.  The  weight  of 
each  bowl,  without  fittings,  shall  be  fifty  (50)  pounds.  The 
connections  between  the  bowls  and  the  soil  lines  shall  be  by 
means  of  cast  brass  flanges  brazed  to  a  copper  pipe  and  connected 


145 


SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING    FIXTURES 

to  the  roughing  as  indicated  on  the  drawings.  The  heads  of  the 
bolts  securing  the  bowls  and  cast  brass  flanges  shall  be  provided 
with  porcelain  covers.  Each  bowl  shall  be  fitted  with  a 
one  and  one-half  (i^>)  inch  rough  brass  flush  valve  with  in- 
tegral stop,  the  flush  valve  being  set  behind  the  pipe  chamber 
partition,  fitted  with  a  porcelain  push  button  marked  "Push," 
and  a  brass  sleeve,  finished  where  exposed  on  surface  of  wall, 
and  secured  with  lock  nut  and  set  screw.  The  bowls  shall  be 
secured  to  the  cast-iron  chairs  or  steel  framing  by  one-half  (^2) 
inch  brass  bolts,  with  heads  finished  where  exposed,  and  each 
bolt  shall  be  fitted  with  two  (2)  lock  nuts  and  washers. 

SECTION  No.  260.  All  lavatories  for  toilet  rooms  at  stations 
shall  be  made  of  the  best  vitreous  ware*,  with  integral  backs,  in- 
tegral shields  for  supply  nozzles  and  integral  waste  strainers,  and 
shall  not  exceed  twenty  (20)  inches  in  width.  The  weight  of 
each  lavatory,  without  fittings,  shall  be  one  hundred  (100) 
pounds.  Lavatories  shall  be  supported  on  cast-iron  hangers,  se- 
cured to  same  by  brass  bolts,  and  each  lavatory  shall  be  fitted 
with  one  rough  brass  slow  closing  supply  valve  with  a  porcelain 
push  button  marked  "Push,"  and  with  a  rough  brass  supply  con- 
nection from  valve  to  nozzle,  a  one-half  (J/£)  inch  rough  brass 
loose  key  shut-off  valve,  and  a  one  and  one-half  (ij£)  inch  rough 
brass  trap.  Valves,  traps  and  waste  pipes  for  traps  shall  be 
enclosed  with  a  vitreous  shield  bolted  to  hangers  with  brass  bolts. 

SECTION  No.  261.  All  lavatories  for  enclosures  between  sta- 
tions shall  be  made  of  the  best  vitreous  ware  with  integral  backs 
and  hangers,  shall  have  brass  pop-up  wastes,  rough  brass  self- 
closing  faucets  with  coupling  for  one-half  (J^)  inch  iron  pipe, 
a  one-half  (y2)  inch  rough  brass  shut-off  valve  and  a  one  and 
one-half  (1^2)  inch  rough  brass  trap.  The  width,  method  of 
support,  and  weight  of  these  lavatories  shall  be  the  same  as  speci- 
fied for  lavatories  in  toilet  rooms  at  stations. 

SECTION  No.  262.  All  urinals  shall  be  made  of  the  best 
vitreous  ware,  with  integral  flushing  rims  and  integral  outlet 
strainers,  and  shall  not  exceed  twenty-four  (24)  inches  in  width 
including  the  rim.  The  weight  of  each  urinal,  without  fittings, 
shall  be  two  hundred  and  twenty  (220)  pounds.  Urinals  shall 


146 


SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING    FIXTURES 

be  supported  on  approved  wall  hangers,  and  each  urinal  shall  be 
fitted  with  a  one  and  one-fourth  (i^4)  inch  rough  brass  push 
button  flush  valve  with  integral  stop.  The  flush  valve  shall  be 
set  behind  the  pipe  chamber  partition,  shall  be  fitted  with  a 
porcelain  push  button  marked  "Push,"  and  a  brass  sleeve,  fin- 
ished where  exposed  on  surface  of  wall,  and  secured  with  lock 
nut  and  set  screw. 

SECTION  No.  263.  All  slop  sinks  shall  be  made  of  the  best 
vitreous  ware,  with  integral  flushing  rim  and  ledge  to  wall, 
shall  not  exceed  twenty-two  (22)  inches  in  width,  shall  have 
rough  brass  waste  strainers  and  shall  be  supported  on  galvanized 
adjustable  trap  standards,  finished  in  white  enamel  and  fitted 
with  brass  cleanout  screws.  Each  slop  sink  shall  weigh,  exclu- 
sive of  all  fittings,  one  hundred  and  eighty  (180)  pounds.  Each 
slop  sink  shall  be  fitted  with  a  one  and  one-half  (1^/2)  inch 
rough  brass  push  button  flush  valve  connected  to  the  flushing 
rim,  fitted  with  a  porcelain  push  button  marked  "Flush"  and 
a  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inch  rough  brass  shut-off  valve.  Each 
supply  nozzle  shall  be  connected  to  a  one  (i)  inch  rough  brass 
push  button  supply  valve,  fitted  with  a  porcelain  button  marked 
''Supply,"  and  a  one  (i)  inch  rough  brass  globe  valve. 

SECTION  No.  264.  Where  the  slop  sinks  are  set  in  the  toilet 
rooms,  the  valves  and  connections  shall  be  placed  in  a  recess 
provided  in  the  wall  and  enclosed  by  a  porcelain  enameled  iron 
shield,  bolted  to  beveled  cast-iron  frames  built  into  the  wall. 

SECTION  No.  265.  Where  the  slop  sinks  are  set  in  closets 
the  valves  and  connections  shall  be  exposed  and  supported  on 
wall  brackets. 

SECTION  No.  266.  All  floor  drains  shall  have  cast-iron  trap 
bodies  with  brass  tops  nine  (9)  inches  square  fitted  with  perfo- 
rated hinged  covers.  Where  necessary,  special  shallow  floor 
drains  shall  be  furnished. 


SUBDIVISION  12 
STRUCTURAL  GLASS,  SLATE  AND  FITTINGS  IN  TOILETS 

SECTION  No.  268.  All  wainscoting,  pipe  chamber  partitions 
and  shelves,  and  floor  slabs  in  toilet  rooms  of  stations  shall  be  of 
structural  glass  with  all  exposed  surfaces  in  toilet  rooms  ground 
and  polished,  and  shall  be  of  three-fourths  (24)  inch  average 
thickness,  except  the  urinal  floor  slabs,  which  shall  be  of  one  (i) 
inch  average  thickness. 

No  slab  of  structural  glass  which  measures  more  than  one- 
sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  less  than  the  average  thickness 
herein  specified  will  be  accepted. 

All  wainscoting,  partitions  and  shelves  in  toilet  rooms  of  en- 
closures between  stations  shall  be  of  clear,  genuine  Bangor  slate 
and  shall  be  one  ( I )  inch  thick. 

Samples  of  the  structural  glass  and  slate  which  the  Con- 
tractor proposes  to  use  in  the  work  shall  be  submitted  to  the 
Engineer  for  approval. 

All  wainscoting  and  pipe  chamber  partitions  shall  extend 
from  the  sanitary  cove  up  to  a  height  of  six  (6)  feet  six  (6) 
inches  above  the  finished  floor,  except  where,  owing  to  the 
low  ceiling  in  the  toilet  rooms,  it  is  found  necessary  to  extend 
them  to  the  ceiling.  Pipe  chamber  partitions  shall  be  secured  at 
top  and  bottom  to  steel  angles  by  round  head  machine  screwy. 
Wainscoting  shall  be  secured  to  the  walls  by  round  head  screws. 
Tt  shall  be  set  out  from  the  walls  with  wood  furring  so  as  to  give 
a  projection  of  one-fourth  (J4)  of  art  inch  beyond  the  adjoining 
finish  and  shall  have  the  upper  edge  rounded.  The  space  between 
the  wainscoting  and  the  walls  shall  be  filled  with  an  approved 
material.  Ail  corners  and  angles  shall  be  curved  to  a  two  and 
one-half  (2l/2}  inch  radius.  Pipe  chamber  shelves  shall  be' sup-" 
ported  on  steel  angles  and  secured  with  round  head  machine 
screws.  Urinal  floor  slabs  shall  be  set  level,  one-half  (J^)  inch 
above  the  floor,  with  a  full  bed,  and  the  upper  surface 
shall  be  countersunk  one-fourth  (%)  of  an  inch  deep 
with  a  three  (3)  inch  border  around  the  slab.  The  back 
of  the  slab  shall  be  joined  to  the  vertical  partition  or  wain- 
scoting with  a  cove  of  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  inches  radius  above 
the  top  of  the  slab.  The  outer  edges  of  the  floor  slab  shall  be 
cut  to  form  a  cove  from  the  floor  to  the  top  of  the  slab.  Special 
precautions  shall  be  taken  to  protect  the  above  materials,  and  sheet 

148 


SPECIFICATIONS — STRUCTURAL  GLASS,  SLATE  AND  FITTINGS  IN 

TOILETS 

lead,  lead  washers  or  other  approved  material  shall  be  used  to 
separate  them  from  the  steel  or  iron. 

SECTION  No.  269.  Steel  angles  shall  be  securely  fastened 
to  the  walls  and  shall  be  braced  where  necessary.  Special 
framing  of  steel  angles  and  plates  shall  be  provided  where 
required  by  the  Commission  for  the  support  of  the  water  closet 
bowls,  urinals  and  lavatories.  The  lower  angles  supporting 
partitions  shall  be  anchored  to  the  floor  or  masonry  founda- 
tion. The  angles  shall  be  painted  with  a  shop  coat,  and  after 
erection  with  a  first  field  coat  as  hereinafter  provided  for  rail- 
ings. 

Iron  castings  shall  be  as  hereinbefore  specified  and  shall 
be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  painted  as  hereinafter  provided. 

All  round  head  screws  shall  be  of  brass,  with  three-fourths 
(J4)  mcn  washers.  All  screw  heads  and  washers  shall  have 
an  approved  finish  as  hereinbefore  specified  for  metal  fittings 
of  plumbing  fixtures  exposed  in  toilet  rooms. 

Register  frames  and  louvres  shall  be  set  in  the  pipe  cham- 
ber partitions  or  in  the  walls  of  toilet  rooms  where  indicated  on 
the  drawings.  A  white  enameled  perforated  plate  shall  be  se- 
cured to  the  face  of  the  frame  in  the  toilet  room,  and  the  frames 
shall  be  secured  to  the  partitions  or  walls. 

Where  urinals  or  water  closets  are  set  against  pipe  chamber 
partitions,  removable  white  enameled  cast-iron  plates  with  frames 
shall  be  set  in  the  partitions  to  provide  access  to  the  flushometers. 


SUBDIVISION  13' 
ELECTRIC  WORK 

SECTION  No.  274.  All  electric  conduit  shall  be  of  the  best 
grade  standard  weight  wruught-iron  or  steel  piping,  protected 
inside  by  a  coat  of  zinc,  enamel,  or  other  approved  preservative 
and  outside  by  a  coat  of  zinc.  All  conduit  shall  be  delivered  to  the 
work  in  bundles  of  full  length  pipes,  each  length  marked  with  the 
trade  mark  of  the  manufacturer.  All  conduit  shall  bend  cold 
ninety  (90)  degrees  about  a  radius  equal  to  ten  (10)  diameters 
without  signs  of  flaw  or  fracture  in  either  pipe  or  enamel. 
Flexible  conduit  shall  be  provided  where  specially  called  for 
on  the  drawings.  Samples  of  conduit  and  boxes  shall  be  sub- 
mitted for  approval  before  proceeding  with  the  electric  work. 

SECTION  No.  275.  All  conduit  shall  be  carefully  cleaned 
before  and  after  erection,  all  ends  shall  be  reamed  free  from 
burrs,  and  inside  surfaces  shall  be  free  from  all  imperfections 
liable  to  injure  the  cable.  All  conduit  shall  be  snaked  with  steel 
band  wire,  and  any  conduit  which  cannot  be  snaked  shall  be 
removed  and  replaced.  All  joints  shall  be  made  with  stand- 
ard couplings,  well  treated  with  red  lead,  and  screwed  up  to 
make  a  water-tight  joint. 

Conduit  built  into  the  structure  shall  be  properly  protected 
and  supported,  to  prevent  their  becoming  injured  by  the  build- 
ing operations,  and  shall  be  placed  far  enough  back  to  clear 
the  station  finish. 

Conduit  shall  be  protected  at  all  times  from  the  entrance 
of  water  or  other  foreign  matter  by  being  well  plugged  over 
night  or  when  the  work  is  temporarily  suspended,  and  fur- 
nished with  iron  caps  if  to  be  left  dead  ended.  Special  care 
shall  be  taken  with  conduit  which  are  to  be  buried  in  masonry, 
to  prevent  their  becoming  choked  with  cement. 

SECTION  No.  276.  Bends  and  offsets  may  be  made  in  the 
field  if  proper  tools  are  used,  but  in  no  case  shall  deformed, 
split  or  crushed  conduit  be  used.  Not  more  than  two  (2) 
right  angle  bends  shall  be  made  between  any  two  (2)  outlet 
boxes  without  special  approval  of  the  Engineer. 

All  elbows,  fittings  or  other  materials  installed  in  the  work 
shall  be  protected  inside  by  a  coat  of  zinc,  enamel  or  other  ap- 
proved preservative  and  outside  by  a  coat  of  zinc.  All  joints  and 


SPECIFICATIONS — ELECTRIC  WORK 

connections  shall  be  well  treated  with  red  lead  and  made  water- 
tight. Boxes  installed  in  the  work  shall  be  protected  inside  and 
outside  by  a  coat  of  zinc,  enamel  or  other  approved  preservative. 
Boxes  shall  be  set  square  with  adjacent  ceiling,  floor,  wall  or 
beam  line,  and  shall  have  all  conduit  enter  squarely, 

SECTION  No.  277.  All  outlet  boxes  and  combination  outlet 
boxes  and  ceiling  rings,  pull  boxes  and  extension  floor  boxes 
shall  be  made  of  cast  iron  with  openings  threaded  for  the  conduit 
ends,  and  conduit  shall  be  screwed  into  these  openings  and  made 
up  with  red  lead  to  effect  a  water-tight  joint.  The  interior  faces 
of  combination  outlet  boxes  and  ceiling  rings  shall  be  finished 
with  approved  white  enamel  and  as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 
All  conduit  ends  inside  of  boxes  shall  be  fitted  with  bushings. 
Covers  shall  be  of  cast  iron  and  water-tight,  and  secured  to ' 
boxes  with  brass  screws,  and  no  other  boxes  or  covers  shall  be 
used  except  under  special  permission  of  the  Commission. 

Outlet  boxes  and  combination  outlet  boxes  and  ceiling. rings 
shall  be  placed  at  all  light  locations,  as  indicated  on  the  drawings. 
Boxes  shall  be  firmly  and  permanently  secured  in  place,  and  if 
held  with  screws  passing  through  the  back,  shall  be  made  water- 
tight by  means  of  a  lead  washer  under  the  screw  head.  No  box 
shall  be  drilled  for  more  conduit  than  actually  enter  it. 

Special  cast-iron  boxes  thirteen  (1.3)  inches  by  twenty  (20) 
inches  by  four  (4)  inches  with  hinged  covers  and  special  screw 
locks  shall  be  provided  in  the  exterior  walls  of  mezzanines  as 
indicated  on  the  drawings.  A  hole  shall  be  provided  in  each 
box  for  a  porcelain  ferrule  which  will  be  furnished  to  the  Con- 
tractor and  installed  by  him. 

Pull  boxes  shall  be  provided  where  indicated  on  the  draw- 
ings, or  where,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Commission,  they  are  nec- 
essary. In  general  a  pull  box  shall  be  provided  for  every  one 
hundred  (100)  feet  of  continuous  conduit.  These  boxes  shall 
be  of  ample  size  to  receive  without  crowding  all  conduit  en- 
tering them.  All  boxes  shall  be  accessible  when  wall  or  ceil- 
ing finish  is  in  place,  and  where  covers  are  exposed  on  finished 
walls  or  ceilings  they  shall  be  secured  to  the  boxes  with  but- 
ton head  brass  machine  screws  and  painted  as  hereinafter 
provided. 


SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRIC  WORK 

SECTION  No.  279.  Panel-board  boxes  shall  be  built  up  of 
steel  plates  and  angles  riveted  together.  They  shall  be  drilled 
for  the  necessary  conduit  and  shall  be  built  into  or  mounted 
on  the  walls  of  the  stations,  wind  screens  or  ticket  booths  as 
indicated  on  the  drawings.  Brass  machine  screws  and  special 
nuts  shall  be  provided  for  securing  trim  to  boxes.  All  conduit 
entering  these  boxes  shall  be  secured  with  lock  nuts  and  bushings. 

SECTION  No.  280.  No  permanent  wiring,  switches,  trans- 
formers, light  fixtures  or  lamps  will  be  required  under  these  speci- 
fications, but  such  temporary  wires,  fixtures  and  lamps  as  may  be 
necessary  for  the  proper  conduct  of  the  work  under  these  speci- 
fications will  be  required  as  hereinbefore  specified. 


SUBDIVISION  14 
PAINTING 

SECTION  No.  285.  All  iron,  steel,  woodwork  and  plastered 
surfaces  installed  under  this  Part  Second  shall  be  painted 
or  varnished  as  hereinafter  specified.  The  Contractor  shall 
repaint  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  Section  No. 
291  of  this  Part  any  portion  of  the  railroad  structure  where  the 
paint  has  been  damaged. 

SECTION  No.  286.  Paint,  varnish  and  filler  shall  be  subject 
to  inspection  at  the  place  of  manufacture  and  to  such  tests  as 
may  be  ordered  by  the  Engineer.  The  Engineer  shall  have 
access,  at  all  times,  to  all  places  to  inspect  the  methods  of 
manufacture,  and  shall  have  liberty  to  inspect  the  daily  labora- 
tory records  and  analyses  of  all  such  paints,  varnishes  or 
fillers  as  are  subject  to  his  inspection.  Tests  will  be  made 
against  standard  samples.  Such  analyses  as  are  required  will 
be  made  by  the  Engineer. 

The  Contractor  shall  furnish  all  facilities  required  for  the 
proper  inspection  of  the  paint,  varnish  and  filler  and  their 
manufacture.  All  containers  and  metal  cans  will  be  sealed 
by  the  Inspector  at  the  time  of  inspection. 

SECTION.  No.  287.  Before  purchasing  any  paint  or  varnish, 
the  Contractor  shall  obtain  the  Commission's  approval  of  the  sub- 
contractor who  is  to  furnish  such  paint  or  varnish. 

A  subcontractor  for  paint,  in  order  to  be  acceptable  to  the 
Commission,  shall  have  manufactured  good  grades  of  paint  for 
at  least  five  (5)  years;  and  a  subcontractor  for  varnish,  in 
order  to  be  acceptable  to  the  Commission,  shall  have  manufac- 
tured good  grades  of  varnish  for  at  least  five  (5)  years.  A 
subcontractor  shall  have  an  adequate  factory  located  within 
one  hundred  (100)  miles  of  the  City. 

Due  to  the  cost  of  inspection,  the  Contractor  will  be  re- 
quired to  purchase  paint,  varnish  and  filler  in  as  large  quan- 
tities as  practicable.  In  no  case  will  the  manufacture  of  less 
than  five  (5)  barrels  of  one  kind  of  paint  be  inspected  at  one 
time. 

SECTION  No.  288.  Each  kind  of  paint,  varnish  or  filler  will 
be  referred  to  hereinafter  by  the  letter  indicating  its  quality 

153 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

or  formula.     All  proportions  are  by  weight,  except  as  other- 
wise   noted. 

The  paint,  varnish  and  filler  formulae  are  as  follows : 

"A."    Light  Paste  Wood  Filler: 

Refined   linseed    oil 1 1  % 

Drier  "O"    i% 

Varnish  "D" 8% 

Turpentine   J3% 

Silica    44% 

Magnesium   silicate 23% 

The  paste  wood  filler  when  thinned  with  turpentine  to  a 
brushing  consistency  shall  dry  hard  on  glass  in  twenty  (20) 
hours.  It  shall  not  rub  up  by  friction  under  the  finger  and 
when  immersed  in  water  shall  remain  intact  for  at  least  four 
(4)  hours.  It  shall  dry  full,  translucent  and  without  luster,  so 
that  it  will  not  color  or  cloud  the  work,  and  it  shall  be  hard 
enough  after  twelve  (12)  hours  to  withstand  sandpapering 
without  clogging  the  paper. 

"B."     Dark  Paste  Wood  Filler: 

"A,"  with  the  addition  of  sufficient  burnt  umber  and 
lampblack  ground  in  raw  linseed  oil  to  match  the  color  of 
the  standard  sample. 

"C."     Varnish : 

Kauri   gum 100  pounds 

Refined  linseed  oil 25  gallons 

Turpentine,  not  over 30  gallons 

Sufficient  lead  and  manganese  salts  to  dry 
the  varnish  according  to  specifications. 

The  varnish  when  poured  on  glass  and  held  in  a  vertical 
position  shall  dry  dust-free  in  not  less  than  six  (6)  hours  nor 
more  than  eight  (8)  hours,  and  shall  dry  hard  in  not  less  than 
forty  (40)  hours  nor  more  than  forty-eight  (48)  hours  at  70 
degrees  F.  The  varnish  shall  equal  the  standard  sample  in 
clearness,  color,  specific  gravity,  body,  flowing  qualities,  cov- 


154 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

cring  properties,  gloss,  finish,  durability,  and  in  all  other  re- 
spects. 

"D."     Rubbing  Varnish  for  use  in  "A"  and  "B" : 

Kauri   gum TOO  pounds 

Refined  linseed  oil 8  gallons 

Turpentine  substitute,  not  over.  .      10  gallons 

Turpentine 20  gallons 

Sufficient  lead  and  manganese  salts  to  dry 
the  varnish  according  to  specifications  un- 
der "A"  and  "B." 

This  varnish  shall  equal  the  standard  sample  in  clearness, 
color,  specific  gravity,  body,  flowing  qualities,  covering  prop- 
erties, gloss,  finish,  durability,  and  in  all  other  respects. 

All  varnish  shall  be  properly  filtered  through  an  approved 
filter. 

After  it  is  manufactured,  the  varnish  shall  be  stored  in  clean 
metal  containers  for  at  least  three  (3)  months.  These  containers 
shall  te  so  made  that  they  can  be  sealed  by  the  Inspector.  At  the 
end  of  the  period  of  storage,  the  varnish  "C,"  except  the  portion 
which  is  to  be  used  in  "K,"  shall  be  emptied  into  metal  cans  of  five 
(5)  gallons  capacity  in  the  presence  of  the  Inspector.  These  cans 
shall  then  be  sealed  by  him  and  shall  be  delivered  on  the  work 
with  the  seal  of  the  Inspector  thereon. 

After  a  similar  period  of  storage,  varnish  "D"  shall  be  ground 
with  silica  and  linseed  oil  in  the  proportions  specified  under  "A" 
and  "B,"  and  placed  in  metal  cans  of  not  over  five  (5)  gallons 
capacity,  in  the  presence  of  the  Inspector.  These  cans  shall  then 
be  sealed  by  him  and  shall  be  delivered  to  the  work  with  the  seal 
of  the  Inspector  thereon. 


SPECIFICATIONS — PAINTING 

"E."    Outside  White  Paint : 

Pigment    Vehicle  Paint 

Magnesium  silicate 10.0%  5-5% 

Basic  sulphate  white  lead 50.0%  27.6% 

Zinc  oxide 40.0%  22.1% 

Ultramarine  blue  in  linseed  oil Trace  Trace 

Refined  linseed  oil   . . 82.0%  367% 

Turpentine 6.0%  2.7% 

Prepared  Tung  Oil  "N" 6.0%  2.7% 

Drier  "O"  '.. 6.0%  2.7% 

100.0%       100.0%  100.0% 

Standard  weight,  14  pounds  4  ounces  per  gallon. 

"F."    Shop  Coat  for  Iron  and  Steel : 

Red  lead 5°°  pounds 

Raw  linseed  oil 11  gallons 

Boiled  linseed  oil   5^2  gallons 

Standard  weight,  26  pounds  12  ounces  per  gallon. 

The  shop  coat  of  paint  shall  be  mixed,  as  needed,  in  such 
quantities  as  can  be  used  before  it  thickens  in  the  container.  Any 
paint  which  settles  and  thickens  before  use  shall  be  rejected  and 
a  new  paint  mixed. 

"G."    Under  Coating  for  Metal  Surfaces : 

Pigment    Vehicle  Paint 

Blue  lead    50.0%  21.5% 

Red  lead 30.0%  12.9% 

Lampblack 10.0%  4.3% 

Magnesium  silicate 10.0%  4-3% 

Linseed  oil 79-O%  45-O% 

Turpentine   7-0%  4.0% 

Prepared  Tung  Oil  "N" 7.0%  4.0% 

Drier  "O"  7.0%  4.0% 

100.0%     100.0%  100.0% 
Standard  weight,  n  pounds  12  ounces  per  gallon. 


•56 


SPECIFICATIONS — PAINTING 

"H."    First  Coat  for  Tin  Roofs: 

Pigment  Vehicle  Paint 

Lampblack    3.0%  1.3% 

Red  lead 15.0%  6.6% 

Spanish  oxide   82.0%  36.2% 

Linseed  oil  .  . '. 80.0%  44-7% 

Turpentine 4.0%  2.2% 

Prepared  Tung  Oil  "N" 8.0%  4.5% 

Drier  "O" 8.0%  4-5% 

100.0%  100.0%  IOO.O% 

Standard  weight,  12  pounds  o  ounces  per  gallon. 

"I."    Finishing  Coat  for  Tin  Roofs : 

Pigment  Vehicle  .  Paint 

Persian  Gulf  oxide 100.0%  43-2% 

Linseed  oil  86.8%  49.4% 

Prepared  Tung  Oil  "N" 6.6%  3.7% 

Drier  "O" 6.6%  3.7% 

IOO.O%  100.0%  IOO.O% 

Standard  weight,  11  pounds  8  ounces  per  gallon. 

"K."    Enamel  Paint  for  Stair  Stringers,  Railings,  etc. : 

Pigment  Vehicle  Paint 

Lampblack    40.0%  8.2% 

Chrome  yellow,  medium,  c.  p 60.0%  12.7% 

Linseed  oil  38.0%  30.1% 

Drier  "O" 3.9%  3-i% 

Turpentine   . &5%  5-l% 

Varnish  "C" 51.6%  40.8% 

100.0%  100.0%  100.0% 
Standard  weight,  8  pounds  13  ounces  per  gallon. 


157 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

"L."    Second  and  Third  Coats  for  Wood  Underflooring,  etc. : 

Pigment  Vehicle       Paint 

Chrome  yellow,  medium,  c.  p 6.3%  2.9% 

Chrome  green,  medium,  25%   7-4%  3-5% 

Yellow  ochre  15.6%  7.3% 

Basic  sulphate  white  lead 46.5%  21.8% 

Zinc  oxide    23.4%  10.9% 

Lampblack  0.8%  0.4% 

Linseed  oil  88.0%       46.8% 

Prepared  Tung  Oil  "N" 6.0%         Z-2% 

Drier  "O" 6.0%         3-2% 

100.0%     100.0%     100.0% 
Standard  weight,  12  pounds  8  ounces  per  gallon. 

"M."  Second  and  Third  Coats  for  Window  and  Door  Frames, 
Trim,  etc.,  for  Enclosures  between  Stations : 

Pigment  Vehicle       Paint 

Chrome  yellow,  medium,  c.  p 16.5%  6.6% 

Chrome  green,  medium,  25%   20.6%  8.3% 

Yellow  ochre  4I-3%  16.5% 

Zinc  oxide 20.6%  8.3% 

Lampblack    1.0%  0.4% 

Linseed  oil  87.6%       52-5% 

Prepared  Tung  Oil  "N" 6.2%         37% 

Drier  "O" 6.2%         3.7% 

IOO.O%       100.0%       IOO.O% 

Standard  weight,  n  pounds  o  ounces  per  gallon. 

"N."    Prepared  Tung  Oil: 

Rosin,  treated 15  pounds 

Litharge  2  pounds 

Tung  oil 40  gallons 

Turpentine  substitute    50  gallons 

"O."  Drier : 

Litharge   10  pounds 

Manganese  resinate  25  pounds 

Raw  linseed  oil 25  gallons 

Turpentine 50  gallons 


SPECIFICATIONS  —  PAINTING 

"P."     Finishing  Coat  for  Structural  Iron  and  Steel: 

Pigment  Vehicle       Paint  ; 

Chrome  yellow,  medium,  c.  p  ........   21.9%  6.8  % 

Lampblack    .......................    19.2%  6.0% 

Spanish  oxide    .............  .......     3.6%  i.i$> 

Zinc  oxide    .......  .  .  ..  .........  ----     f&%  2-4% 

Yellow  ochre  .....................   36.5%  1  1-3% 

Magnesium  silicate  ......  -----  .......    11.0%  3.4% 

Linseed  oil  ........  ...............  85.2%       58.8% 

Prepared  Tung  Oil  "N".  .....  ......  6.0%         4.1%. 

Drier  "O"  ........................  8.8%         6.1% 

100.0%     100.0%     100.0% 
Standard  weight,  9  pounds  13  ounces  per  gallon. 

SECTION  No.  289.  Linseed  oil  shall  conform  to  the  specifi- 
cation of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials  for  the 
purity  of  raw  linseed  oil  from  North  American  seed,  adopted 
August  25,  1913.  It  shall  be  free  from  foots  and  moisture,  and 
shall  have  been  heated  to  275  degrees  F. 

Boiled  linseed  oil  shall  conform  to  the  proposed  specification 
of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials,  1915.  When 
boiled  linseed  oil  is  flowed  over  a  plate  of  glass  and  allowed  to 
drain  in  a  nearly  vertical  position,  it  shall  dry  free  from  tackiness 
in  fifteen  (15)  hours  at  70  degrees  F. 

Varnish  oil  shall  be  refined  linseed  oil,  whose  acid  number 
shall  not  exceed  four  (4).  It  shall  be  free  from  foots  and  mois- 
ture and  shall  equal  the  standard  sample. 

Tung  oil  (or  China  wood  oil)  shall  conform  to  the  proposed 
specification  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials, 


Turpentine  shall  be  gum  turpentine  and  shall  conform  to  the 
proposed  specification  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Mate- 
rials, 1915,  for  gum  turpentine. 

Turpentine  substitute  shall  equal  the  standard  sample. 

Benzine  shall  equal  the  standard  sample. 

Benzol  shall  equal  the  standard  sample. 

Kauri  gum  for  use  in  varnish  "C"  shall  be  of  a  "Cross" 
grade  of  hard,  fossil  Kauri  gum.  It  shall  be  of  clean,  chiseled 
gum,  free  from  "sugar."  Kauri  gum  for  use  in  varnish  "D" 

159 


SPECIFICATIONS — PAINTING 

shall  be  a  No.  2  grade  fossil  Kauri  gum.  Both  grades  shall  equal 
the  standard  sample. 

Orange  shellac  shall  be  free  from  rosin  and  shall  equal  the 
standard  sample. 

Silica  shall  be  ground  from  rock  crystal  and  water  floated.  It 
shall  be  ninety-nine  per  centum  (99%)  pure  silica  (SiO2)  and 
shall  be  of  such  fineness  that  ninety-nine  per  centum  (99%) 
will  pass  through  a  standard  20O-mesh  sieve.  Under  the  micro- 
scope, silica  shall  be  sharp  and  free  from  rounded  particles.  (By 
standard  20O-mesh  sieve  is  meant  the  2OO-mesh  sieve  described 
in  the  specification  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials 
ior  Portland  cement,  adopted  August  16,  1909.) 

Magnesium  silicate  shall  be  a  hydrated  magnesium  silicate  of 
crystalline  structure  and  shall  be  finely  ground. 

Basic  sulphate  white  lead  shall  be  a  true  basic  sulphate  of 
lead  containing  not  less  than  fifteen  per  centum  (15%)  combined 
lead  monoxide  (PbO),  not  over  five  per  centum  (5%)  zinc  oxide 
(ZnO),  and  not  more  than  seventy-five  thousandths  per  centum 
(•°75%)  free  sulphur  dioxide  (SO2). 

Zinc  oxide  shall  be  "American  Process"  and  shall  contain 
at  least  ninety-eight  per  centum  (98%),  by  weight,  oxide  of  zinc 
(ZnO),  not  more  than  two-tenths  per  centum  (0.2%)  sulphur 
in  any  form,  nor  more  than  seventy-five  thousandths  per  centum 
(.075%)  free  sulphur  dioxide  (SO2). 

Blue  lead  shall  be  pure  blue  lead  free  from  water,  soluble  sul- 
phates and  sulphites.  It  shall  contain  not  less  than  forty-five  per 
centum  (45%)  nor  more  than  fifty-five  per  centum  ($5%)  lead 
sulphate  (PbSO4)  ;  not  less  than  thirty-three  per  centum  (33%) 
nor  more  than  forty-five  per  centum  (45%)  lead  oxide  (PbO)  ; 
not  over  six  per  centum  (6%)  lead  sulphide  (PbS)  ;  not  over  fiVe 
and  one-half  per  centum  (Sl/2%)  lead  sulphite  (PbSO3)  ;  not 
over  three  per  centum  (3%)  zinc  oxide  (ZnO)  ;  and  not  over 
three  per  centum  (3%)  carbon  and  volatile  matter. 

Red  lead  shall  be  of  the  best  quality,  free  from  all  adultera- 
tion, and  shall  contain  not  over  one  per  centum  (i%}  inert  hearth 
materials  (such  as  silica  and  alumina)  and  not  more  than  one- 
tenth  per  centum  (0.1%)  metallic  lead;  the  remainder  shall  be 
pure  lead  monoxide  (PbO)  and  lead  tetroxide  (Pb3O4).  It  shall 
contain  no  organic  coloring  matter  and  when  shaken  up  with  water 


1 60 


SPECIFICATIONS — PAINTING 

shall  show  no  alkaline  reaction.  It  shall  be  of  such  fineness  that 
ninety-nine  and  one-half  per  centum  (9^/2%)  will  pass  through 
a  standard  2OO-mesh  sieve.  When  used  for  shop  coat  "F,"  red 
lead  shall  contain  not  less  than  eighty  per  centum  (80%)  nor 
more  than  ninety  per  centum  (90%)  lead  tetroxide  (Pb3O4). 
When  used  in  formula  "G,"  it  shall  contain  not  less  than  eighty- 
five  per  centum  (85%)  nor  more  than  ninety-five  per  centum 
lead  tetroxide  (Pb3O4). 

Lampblack  shall  contain  at  least  ninety-eight  per  centum 
pure  carbon.  The  tinting  power  of  lampblack  used  in 
finishing  coats  shall  be  the  same  as  the  standard  sample. 

Spanish  oxide  shall  contain  at  least  eighty-five  per  centum 
(85%)  ferric  oxide  (Fe2O3),  the  remainder  to  consist  of  silicates. 
The  oxide  shall  contain  no  soluble  sulphates  nor  free  acids,  shall 
give  a  neutral  reaction,  and  shall  contain  not  over  one-tenth  per 
centum  (0.1%)  sulphur  in  any  form.  It  shall  be  of  such  fine- 
ness that  ninety-nine  per  centum  (99%)  will  pass  through  a 
standard  2OO-mesh  sieve.  It  shall  be  free  from  grit  and  shall  be 
the  same  as  the  standard  sample  in  color  and  tinting  power. 

Persian  Gulf  oxide  shall  contain  at  least  sixty-five  per  centum 
(65%)  ferric  oxide  (Fe2O3),  the  remainder  to  consist  of  silicates. 
The  oxide  shall  contain  no  soluble  sulphates  nor  free  acids  and 
shall  give  a  neutral  reaction.  It  shall  be  of  such  fineness  that 
ninety-nine  per  centum  (99%)  will  pass  through  a  standard  200- 
mesh  sieve.  It  shall  be  free  from  grit  and  shall  be  the  same  as 
the  standard  sample  in  color. 

Chrome  yellow,  medium,  C.  P.,  shall  be  ninety-eight  per  cen- 
tum (98%)  pure  lead  chromate  or  basic  lead  chromate.  It  shall 
be  the  same  as  the  standard  sample  in  color  and  strength. 

Chrome  green,  medium,  twenty-five  per  centum  (25%),  shall 
be  precipitated  (wet  process)  on  pure  barytes  and  china  clay. 
It  shall  be  free  from  grit,  and  shall  contain  no  free  lime,  calcium 
carbonate,  or  calcium  sulphate,  nor  more  than  one  per  centum 
( i  %)  of  lime  in  any  form.  It  shall  be  the  same  as  the  standard 
sample  in  shade  and  tinting  power. 

Yellow  ochre  shall  be  of  good  quality,  water  floated,  French 
ochre.  It  shall  contain  at  least  eighteen  per  centum  (18%)  ferric 
oxide  (Fe2O?.),  and  not  more  than  five  per  centum  (5%)  of 
lime  in  any  form.  It  shall  be  free  from  all  foreign  coloring  mat- 
ter, grit  and  adulterants  and  shall  be  the  same  as  the  standard 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

sample  in  color  and  tinting  power.  It  shall  be  of  such  fineness 
that  ninety-nine  per  centum  (99%)  will  pass  through  a  standard 
2OO-mesh  sieve. 

Litharge  shall  be  ninety-nine  per  centum  (99%)  pure  lead 
monoxide  (PbO). 

Manganese  resinate  shall  equal  the  standard  sample. 

SECTION  No.  290.  Standard  samples  of  ingredients  and  of 
the  finished  paints,  varnishes  and  fillers  are  on  file  in  the  office 
of  the  Commission.  Paints,  varnishes  and  fillers  and  their  ingredi- 
ents shall  conform  to  these  samples  in  all  respects.  The  Con- 
tractor shall  submit  separate  samples  of  all  ingredients  intended 
for  use  in  the  paints,  varnishes  or  fillers  for  the  approval  of 
the  Engineer,  and  if  required  shall  also  submit  samples  of  the 
finished  paints,  varnishes  and  fillers.  After  the  approval  of  these 
samples,  all  paints,  varnishes  and  fillers  shall  be  manufactured 
from  materials  identical  with  such  samples. 

In  those  details  where  no  special  instructions  are  given,  the 
paint,  varnish  and  filler  and  their  manufacture  and  application 
shall  conform  to  the  best  accepted  practice. 

All  paints,  varnishes  and  fillers  shall  be  properly  prepared, 
rsing  only  the  specified  materials  in  the  proportion  stated,  with  an 
allowable  variation  therefrom  of  not  over  two  per  centum  (2%) 
in  the  quantity  of  any  material  therein.  Paints  shall  vary  not 
more  than  four  (4)  ounces  per  gallon  from  the  standard  weight, 
except  that  the  weight  of  paint  "K"  shall  be  not  over  one  (i) 
ounce  less  nor  two  (2)  ounces  greater  per  gallon  than  the  stand- 
ard weight.  The  specific  gravity  of  a  varnish  shall  be  not  less 
than  that  of  the  standard  sample. 

Paints  shall  dry  dust-free  under  normal  conditions  in  ten  (10) 
hours  and  shall  dry  hard  in  not  less  than  eighteen  (18)  hours 
nor  more  than  thirty-six  (36)  hours.  For  paint  which  is  to  be 
applied  in  cold  or  damp  weather,  the  proportions  shall  be  modified 
as  deemed  necessary  by  the  Engineer. 

The  proportions  of  the  tinting  pigments  in  formulae  "K," 
"L."  "M"  and  "P"  shall  be  varied  as  necessary  to  match  the 
standard  sample  in  color. 

All  paint  shall  be  very  finely  ground  in  paste  form  through 
sharp  burr  stone  mills.  The  required  standard  of  grinding  is 
generally  shown  by  the  standard  sample. 

162 


SPECIFICATIONS — PAINTING 

SECTION  No.  291.  All  stair  stringers,  stair  columns,  hangers, 
brackets,  canopy  framing  over  stairways,  stairway  landings  and 
passageways,  and  posts,  railings,  gates,  gate  controls,  lamp  stand- 
ards, tubing,  sign  frames  and  panels,  steel  ladders  and  ladder 
platforms  shall  be  painted  as  follows: 

Shop  coat:  coat  of  red  lead  and  linseed  oil,  UF."  (This  coat 
will  be  omitted  on  cast  iron.) 

First  field  coat,  "G." 

Second  field  coat  for  structural  steel  and  iron,  "P." 

Second  field  coat  for  stair  stringers,  railings,  etc.,  "K." 

The  steel  columns  and  roof  framing  for  canopies  over  train 
platforms,  the  steel  framing  for  mezzanine  floors  and  the  steel 
framing  around  stairwells  which  form  part  of  the  railroad  struc- 
ture shall  be  given  one  (i)  coat  of  "K." 

The  vertical  steel  framing  adjacent  to  and  on  the  outer  side 
of  wind  screens,  the  cast-iron  posts  and  exposed  pipes  in  toilet 
rooms,  and  all  other  exposed  iron,  steel  and  sheet  metal  (except 
copper)  within  the  mezzanine  enclosures  and  at  the  sides  of  stair- 
ways, the  finish  of  which  is  riot  otherwise  herein  specifically 
provided  for,  shall  be  painted  as  follows : 

Shop  coat:  coat  of  red  lead  and  linseed  oil,  "F".  (This  coat 
will  be  omitted  on  cast  iron.) 

First  field  coat,  "E",  reduced  with  one  (i)  quart  of  turpen- 
tine per  gallon  of  paint. 

Second  field  coat,  "E",  reduced  with  one  (i)  pint  of  turpen- 
tine per  gallon  of  paint. 

Third  field  coat,  "E",  unreduced. 

Before  the  application  of  the  shop  coat  and  the  first  field  coat 
all  metal  shall  be  thoroughly  cleaned  with  wire  brushes  or  other- 
wise, as  necessary. 

Where  the  shop  coat  has  become  damaged  before  or  after 
erection,  through  any  cause  whatever,  it  shall  be  renewed  with 
the  same  kind  of  paint  as  originally  used,  such  renewal  to  be 
considered  only  as  a  part  of  the  original  shop  coat. 

The  roofing  tin  and  gutters  (except  copper  gutters)  shall 
be  painted  on  the  underside  with  one  (i)  coat  of  "G"  and  on 
the  side  exposed  when  in  place  in  the  work  with  a  first  field  coat 
of  "H"  and  a  second  field  coat  of  "I".  All  tin  and  galvanized 
iron,  before  being  painted,  shall  have  all  the  rosin  scraped 


163 


SPECIFICATIONS PAINTING 

from  soldered  joints  and  shall  be  thoroughly  cleaned  with  benzine 
so  as  to  remove  all  grease  and  dirt,  and  in  addition  thereto  all 
galvanized  iron  which  is  to  be  painted  shall  be  first  painted  with 
one  (i)  coat  of  "F". 

All  metal  work  the  finish  of  which  is  not  herein  otherwise 
provided  for  shall  be  thoroughly  washed  with  benzine  and  then 
painted  with  one  (i)  coat  of  "F"  and  two  (2)  coats  of  the 
same  kind  of  paint  as  used  on  the  structure  adjacent  to  such 
metal  work. 

SECTION  No.  292.  All  knots  and  pitchy  places  in  wood  which 
is  to  be  painted  shall  be  given  one  (i)  coat  of  orange  shellac 
before  painting. 

All  exposed  oak  woodwork  in  stations  shall  be  filled  with 
"A"  (except  hand-rails,  which  -shall  be  filled  with  "B"')  and 
then  given  one  (i)  coat  of  "C"  reduced  with  one  (i)  quart  of 
benzol  per  gallon  of  varnish,  followed  by  two  (2)  coats  of  "C" 
unreduced.  Each  coat  except  the  last  shall  be  sandpapered  with 
No.  oo  sandpaper  before  the  succeeding  coat  is  applied.  All 
exposed  yellow  pine  in  canopies  and  roofs  shall  be  given 
one  (i)  coat  of  "C"  reduced  with  three  (3)  pints  of  benzol  per 
gallon  of  varnish,  followed  by  two  (2)  coats  of  "C"  unreduced. 
Each  coat  except  the  last  shall  be  sandpapered  with  No.  oo  sand- 
paper before  the  succeeding  coat  is  applied. 

Window  frames  and  sash  of  exterior  walls  of  mezzanines  and 
wind  screens  shall  be  given  one  (i)  coat  of  "E"  reduced  with 
one  (i)  pint  of  turpentine  per  gallon  of  paint,  followed  by  a  fin- 
ishing coat  of  "E"  unreduced. 

Facia  boards  shall  be  given  one  (i)  coat  of  "E"  reduced  with 
one  (i)  quart  of  benzol  per  gallon  of  paint,  followed  by  two 
(2)  coats  of  "K".  The  base  boards  on  the  track  side  of  wind 
screens  shall  be  given  two  (2)  coats  of  "K". 

The  window  and  door  frames  and  trim,  panel  stiles  and  rails 
of  doors  of  enclosures  between  stations  shall  be  given  one  (i) 
coat  of  "E"  reduced  with  one  (i)  quart  of  benzol  per  gallon  of 
paint,  followed  by  one  (i)  coat  of  "M"  reduced  with  one  (i)  pint 
of  turpentine  per  gallon  of  paint,  followed  by  a  finishing  coat  of 
"M"  unreduced.  The  under  side  of  the  underflooring  of  the  mez- 
zanines, the  under  side  of  wooden  treads  and  the  backs  of  risers 


164 


SPECIFICATIONS — PAINTING 

of  stairs  from  street  to  mezzanine,  and  the  panels  of  doors  to 
enclosures  between  stations  shall  be  given  one  (i)  coat  of  "E" 
reduced  with  one  (i)  quart  of  benzol  per  gallon  of  paint,  fol- 
lowed by  one  (i)  coat  of  "L"  reduced  with  one  (i)  pint  of  tur- 
pentine per  gallon  of  paint,  followed  by  a  finishing  coat  of  *'L" 
unreduced. 

All  plastered  surfaces  and  the  concrete  ceilings  of  mezzanines 
shall  be  given  two  (2)  coats  of  an  approved  white  coating,  espe- 
cially prepared  for  use  on  concrete  and  plastered  surfaces  and 
which  will  not  absorb  moisture.  The  surface  of  the  plaster  and 
concrete  shall  be  free  from  moisture  and  "  bone"  dry  before  the 
application  of  the  first  coat  and  this  coat  shall  be  thoroughly  dry 
before  the  final  coat  is  applied.  The  exposed  surface  of  concrete 
platforms  under  wind  screens  shall  be  painted  with  an  approved 
paint.  Samples  of  the  coating  material  shall  be  approved  by  the 
Engineer  before  the  coating  material  is  used. 

SECTION  No.  293.  All  paint  and  varnish  shall  be  well  brushed 
out  so  as  to  show  a  smooth,  even  film  of  uniform  thickness. 
Round  brushes  shall  be  used  exclusively  in  applying  paint. 

No  painting  shall  be  done  in  wet,  damp  or  freezing  weather. 
All  surfaces  to  which  paint,  varnish  or  filler  is  to  be  applied  shall 
be  clean  and  dry. 

The  paint  shall  not  liver  nor  curdle  and  shall  cover  properly 
and  work  freely  under  the  brush.  The  pigment  shall  remain  in 
suspension  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 


SPECIFICATIONS 
PART  THIRD— TRACK  WORK 

Materials  supplied  by  the  Contractor  shall  be  stored  and  han- 
dled by  him  in  the  most  careful  and  approved  manner  and  so  as 
to  protect  the  materials  against  deterioration  and  damage.  If  at 
any  time  the  methods  of  storing  or  handling  the  materials  are 
not  satisfactory  to  the  Engineer  and  the  Engineer  shall  so  notify 
the  Contractor,  the  Contractor  shall  immediately  upon  receipt 
of  such  notice  make  the  required  changes  in  the  methods  of 
handling  and  storing  the  materials. 


J66 


SUBDIVISION  1 
OPEN   HEARTH   RAIL 

i- 1.  In  these  specifications  where  open-hearth  steel  is  relerred 
to  it  shall  be  understood  to  mean  commercial  open-hearth  steel 
having  a  chemical  composition  as  specified  for  this  material  here- 
inafter. 

1-2.  The  section  of  all  rails  shall  be  that  known  as  the  Amer- 
ican Railway  Association  Standard,  Type  "B,"  100  pound,  ap- 
proved 1912,  and  shall  conform  accurately  to  the  section  and 
dimensions  of  this  standard.  An  allowance  of  one-sixty-fourth 
(1/64)  of  an  inch  under,  and  one-thirty-second  (1/32)  of  an 
inch  over,  will  be  allowed  for  variations  in  the  specified  height, 
and  a  variation  of  one-sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  will  be  per- 
mitted in  width  of  flange,  provided  the  variations  in  weight  speci- 
fied hereinafter  are  not  exceeded ;  but  no  variation  will  be  allowed 
in  the  dimensions  affecting  the  fit  of  splice  bars. 

1-3.  The  weight  of  the  rails  shall  be  maintained  as  nearly  as 
possible  to  one  hundred  (100)  pounds  per  yard  of  rail.  A  varia- 
tion of  one-half  (T/2)  of  one  (i)  per  centum  from  the  calculated 
weight  of  section  as  applied  to  the  entire  amount  of  rail  called 
for  will  be  allowed.  Rails  accepted  will  be  paid  for  according  to 
actual  weight  within  the  above  limits. 

1-4.  The  standard  length  of  track  rails  shall  be  thirty-three 
(33)  feet  at  a  temperature  of  sixty  (60)  degrees  Fahrenheit. 
Short  lengths  by  even  feet  down  to  twenty-five  (25)  feet  will 
be  accepted  to  an  amount  not  exceeding  ten  (10)  per  centum  of 
the  total  order. 

1-5.  Variations  in  individual  rails  of  not  more  than  three- 
eighths  (%)  of  an  inch  from  the  normal  length  will  be  accepted. 
Roth  ends  of  all  short  lengths  of  No.  i  rails  shall  be  painted  green, 
and  both  ends  of  all  No.  2  rails  shall  be  painted  white. 

1-6.  The  name  of  the  maker,  the  weight  and  type  of  the  rail, 
and  the  month  and  year  of  manufacture  shall  be  rolled  in  raised 
letters  and  figures  on  the  side  of  the  web  of  each  rail.  The  num- 


SPECIFICATIONS — OPEN   HEARTH  RAIL 

her  of  the  heat,  and  a  number  representing  the  number  of  the 
ingot  in  the  order  poured  from  each  heat,  shall  be  stamped  on  the 
side  of  the  web  of  each  rail  so  as  not  to  be  covered  by  the  splice 
bars  and  a  letter  shall  be  stamped  on  the  side  of  the  web  of  each 
rail  to  indicate  the  position  in  the  ingot  from  which  that  rail  was 
rolled.  The  letters  "O.H."  shall  be  rolled  or  stamped  upon  each 
rail. 

1-7.  Circular  holes,  as  indicated  on  the  drawings,  shall  be 
provided  for  splice  bars,  and  for  bonds  if  so  ordered.  They 
shall  conform  accurately  to  the  dimensions  shown,  and  shall  be 
free  from  burrs.  These  holes  shall  be  drilled  and  must  be  cylin- 
drical and  not  conical. 

1-8.  All  rails,  while  on  the  cooling  beds,  shall  be  protected 
from  contact  with  snow  or  water.  They  shall  be  carefully 
straightened  so  that  gagging  under  the  cold  press  shall  be  re- 
duced to  a  minimum. 

1-9.  Any  rails  coming  to  the  straightening  presses  showing 
shorter  kinks  or  greater  camber  than  that  indicated  by  the  middle 
ordinate  of  four  (4)  inches  in  thirty-three  (33)  feet  shall  be 
classed  as  No.  2  rails  and  so  stamped.  The  distance  between  the 
supports  of  the  rails  in  the  gagging  press  shall  be  not  less  than 
forty-two  (42)  inches.  All  rails  after  finishing  shall  be  smooth 
on -heads,  straight  in  line  and  surface,  without  twists,  kinks  or 
waves,  and  all  No.  I  rails  shall  be  entirely  free  from  injurious 
defects  or  flaws  of  any  kind.  All  rail  ends  shall  be  sawed  square, 
a  variation  of  more  than  one-thirty-second  (1/32)  of  an  inch 
not  being  acceptable,  and  all  burrs  shall  be  removed  and  ends 
made  smooth. 

i-io.  The  entire  process  of  manufacture  shall  be  in  accord- 
ance with  the  best  current  practice  at  the  time  of  manufacture. 

All  ingots  shall  be  kept  in  a  vertical  position  until  the  interior 
has  solidified.  No  bled  ingots  shall  be  used.  Sufficient  top  dis- 
card shall  be  made  to  secure  sound  rails,  and  care  shall  be  taken 
to  avoid  burning  in  reheating.  The  end  of  the  bloom  or  the  rail 
formed  from  the  top  of  the  ingot  shall  be  sheared  until  the 
entire  face  shows  sound  metal.  All  metal  sheared  from  the  top 


168 


SPECIFICATIONS OPEN    IIKARTT1    RAIL 

of  the  ingot,  either  from  the  bloom  or  the  rail,  shall  be  considered 
top  discard. 

i-n.  The  number  of  passes  and  the  speed  of'the  train  shall 
be  so  regulated  for  all  rails,  that  on  leaving  the  rolls  at  the  final 
pass  the  temperature  of  the  rail  will  not  exceed  that  which  re- 
quires a  shrinkage  allowance  at  the  hot  saws  for  a  thirty-three 
(33)  foot  rail  of  seven  (7)  inches.  No  artificial  means  of  cool- 
ing shall  be  used,  nor  shall  the  rails  be  held,  before  sawing,  for 
the  purpose  of  reducing  the  temperature. 

1-12.  The  chemical  composition  of  each  heat  of  steel  from 
which  the  rails  are  rolled,  determined  as  herein  prescribed,  shall 
be  within  the  following  limits: 

Carbon ., 0.73  to  0.86  per  centum 

Phosphorus  not  to  exceed 0.04  per  centum 

Manganese    0.60  to  0.90  per  centum 

Silicon  not  to  exceed 0.2  per  centum 

It  is  desired  that  the  percentage  of  carbon  in  an  entire  order 
of  rails  shall  average  as  high  as  the  mean  percentage  between 
the  upper  and  lower  limits  specified.  Steel  containing  more  than 
a  trace  of  chrome  or  nickel  shall  not  be  accepted. 

1-13.  When  the  material  used  at  any  mill  is  such  that  the 
average  phosphorus  content  of  the  ingot  metal  used  is  running 
below  0.03  per  centum,  the  carbon  may  be  increased,  with  the 
approval  of  the  Engineer,  at  the  rate  of  0.035  Per  centum  for 
each  o.oi  per  centum  that  the  phosphorus  content  of  the  ingot 
metal  used  averages  below  0.03  per  centum  for  open-hearth 
steel. 

1-14.  In  order  to  ascertain  whether  the  chemical  composi- 
tion is  in  accordance  with  the  requirements,  the  makers  shall 
furnish  the  Inspector  with  a  chemical  analysis  of  the  elements 
carbon,  manganese,  silicon,  phosphorus,  sulphur,  chromium  and 
nickel  for  each  heat.  Drillings  from  the  finished  rail  from  each 
melt  of  steel  rolled  shall  be  furnished  the  Inspector  'for  check 
analysis.  Specimens  shall  be  selected  by  him  and  drillings  made 
in  his  presence. 

169 


SPECIFICATIONS — OPEN    HEARTH   RAIL 

1-15.    Tests  on  rails  shall  be  made  to  determine: 

(a)  Ductility  or  toughness  as  opposed  to  brittleness. 

(b)  Soundness. 

The  physical  qualities  shall  be  determined  by  the  drop  test 
and  the  "nick  and  break"  test. 

1-16.  The  drop  testing  machine  used  shall  be  the  standard 
of  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association. 

(a)  The  tup  shall  weigh  two  thousand  (2,000)  Ibs.,  and  have 
a  striking  face  with  a  radius  of  five  (5)  inches. 

(b)  The  anvil  block  shall  weigh  twenty  thousand   (20,000) 
Ibs.,  and  be  supported  on  springs. 

(c)  The  supports  for  the  test  pieces  shall  be  spaced  three  (3) 
feet  between  centers  and  shall  be  a  part  of,  and  firmly  secured 
to,  the  anvil.     The  bearing  surfaces  of  the  supports  shall  have 
a  radius  of  five  (5)  inches. 

1-17.  Drop  tests  of  rail  shall  be  made  on  pieces  of  rail  not 
less  than  four  (4)  feet  and  not  more  than  six  (6)  feet  long. 
These  test  pieces  shall  be  cut  in  the  presence  of  the  Inspector 
from  the  top  end  of  the  top  rail  of  the  ingot,  hot  stamped  by 
the  mill  with  the  heat  and  serial  number  of  the  ingot  and  marked 
on  the  base  with  gauge  marks  one  (i)  inch  apart  for  three  (3) 
inches  each  side  of  the  center  of  the  test  piece,  for  measuring 
the  ductility  of  the  metal. 

1-18.  The  temperature  of  the  test  pieces  shall  be  between 
sixty  (60)  and  one  hundred  (TOO)  degrees  Fahrenheit. 

1-19.  The  test  piece  shall  be  placed  head  upward  on  the 
supports,  and  be  subjected  to  impact  of  the  tup  falling  free  from 
a  height  of  fifteen  (15)  feet. 

Under  this  impact  the  rail  under  one  blow  shall  show  at  least 
four  (4)  per  centum  elongation  for  one  (i)  inch,  or  three  (3) 
per  centum  each  for  two  (2)  consecutive  inches  of  the  six  (6) 
inch  scale. 


170 


SPEC  IKK  AT  IONS-    -oPHN    HEARTH    RAIL 

1-20.  A  sufficient  number  of  blows  shall  be  given  to  deter- 
mine the  complete  elongation  of  two  of  the  test  pieces. 

1-21.  The  permanent  set  after  one  blow  under  the  drop  test 
shall  not  exceed  one  and  two-tenths  (1.2)  inches,  measured  by 
middle  ordinate  in  a  length  of  three  (3)  feet. 

1-22.  The  test  piece  which  is  not  tested  to  destruction  under 
the  drop  shall  be  nicked  and  broken,  to  determine  whether  the 
interior  metal  is  sound. 

1-23.  Test  pieces  shall  be  .selected  from  the  second,  middle 
r.nJ  last  full  ingot  of  each  heat,  and  tested  under  the  drop  for 
elongation  or  ductility,  as  hereinbefore  specified. 

(a)  If  two  (2)  of  these  test  pieces  do  not  break  at  the  first 
blow,  and  if  both  show  the  required  elongation,  all  of  the  rails 
of  the  heat  shall  be  accepted,  provided  that  none  of  the  three  (3) 
test  pieces  when  broken  show  interior  defect. 

(b)  If  two  (2)  of  the  test  pieces  break  at  the  first  blow  or 
do  not  show  the  required  elongation,  or  if  any  of  the  three  (3) 
test  pieces  when  broken  show  interior  defect,  all  of  the  top  rails 
from  that  heat  shall  be  rejected. 

(c)  Second  tests  shall  then  be  made  from  three   (3)    test 
pieces  selected  by  the  Inspector  from  the  top  ends  of  any  second 
rails  of  the  same  heat,  preferably  of  the  same  ingots.    If  two  (2) 
of  these  test  pieces  do  not  break  at  the  first  blow  and  if  both 
show  the  required  elongation,  all  of  the  remainder  of  the  rails 
of  the  heat  shall  be  accepted,  provided  that  none  of  the  three  (3 ) 
test  pieces  when  broken  show  interior  defect. 

(d)  If  two  (2)  of  these  test  pieces  break  at  the  first  blow 
or  do  not  show  the  required  elongation,  or  if  any  of  the  three  (3) 
test  pieces  when  broken  show  interior  defect,  all  of  the  second 
rails  of  the  heat  shall  be  rejected. 

O)  Third  tests  shall  then  be  made  from  three  (3)  test  pieces 
selected  by  the  Inspector  from  the  top  ends  of  any  third  rails  of 
the  same  heat,  preferably  of  the  same  ingots.  If  two  (2)  of  these 
test  pieces  do  not  break  at  the  first  blow,  and  if  both  show  the 


17* 


SPECIFICATIONS — OPEN    HEARTH   RAIL 

required  elongation,  all  of  the  remainder  of  the  rails  of  the  heat 
shall  be  accepted,  provided  that  .none  of  the  three  (3)  test  pieces 
when  broken  show  interior  defect. 

(/)  If  two  (2)  of  these  test  pieces  break  at  the  first  blow,  or 
do  not  show  the  required  elongation,  or  if  any  of  the  three  (3) 
test  pieces  when  broken  show  interior  defect,  all  of  the  remainder 
of  the  rails  from  that  heat  shall  be  rejected. 

1-24.  All  rails  improperly  drilled  or  straightened,  or  from 
which  burrs  have  not  been  properly  removed  as  specified,  shall 
be  rejected  until  such  time  as  these  defects  have  been  corrected. 
Rails,  which  by  reason  of  surface  imperfections,  or  for  causes 
mentioned  in  Paragraph  1-9  are  not  classed  as  No.  i  rails,  shall 
be  considered  No.  2  rails,  but  No.  2  rails  shall  not  be  accepted 
for  shipment  which  have  flaws  in  the  head  of  more  than  one- 
quarter  (%)  of  an  inch  or  in  the  flange  of  more  than  one-half 
(5/2)  of  an  inch  in  depth,  and  these  shall  not,  in  the  judgment  of 
the  Inspector,  be  in  any  individual  rail  so  numerous  or  of  such 
a  character  as  to  render  it  unfit  for  recognized  No.  2  rail  uses. 
The  quantity  of  No.  2  rails  shall  not  exceed  the  quantity  speci- 
fied. 

1-25.  Guard  rails  shall  be  of  open-hearth  steel  and  identical 
in  all  respects  to  those  specified  above  for  track  rails,  excepting 
that  No.  2  quality  rails  may  be  used  for  guard  rails.  All  guard 
rails  shall  have  one  flange  planed  or  sheared  as  shown  on  the 
drawings. 

1-26.  All  rails  must  be  loaded  in  the  presence  of  the  Inspector 
in  an  approved  manner  which  shall  guarantee  their  arrival  at 
destination  in  the  same  condition  as  when  loaded.  The  mill  shall 
furnish  the  Inspector  with  a  copy  of  the  shipping  notice.  The 
Inspector  shall  have  access  to  all  the  mill  records  pertaining  to 
the  finished  material  subject  to  his  inspection,  and  he  shall  be  per- 
mitted to  make  such  copy  or  note  of  the  same  as  he  may  deem 
expedient. 


172 


SUBDIVISION  2 
ROLLED  MANGANESE  RAIL 

2-1.  In  these  specifications  where  manganese  steel  is  referred 
to,  it  shall  be  understood  to  mean  the  special  steel  having  a  chemi- 
cal composition  as  specified  hereinafter  for  rolled  manganese 
steel,  whether  this  steel  is  manufactured  by  the  open-hearth  pro- 
cess or  in  any  other  manner. 

2-2.  The  section  of  all  rails  shall  be  that  known  as  the  Amer- 
ican Railway  Association  Standard,  Type  "B,"  100  pounds,  ap- 
proved 1912,  and  shall  conform  accurately  to  the  section  and 
dimensions  of  this  standard.  An  allowance  of  one-sixty-fourth 
(1/64)  of  an  inch  under,  and  one-thirty-second  (1/32)  of  an 
inch  over,  will  be  allowed  for  variations  in  the  specified  height, 
and  a  variation  of  one-sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  will  be  per- 
mitted in  width  of  flange,  provided  the  variations  in  weight 
specified  hereinafter  are  not  exceeded ;  but  no  variations  will  be 
allowed  in  the  dimensions  affecting  the  fit  of  splice  bars. 

2-3.  The  weight  of  the  rails  specified  in  the  order  shall  be 
maintained  as  nearly  as  possible  to  one  hundred  and  one  (101) 
pounds  per  yard  of  rail.  A  variation  of  one-half  (l/2)  of  one 
(  T  )  per  centum  from  the  calculated  weight  of  section  as  applied 
to  the  entire  amount  of  rail  called  for  will  be  allowed.  Rails 
accepted  will  be  paid  for  according  to  actual  weights,  within  the 
above  limits. 

2-4.  The  standard  length  of  track  rails  shall  be  thirty- 
three  (33)  feet  at  a  temperature  of  sixty  (60)  degrees  Fahren- 
heit. Short  lengths  by  even  feet  down  to  twenty-five  (25) 
feet  will  be  accepted  to  an  amount  not  exceeding  ten  (10)  per 
centum  of  the  total  order.  Special  lengths  shall  be  furnished  as 
specified. 

2-5.  Variations  in  individual  rails  of  not  more  than  three- 
eighths  (%)  of  an  inch  from  the  normal  length  will  be  accepted. 
Roth  ends  of  all  short  lengths  of  rails  shall  be  painted  green. 
The  length  and  location  mark  of  special  length  rails  shall  be 
painted  on  the  side  of  the  web. 


173 


SPECIFICATIONS- — ROLLED    MANGANESE    RAIL 

2-6.  The  name  of  the  maker,  the  weight  and  type  of  the 
rail,  and  the  month  and  year  of 'manufacture  shall  be  rolled  in 
raised  letters  and  figures  on  the  side  of  the  web.  The  number 
of  the  heat  and  a  number  representing  the  number  of  the  ingot 
shall  be  stamped  on  each  rail  so  as  not  to  be  covered  by  the 
splice  bars  and  a  letter  shall  be  stamped  on  the  side  of  the  web 
of  each  rail  to  indicate  the  position  in  the  ingot  from  which  that 
rail  was  rolled.  The  letter  "M"  shall  be  rolled  or  stamped  upon 
each  manganese  rail. 

2-7.  Circular  holes,  as  indicated  on  the  drawings,  shall  l.c 
provided  for  splice  bars,  separators  and  bonds.  They  shall  con- 
form accurately  to  the  dimensions  shown,  and  shall  be  free  from 
burrs.  These  holes  must  be  cylindrical  and  not  conical. 

2-8.  The  distance  between  the  supports  of  the  rails  in  the 
gagging  press  shall  be  not  less  than  forty-two  (42)  inches.  All 
rails  after  finishing  shall  be  smooth  on  heads,  straight  in  line 
and  surface,  without  twists,  kinks  or  waves,  and  shall  be  entirely 
free  from  injurious  defects  or  flaws  of  any  kind.  All  rail  ends 
shall  be  sawed  square,  a  variation  of  more  than  one-thirty-second 
(1/32)  of  an  inch  not  being  acceptable,  and  all  burrs  shall  be 
removed  and  ends  made  smooth. 

2-9.  The  entire  process  of  manufacture  shall  be  in  accord- 
ance with  the  best  current  practice  at  the  time  of  manufacture. 

All  ingots  shall  be  kept  in  a  vertical  position  until  the  interior 
has  solidified.  No  bled  ingots  shall  be  used.  Sufficient  top 
discard  shall  be  made  to  secure  sound  rails,  and  care  shall  be 
taken  to  avoid  burning  in  reheating.  The  end  of  the  bloom  or 
the  rail  formed  from  the  top  of  the  ingot  shall  be  sheared  until 
the  entire  face  shows  sound  metal.  All  metal  sheared  from  the 
top  of  the  ingot,  either  from  the  bloom  or  the  rail,  shall  be  con- 
sidered top  discard. 

2-10.  The  methods  and  appliances  used  in  the  manufacture 
of  the  rails  shall  be  such  as  to  give  uniform  results  both  as  to 
chemical  composition  and  physical  characteristics. 

2-1 1.     All  rails  shall  be  quenched  in  a  water  bath  within  a 

174 


SPECIFICATIONS ROLLED    MANGANESE    RAIL 

period  of  a  minute  and  twenty  seconds  after  leaving  the  final 
pass.  In  case,  on  any  occasion,  for  any  cause  whatsoever,  this 
limit  of  time  before  quenching  is  exceeded,  such  rails  shall  be 
especially  marked  and  each  rail  tested  as  follows: 

A  bend  test  shall  be  made  of  both  ends  of  the  rail,  by  taking 
a  two  (2)  inch  section  from  each  end  and  bending  the  head  down 
towards  the  base,  cold,  under  the  steam  hammer.  In  case  either 
test  piece  breaks  before  the  head  has  passed  through  an  angle 
of  ninety  (90)  degrees,  a  further  test  piece  shall  be  cut  from  the 
same  end  of  the  rail  from  which  the  broken  section  was  cut  and 
retested.  If  this  retest  breaks,  the  rail  shall  be  re-treated  and 
tested  as  before  and  no  rail  shall  be  accepted  until  it  has  satis- 
factorily passed  this  test. 

2-12.  The  chemical  composition  of  each  heat  of  manganese 
steel  from  which  the  rails  are  rolled,  determined  as  herein  pre- 
scribed, shall  be  within  the  following  limits: 

Carbon 0.95  to  1.35     per  centum 

Phosphorus    not  over  .100  per  centum 

Manganese   10.50  to  15.00    per  centum 

2-13.  In  order  to  ascertain  whether  the  chemical  composi- 
tion is  in  accordance  with  the  requirements,  the  makers  shall 
furnish  the  Inspector  with  a  chemical  analysis  of  the  elements 
carbon,  manganese,  silicon,  phosphorus  and  sulphur,  for  each 
heat. 

On  request  of  the  Inspector,  the  manufacturer  shall  furnish  a 
portion  of  the  test  ingot  for  check  analysis. 

2-14.     Tests  on  rails  shall  be  made  to  determine: 

(a)  Ductility  or  toughness  as  opposed  to  brittleness. 

(b)  Soundness. 

The  physical  qualities  shall  be  determined  by  the  drop  test. 

2-15.  The  drop  testing  machine  used  shall  be  the  standard 
of  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association. 

(a)  The  tup  shall  weight  two  thousand  (2,000)  pounds,  and 
have  a  striking  face  with  a  radius  of  five  (5)  inches. 

175 


SPECIFICATIONS ROLLED    MANGANESE    RAIL 

(b)  The  anvil  block  shall  weigh  twenty  thousand   (20,000) 
pounds  and  be  supported  on  springs. 

(c)  The  supports  for  the  test  pieces  shall  be  spaced  three 
(3)   feet  between  centres  and  shall  be  a  part  of,  and  firmly  se- 
cured to,  the  anvil.     The  bearing  surfaces  of  the  supports  shall 
have  a  radius  of  five  (5)  inches. 

2-16.  The  drop  test  shall  be  made  on  a  piece  of  rail  not  less 
than  four  (4)  feet  and  not  more  than  six  (6)  feet  long.  These 
drop  test  pieces  shall  be  selected  from  the  top  end  of  the  top  rail, 
from  one  of  the  ingots  of  each  heat  in  each  pit.  These  rails 
shall  be  placed  head  upwards  on  the  supports  and  the  various 
sections  shall  be  subjected  to  impact  of  the  tup  falling  free  from 
a  height  of  twenty  (20)  feet. 

2-17.  If  any  rail  breaks  when  subjected  to  less  than  three 
(3)  blows  under  the  drop,  two  (2)  additional  tests  shall  be  made 
on  the  top  rails  from  the  same  heat  and  pit.  If  either  of  these 
retests  fails,  all  of  the  top  rails  of  this  heat  in  the  pit  in  which 
they  were  heated  shall  be  rejected.  Two  (2)  tests  shall  then 
be  cut  from  the  second  rails  from  the  same  heat  and  pit  and  if 
both  of  these  tests  meet  the  above  requirements,  all  the  remain- 
ing rails  from  that  heat  in  that  pit  shall  be  accepted.  If  either 
of  these  rails  fails  all  the  second  rails  from  that  heat  in  that  pit 
shall  be  rejected.  Then  two  (2)  tests  shall  be  cut  from  the 
third  rails  and  tested,  and  so  on  until  all  the  rails  from  the  heat 
in  that  pit  have  been  tested. 

The  report  of  the  drop  test  shall  state  the  atmospheric  tem- 
perature at  the  time  the  test  was  made.  The  temperature  of  the 
test  pieces  when  tested  shall  not  be  less  than  sixty  (60)  degrees 
Fahrenheit,  nor  greater  than  one  hundred  and  twenty  (120)  de- 
grees Fahrenheit. 

2-18.  All  rails  improperly  drilled  or  straightened,  or  from 
which  burrs  have  not  been  properly  removed  as  specified,  shall 
be  rejected  until  such  time  as  these  defects  have  been  corrected. 

2-19.  All  rails  shall  be  loaded  in  the  presence  of  the  Inspec- 
tor. 


176 


SUBDIVISION  3 
TRACK  RAIL  SPLICE  BARS 

3-1.  Splice  bars  shall  be  of  a  design  approved  by  the  Com- 
mission and  in  accordance  with  the  drawings.  Wherever  the 
words  "splice  bar"  are  mentioned  in  the  drawings  or  specifica- 
tions, they  shall  mean  the  splice  bar  complete,  including  any  base 
supporting  plate,  but  not  including  bolts,  nuts,  clips  or  any  fasten- 
ings. 

3-2.  The  splice  bars  for  rail  joints  shall  be  for  four  (4) 
bolts  and  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  drawings.  All  bolt 
holes  shall  be  punched  without  bulging  or  distorting  the  sec- 
tion, and  bars  shall  be  cut  to  proper  length  and  slotted  for  the 
spikes ;  punching  and  slotting  shall  be  accurately  done  in  one 
operation  and  at  a  temperature  of  not  less  than  seven  hundred 
and  fifty  (750)  degrees  Centigrade. 

3-3.  The  splice  bar  shall  be  twenty-six  (26)  inches  long, 
smoothly  rolled,  free  from  cracks  and  other  imperfections  and 
true  to  template  and  dimensions,  and  shall  have  the  name  of 
the  maker  and  the  year  of  manufacture  rolled  in  raised  letters 
on  the  side  of  the  bar. 

3-4.  The  material  shall  be  steel,  manufactured  by  the 
open-hearth  process.  The  chemical  composition  shall  be: 

Carbon,  not  less  than  four-tenths  (0.4)  per  centum. 
Phosphorus,  not  to  exceed  four  hundredths  (0.04)  per 
centum. 

3-5.  All  test  pieces  for  determining  tensile  strength  shall 
be  cut  from  the  rollec}  bar,  and  shall  have  a  uniform  sectional 
area  of  not  less  than  one-half  (J^)  square  inch. 

A  rectangular  test  bar  cut  from  full  section  shall  stand 
bending  cold  through  ninety  (90)  degrees  around  an  arc 
whose  radius  equals  the  thickness  of  the  rectangular  piece, 
without  sign  of  fracture  on  the  outside  of  bent  portion. 

3-6.  The  steel  must  be  capable  of  sustaining  an  ultimate 
breaking  stress  of  not  less  than  eighty  thousand  (80,000) 
pounds  per  square  inch,  with  an  elastic  limit  of  fifty  (50)  per 
centum  of  the  ultimate  strength,  an  elongation  percentage 
measured  in  two  (2)  inches,  of  one  million  five  hundred  thou- 
sand (1,500,000)  divided  by  tensile  strength  in  pounds  per 
square  inch,  and  a  reduction  of  area  at  a  point  of  fracture  of 
not  less  than  twenty-five  (25)  per  centum. 


SUBDIVISION  4 
TIE  PLATES 

4-1.  Tie  plates  shall  be  manufactured  in  accordance  with 
the  drawings.  All  plates  shall  be  provided  with  holes  for 
spikes.  Plates  must  have  the  type  letter  rolled  on  the  top  side 
outside  of  the  base  of  rail. 

4-2.  Tie  plates  must  be  manufactured  from  rolled  steel 
of  uniform  quality  made  by  either  the  open-hearth  or  Besse- 
mer process,  but  preferably  the  open-hearth.  The  steel  used 
must  be  capable  of  sustaining  an  ultimate  stress  of  fifty-six 
thousand  (56,000)  to  sixty-five  thousand  (65,000)  pounds  per 
square  inch,  and  must  have  an  elastic  limit  of  not  less  than 
one-half  (l/2)  the  ultimate  strength;  an  elongation  of  not  less 
than  twenty  (20)  per  centum,  measured  on  a  length  of  eight 
(8)  inches,  and  a  reduction  in  area  at  point  of  fracture  of  not 
less  than  forty  (40)  per  centum.  A  plate  of  full  section  must 
withstand  bending  cold  at  right  angles  to  the  fibre  through  an 
angle  of  one  hundred  and  eighty  (180)  degrees,  doubled  on 
itself  without  sign  of  fracture  on  outside  surface  of  the  bent 
portion. 

4-3.  Test  pieces  fourteen  (14)  inches  in  length,  with  uni- 
form section  and  end  area  of  not  less  than  one-half  (J^)  a 
square  inch  shall  be  cut  from  the  finished  material  and  tested 
for  tensile  strength. 

4-4.  Tie  plates  must  be  free  from  injurious  cracks,  seams 
and  other  imperfections.  They  must  be  accurately  rolled  to 
the  specified  section.  The  spike  holes  shall  be  punched  accu- 
rately and  from  the  top  wherever  possible,  clean  cut,  without 
burrs  and  the  plates  must  not  be  cracked  or  bent  out  of  shape 
in  punching.  Subject  to  the  following  allowances,  the  form 
and  dimensions  of  the  plates  shall  conform  to  the  drawings :  The 
length  and  width  shall  vary  not  more  than  one-eighth  (}£)  of  an 
inch  from  the  dimensions  shown.  All  variations  in  length  shall 
be  left  on  the  inside  end  of  the  plate.  The  distance  from  the 
shoulder  to  the  outside  end  of  the  plate  must  be  made  uniform. 

4-5.  Tie  plates  shall  be  wired  together  in  bundles  of  uni- 
form number,  not  to  exceed  seventy-five  (75)  pounds  in 
weight,  and  properly  tagged  by  the  Inspector.  The  various 
types  of  tie  plates,  except  special  work  plates,  shall  be  wired 
separately. 


SUBDIVISION  5 
CUT  TRACK  SPIKES 

5-1.  Spikes  shall  have  five-eighths  ($/&)  inch  square  shank 
and  shall  be  six  (6)  inches  long  over  all,  and  shaped  in  accord- 
ance with  the  drawings. 

5-2.  All  material  for  spikes  must  be  open-hearth  steel  of 
uniform  character.  The  steel  must  be  capable  of  sustaining 
an  ultimate  stress  of  fifty-six  thousand  (56,000)  to  sixty-five 
thousand  (65,000)  pounds  per  square  inch,  with  an  elongation 
of  not  less  than  twenty  (20)  per  centum,  measured  on  a  length 
of  eight  (8)  inches  and  a  reduction  of  area  at  point  of  fracture 
of  not  less  than  forty  (40)  per  centum. 

5-3.  The  chemical  analysis  of  the  metal  must  show  it  to 
contain  not  more  than  five-hundredths  (.05)  per  centum  phos- 
phorus. 

5-4.  When  the  head  of  the  spike  is  bent  backward  cold  ii 
shall  show  no  signs  of  fracture.  When  the  spike  is  twisted 
cold  one  and  one-half  (1^2)  turns  it  shall  show  no  signs  of 
fracture.  A  finished  spike  must  stand  bending  cold  through 
one  hundred  eighty  (180)  degrees  flat  on  itself  without  signs 
of  fracture  on  the  outside  bent  portion.  All  tests  for  tensile 
strength  to  be  made  from  full  section  bars  cut  from  stock 
material;  test  pieces  to  be  not  less  than  sixteen  (16)  inches 
long.  The  above  series  of  tests  shall  be  made  on  each  order 
if  required;  the  analysis  of  each  heat  or  blow  must  be  fur- 
nished to  the  Inspector  as  required. 

5-5.  Spikes  must  be  free  from  injurious  cracks  or  seams, 
must  be  finished  in  a  first-class  workmanlike  manner  and  shall 
conform  to  the  dimensions  shown  on  drawings  with  the  fol- 
lowing allowances:  The  thickness  shall  not  vary  more  than 
one-thirty-second  (1/32)  of  an  inch  from  the  dimensions 
shown.  The  length  shall  be  not  less,  nor  over  one-quarter 
(y±)  of  an  inch  more,  than  the  dimensions  shown.  The  thick- 
ness of  the  head  shall  vary  not  more  than  one-sixteenth  (1/16) 
of  an  inch  from  the  dimensions  shown.  The  angle  of  the  hook 
shall  vary  not  more  than  one  (i)  degree  from  that  shown  on 

179 


SPECIFICATIONS — CUT   TRACK    SPIKES 

the  drawings.  The  spikes  must  he  neatly  formed,  free  from 
hurrs  and  rough  edges,  and  have  well-shaped  heads  and  sharp 
points. 

5-6.  All  spikes  must  be  carefully  selected  and  packed  in 
good,  serviceable  kegs,  securely  hooped  and  containing  two 
hundred  (200)  pounds  each.  All  kegs  shall  be  plainly  marked 
as  to  material,  size  and  number  of  spikes  contained  therein 
and  name  of  manufacturer.  The  kegs  must  be  left  open  until 
the  spikes  are  approved,  after  which  the  kegs  shall  be  headed 
in  the  presence  of  the  Inspector  and  stamped  by  him. 


180 


SUBDIVISION  6 
SCREW  SPIKES  AND  LAG  SCREWS 

6-1.  Screw  spikes,  lag  screws  and  all  other  articles  called 
for  on  the  drawings  or  in  the  specifications  to  be  made  of  screw 
spike  material  shall  be  manufactured  in  accordance  with  the 
following  specifications.  Wherever  in  these  specifications  the 
words  "screw  spikes"  are  used  they  shall  be  taken  to  mean 
any  of  the  above  mentioned  articles. 

6-2.  All  material  for  screw  spikes  must  be  of  open-hearth 
steel  of  uniform  character.  The  steel  must  be  capable  of  sus- 
taining an  ultimate  stress  of  fifty-six  thousand  (56,000)  to 
sixty-five  thousand  (65,000)  pounds  per  square  inch,  with  an 
elongation  of  not  less  than  twenty  (20)  per  centum  measured 
en  a  length  of  eight  (8)  inches  and  a  reduction  of  area  at  point 
of  fracture  of  not  less  than  forty  (40)  per  centum. 

6-3.  The  chemical  analysis  of  the  metal  must  show  it  to 
contain  not  more  than  five  hundredths  (.05)  per  centum  phos- 
phorus and  not  more  than  five  hundredths  (.05)  per  centum 
sulphur. 

6-4.  A  finished  screw  spike  must  stand  bending  cold 
through  ninety  (90)  degrees  without  signs  of  fracture  on  the 
outside  bent  portion.  All  tests  for  tensile  strength  shall  be 
made  from  full  section  bars  cut  from  stock  material,  test 
pieces  to  be  not  less  than  sixteen  (16)  inches  long.  The  above 
series  of  tests  shall  be  made  on  each  order  if  required ;  analysis 
of  each  heat  or  blow  must  be  furnished  to  the  Inspector  as 
required. 

6-5.  Screw  spikes  must  have  rolled  threads  and  be  free 
from  all  injurious  cracks,  seams  or  rough  edges  and  must  be 
finished  smooth  and  in  a  first-class,  workmanlike  manner,  and 
shall  conform  accurately  to  the  dimensions  shown  on  the 
drawings.  The  heads  must  be  symmetrical  about  the  shank 
axis  produced. 

6-6.  When  the  screw  spikes  are  shipped  they  shall  be 
properly  oiled  to  prevent  rusting  and  shall  be  packed  in  good, 

181 


SPECIFICATIONS— SCREW    SPIKES    AND    LAG    SCREWS 

serviceable  kegs  or  boxes.  All  kegs  or  boxes  must  be  plainly 
marked  as  to  material,  type  and  number  of  screw  spikes  con- 
tained therein  and  name  of  manufacturer;  all  kegs  or  boxes 
must  be  left  open  until  the  screw  spikes  are  approved,  after 
which  kegs  or  boxes  shall  be  headed  in  the  presence  of  the 
Inspector  and  stamped  by  him. 


182 


SUBDIVISION  7 
TREATED  AND  UNTREATED  TIES  AND  TIMBERS 

7-1.  All  ties  and  timbers  shall  be  sawed  or  hewed  with 
the  grain  of  the  wood  and  square  butted,  shall  have  straight 
and  square  edges  and  shall  be  close  grained,  and  free  from 
bark,  loose,  large  or  decayed  knots,  splits,  shakes,  rots,  or  any 
other  defect  which  may  impair  their  strength  or  durability  for 
the  use  specified. 

7-2.  Sap  wood  in  untreated  ties  and  timber  shall  be  lim- 
ited by  the  following: 

In  no  case  will  any  stick  be  accepted  with  less  than  three 
(3)  heart  corners  or  with  more  than  one  (i)  inch  of  sap  on 
the  fourth  corner,  or  with  more  than  two  and  one-half  (2^2) 
inches  of  sap  measured  across  the  face,  anywhere  in  the  length 
of  the  piece. 

7-3.  Sap  wood  will  be  permitted  in  treated  ties  and  tim- 
bers, provided  the  other  requirements  of  the  specifications  are 
fulfilled. 

7-4.  Yellow  pine  shall  be  taken  to  mean  first  growth,  long 
leaf  Southern  yellow  pine. 

7-5.  Red  oak  shall  be  taken  to  mean  what  is  locally  known 
as  red,  black,  Spanish,  scarlet,  pin  shingle  or  laurel  oak,  suit- 
able for  the  use  specified  and  meeting  the  other  requirements 
of  these  specifications.  Any  stick  having  one-twentieth  (1/20) 
or  more  of  its  cross  section  bored  by  worm  holes  will  be 
rejected. 

7-6.  White  oak  shall  be  taken  to  mean  sound  and  living 
white  oak,  suitable  for  the  use  specified  and  meeting  the  other 
requirements  of  these  specifications. 

7-7.  Wherever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  ties  or 
timbers  are  specified  hewed,  they  shall  be  well  and  smoothly 
hewed  with  straight  and  parallel  faces  out  of  wind.  All  hewed 
ties  or  timbers  shall  have  a  thickness  and  width  of  not  less 


183 


SPECIFICATIONS TREATED  AND  UNTREATED  TIES  AND  TIMBERS 

than  the  dimensions  specified.  Variations  will  be  permitted 
of  one-half  (J^)  of  an  inch  over  in  thickness  and  two  (2) 
inches  over  in  width  of  face  and  one-half  (J/£)  of  an  inch  under 
or  over  the  lengths  specified. 

7-8.  Where  sawed  ties  or  timbers  are  specified  a  varia- 
tion in  width  or  depth  of  more  than  one-quarter  (J4)  of  an 
inch  or  in  the  length  of  more  than  one-half  (J/£)  of  an  inch 
from  the  dimensions  specified  will  not  be  accepted. 

7-9.  Where  ties  or  timbers  are  specified  dressed  they 
shall  be  dressed  on  all  sides  but  in  no  case  shall  the  dimen- 
sions of  the  finished  ties  or  timbers  vary  from  the  specified 
dimensions  by  more  than  one-eighth  (y&)  of  an  inch  in  slat- 
ting or  by  more  than  one-quarter  (J4)  of  an  inch  in  all  other 
ties  or  timbers  and  in  all  cases  the  finished  timbers  shall  be 
uniform  in  thickness  for  an  entire  order.  A  variation  in  length 
of  such  ties  or  timbers  of  more  than  one-half  (J/£)  of  an  inch 
will  not  be  accepted. 

7-10.  Where  ties  or  timbers  are  specified  dressed  to  exact 
dimensions,  they  shall  be  dressed  on  all  sides  and  cut  to  length 
exactly  to  the  dimensions  specified  and  no  variation  from  such 
dimensions  will  be  accepted. 

7-11.  Wherever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  Class  A 
ties  are  specified,  they  shall  be  taken  to  mean  untreated  or 
treated,  as  specified,  yellow  pine  sawed  cross-ties  for  use  in 
ballasted  track  in  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad  or  other 
locations  as  determined  by  the  Commission.  When  so  specifier!, 
Class  A  ties  shall  be  drilled  for  screw  spikes. 

7-12.  Wherever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  Class 
B  ties  are  specified,  they  shall  be  taken  to  mean  red  oak  cross- 
ties,  untreated  or  treated  as  specified,  for  use  in  concrete  track. 
All  Class  B  ties  shall  be  dressed  to  exact  dimensions  and 
drilled  for  anchor  bolts  and  screw  spikes  as  shown  on  the 
drawings.  The  ties  shall  be  sawed  with  the  heart  as  near  the 
bottom  as  possible. 

7-13.     Wherever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  Class  C 

184 


SPECIFICATIONS TREATED  AND  UNTREATED  TIES  AND  TIMBERS 

ties  are  ep.ecified,  they  shall  be  taken  to  mean  yellow  pine 
cross-ties,  untreated  or  treated  as  specified,  for  use  in  concrete 
track.  All  Class  C  ties  sha'l  be  dressed  to  .exact  dimensions 
and  drilled  for  ancnor  bolts  and  screw  spikes  as  shown  on  the 
drawings.  The  ties  shall  be  sawed  with  the  heart  as  near  the 
bottom  as  possible. 

7-14.  Wherever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  Class  D 
ties,  guard  timbers,  joists  or  flooring  are  specified,  they  shall 
be  taken  to  mean  dressed  yellow  pine  ties  or  timber  for  use 
on  elevated  structures.  All  Class  D  eight  (8)  inch  by  eight 
(8)  inch  ties  shall  be  dressed  to  exact  width  and  depth.  When 
called  for,  Class  D  ties  shall  be  drilled  for  screw  spikes. 

The  minimum  length  of  guard  timbers  shall  be  twenty- 
eight  (28)  feet  and  the  lengths  shall  vary  from  this  dimension 
in  multiples  of  one  (i)  foot  six  (6)  inches.  Fifty  (50)  per 
centum  of  the  total  amount  shall  be  thirty-one  (31)  feet  or 
over. 

The  minimum  length  of  slatting  shall  be  eighteen  (18)  feet 
and  lengths  shall  vary  in  multiples  of  four  (4)  feet  six  (6) 
inches  from  this  dimension.  At  least  fifty  (50)  per  centum  of 
the  total  amount  shall  be  twenty-two  (22)  feet  six  (6)  inches 
or  over. 

7-15.  Wherever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  Class  E 
ties  are  specified,  they  shall  be  taken  to  mean  yellow  pine 
hewed  cross-ties  treated  or  untreated,  as  specified,  for  use  in 
ballasted  track.  When  so  specified,  Class  E  ties  shall  be 
drilled  for  screw  spikes. 

7-16.  Wherever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  Class  F 
ties  are  specified,  they  shall  be  taken  to  mean  white  oak  cross 
ties,  treated  or  untreated,  as  specified,  for  use  in  special  work 
or  any  other  point  required  by  the  Commission.  All  Class  F  ties 
or  timbers  shall  be  dressed  to  exact  dimensions  specified.  When 
so  required,  Class  F  ties  shall  be  drilled  for  screw  spikes. 

7-17.  W7henever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  ties  are 
specified  drilled  for  screw  spikes  or  anchor  bolts,  the  drilling 
shall  be  accurately  done  through  metal  templates.  The  finished 
hole  shall  be  circular  and  of  true  dimensions  in  the  finished 

185 


SPECIFICATIONS TREATED  AND  UNTREATED  TIES  AND  TIMBERS 

timber  and  in  treated  ties  after  treatment.  All  drilling  or 
other  working  of  treated  ties  shall  be  done  before  the  ties  are 
creosoted. 

7-18.  Whenever  in  the  drawings  or  specifications  treated 
ties  or  timbers  are  specified,  they  shall  be  manufactured  in 
accordance  with  these  specifications  and  treated  with  not  less 
than  ten  (10)  pounds  of  creosote  oil  per  cubic  foot  in  a  man- 
ner and  as  specified  hereinafter. 

7-19.  Whenever  possible,  all  treated  ties  and  timber  shall 
be  thoroughly  air-seasoned  before  being  treated  with  the  creo- 
sote oil.  Where  it  is  necessary  to  treat  ties  and  timbers  before 
they  have  been  thoroughly  air-seasoned  they  shall  be  seasoned  by 
the  action  of  live  steam  admitted  into  the  treating  cylinder  at 
such  a  rate  as  to  secure  twenty  (20)  pounds  per  square  inch 
of  steam  pressure  within  thirty  (30)  to  fifty  (50)  minutes  as 
shown  by  gauge  connected  to  the  cylinder.  This  pressure  shall  be 
maintained  for  periods  of  from  one  (i)  to  ten  (10)  hours 
depending  upon  the  character  and  condition  of  the  timber ; 
but  the  pressure  shall  at  no  time  be  allowed  to  exceed  twenty 
(20)  pounds  per  square  inch. 

During  the  process  of  steaming,  air  and  condensation  shall 
be  frequently  blown  off  through  a  valve  located  at  the  lowest 
point  of  the  cylinder. 

7-20.  When  the  steaming  process  is  completed  the  steam 
in  the  cylinder  shall  be  blown  off,  and  a  vacuum  of  not  less 
than  that  equivalent  to  twenty-four  (24)  inches  of  mercury, 
at  sea  level,  produced.  The  vacuum  shall  be  maintained  at 
least  one  hour,  or  until  no  moisture  comes  from  the  cylinder. 

7-21.  The  creosote  oil  shall  then  be  introduced  into  the 
cylinder  without  breaking  the  vacuum  until  the  cylinder  is 
entirely  filled.  Adequate  pressure  shall  then  be  applied  and 
maintained,  until  the  specified  absorption  is  obtained.  The 
cylinder  shall  be  provided  with  an  air-vent  to  enable  it  to  be 
kept  entirely  filled  during  the  time  that  pressure  is  on. 

7-22.     The  creosote  oil  shall  be  heated  to  a  temperature  of 


186 


SPECIFICATIONS TREATED  AND  UNTREATED  TIES  AND  TIMBERS 

not  less  than  one  hundred  sixty  (160)  degrees  Fahrenheit,  be- 
fore admission  to  the  cylinder. 

7-23.  The  cylinder  shall  be  provided  with  sufficient  steam 
coils  to  maintain  a  temperature  of  at  least  one  hundred  sixty 
(160)  degrees  Fahrenheit  therein  during  the  entire  time  that 
vacuum  is  being  applied  and  oil  is  being  introduced  and  held 
under  pressure. 

7-24.  After  the  cylinder  is  emptied  of  oil,  air  pressure  shall 
be  again  applied  to  render  the  penetration  more  perfect  and 
to  make  the  outside  surfaces  of  the  timbers  drier  and  cleaner. 

7-25.  When  the  timber  is  properly  air-seasoned  so  that  it 
ib  possible  to  secure  the  specified  absorption  of  oil  without 
steaming,  the  steaming  may  be  omitted,  in  which  case  the 
method  of  treatment  for  such  timbers  shall  begin  with  the  cre- 
ation of  a  vacuum  as  is  herein  specified. 

7-26.  The  timbers  shall  be  treated  by  the  full  cell  process 
by  the  most  approved  method  of  steaming,  vacuum  and  pres- 
sure so  as  to  secure  ten  (10)  pounds  of  creosote  oil  per  cubic 
foot  of  timber  remaining  in  the  timber  after  treatment. 

7-27.  The  creosote  shall  be  the  best  obtainable  grade  of 
coal-tar  creosote;  that  is,  it  shall  be  a  pure  product  obtained 
from  coal  gas  tar  or  coke  oven  tar  and  shall  be  free  from  any 
tar,  including  coal  gas  tar  and  coke  oven  tar,  oil,  or  residue 
obtained  from  petroleum  or  any  other  source ;  it  shall  be  com- 
pletely liquid  at  thirty-eight  (38)  degrees  centigrade  and  shall 
be  free  from  suspended  matter;  the  specific  gravity  of  the  oil 
yt  thirty-eight  (38)  degrees  centigrade  shall  be  at  least  one 
and  three-hundredths  (1.03).  When  distilled  by  the  common 
method — that  is,  using  an  eight  (8)  ounce  retort,  asbestos 
covered,  with  standard  thermometer,  bulb  one-half  (J^)  inch 
above  the  surface  of  the  oil — the  creosote,  calculated  on  the 
basis  of  the  dry  oil,  shall  give  no  distillate  below  two  hundred 
(200)  degrees  centigrade,  not  more  than  five  (5)  per  centum 
below  two  hundred  and  ten  (210)  degrees  centigrade,  not 
more  than  twenty-five  (25)  per  centum  below  two  hundred 


SPECIFICATIONS — TREATED  AND   UNTREATED  TIES  AND  TIMBERS 

and  thirty-five  (235)  degrees  centigrade,  and  the  residue 
above  three  hundred  and  fifty-five  (355)  degrees  centigrade, 
if  it  exceeds  five  (5)  per  centum  in  quantity,  shall  be  soft. 
The  oil  shall  not  contain  more  than  three  (3)  per  centum 
water. 

7-28.  The  oil  shall  be  analyzed  in  the  manner  specified  by 
the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,  1911  Edition 
of  the  Manual. 


188 


SUBDIVISION  8 
BOLTS,  NUTS  AND  RIVETS 

8-1.  Unless  otherwise  specified,  all  bolts  used  to  connect 
the  rail  and  its  accessories  are  hereinafter  referred  to  as  "track 
bolts,"  and  all  bolts  used  to  fasten  timbers  to  each  other  or  to 
supporting  structure,  are  hereinafter  referred  to  as  "timber 
bolts."  All  bolts  shall  be  made  of  open-hearth  or  other 
approved  process  steel.  If  necessary  to  secure  the  properties 
desired,  the  bolts  may  be  heat  treated.  Bolts  shall  conform  to 
the  following  requirements : 

Track  Bolts     Timber  Bolts 

Elastic  limit,  not  less  than 50,000  35,ooo 

Elongation  in  eight  (8)  inches  not 

less  than 20%  25  °/0 

Reduction  of  area  not  less  than. ..         40%  50% 

The  elastic  limit  shall  in  no  case  be  less  than  fifty  (50)  per 
centum  of  the  ultimate  strength. 

8-2.  Tests  shall  be  made  for  ductility  by  bending  the  bolt 
cold  through  one  hundred  eighty  (180)  degrees  flat  on  itself 
without  fracture  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion.  This  bend 
test  may  be  made  on  the  unthreaded  portion  of  a  finished  bolt 
or  on  a  blank  bolt  or  on  a  test  piece  of  the  same  size  and  same 
grade  of  steel.  The  test  piece  shall  in  any  case  be  subjected 
to  the  same  treatment  as  the  finished  bolt. 

8-3.  Subject  to  the  following  allowances,  bolts  shall  con- 
form strictly  to  the  drawings: 

The  length  shall  not  be  more  than  one-sixteenth  (1/16)  of 
an  inch  less,  or  one-eighth  (*/£)  of  an  inch  more,  than  the  di- 
mensions shown.  The  diameter  of  the  bolt  shall  not  vary 
more  than  one-sixty-fourth  (1/64)  of  an  inch  from  the  dimen- 
sions shown.  The  size  of  the  head  shall  not  vary  more  than 
one-sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  from  the  dimensions  shown. 
The  outside  dimensions  of  the  nut  shall  not  va.ry  more  than 
one-thirty-second  (1/32)  of  an  inch  from  the  dimensions 
shown. 

8-4.  The  heads  and  nuts  shall  be  free  from  checks  or 
burrs  of  any  kind.  The  threads  shall  be  full  and  clean  with 

189 


SPECIFICATIONS BOLTS,     NUTS     AND     RIVETS 

not  less  than  two  (2)  nor  more  than  five  (5)  finger  threads, 
except  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  All  bolts  shall  have  rolled 
01  cut  threads,  as  specified. 

8-5.  Rivets  shall  be  made  of  steel  which  may  contain  a 
maximum  of  four  hundredths  (0.04)  per  centum  basic  phos- 
phorus, four  hundredths  (0.04)  per  centum  acid  phosphorus 
and  four  hundredths  (0.04)  per  centum  sulphur.  It  shall 
have  an  ultimate  tensile  strength  of  fifty  thousand  (50,000) 
pounds  per  square  inch.  It  shall  bend  flat  upon  itself  without 
fracture  and  when  nicked  and  bent  around  a  bar  of  the  same 
diameter  as  the  rivet  rod  it  shall  give  a  gradual  break  with  a 
fine  silky  uniform  fracture. 

8-6.  The  diameters  of  the  rivets  shall  be  of  full  size  shown 
on  the  drawings,  and  the  diameters  of  the  rivet  holes  shall  be  not 
more  than  one-sixteenth  ( 1/16)  of  an  inch  greater  than  the  diame- 
ters of  the  corresponding  rivets.  The  rivets  shall  be  of  suffi- 
cient length  to  provide  full,  neatly  made  heads  when  driven. 
They  shall  be  driven  tight,  bringing  all  adjacent  parts  into 
contact. 

8-7.  Rivets,  when  not  countersunk  or  flattened,  shall  have 
standard  button  heads  of  uniform  size  for  the  same  size  rivets. 
The  heads  shall  be  full  and  neatly  made  and  concentric  with 
the  holes.  When  the  rivet  heads  are  countersunk  they  shall 
be  flush  with  the  plate  and  fill  the  holes. 

8-8.  When  bolts  are  shipped  each  shall  be  provided  with 
a  nut  and  the  nuts  shall  be  applied  for  at  least  two  (2)  threads. 
The  bolts  and  nuts  shall  be  properly  oiled  to  prevent  rusting. 
The  bolts,  nuts  and  rivets  shall  be  packed  in  serviceable 
kegs.  All  kegs  must  be  plainly  marked  as  to  type  or  class  of 
material,  size  and  number  of  bolts  or  rivets  and  name  of  manu- 
facturer; all  kegs  must  be  left  open  until  the  material  is  ap- 
proved, after  which  they  shall  be  headed  in  the  presence  of 
the  Inspector,  and  stamped  by  him. 


190 


SUBDIVISION  9 
NUT  LOCKS  OR  LOCK  WASHERS 

9-1.     Spiral  spring  lock  washers  of  a  pattern  approved  by  the 
Commission  shall  be  made  of  an  open-hearth  steel  having: 
Phosphors,  not  over  five-hundredths  (.05)  per  centum, 
Sulphur,  not  over  five  hundredths  (.05)  per  centum. 

9-2.  After  the  finished  nut-lock  has  been  subjected  to 
pressure  sufficient  to  compress  it  flat  for  a  period  of  one  (i) 
hour,  its  reaction  shall  not  be  less  than  two-thirds  (2/3)  of  ith 
height  or  thickness  of  section,  provided  thickness  is  less  than 
width  of  section.  If  the  section  is  square,  the  reaction  must 
be  not  less  than  one-half  ( J^)  its  thickness.  If  height  or  thick- 
ness  is  more  than  its  width,  reaction  shall  be  not  less  than  the 
width  of  the  section.  The  nut  locks  or  lock  washers  shall  have 
sufficient  spring  to  resist  a  pressure  of  twelve  thousand 
(12,000)  pounds. 

9-3.  With  one  end  of  the  finished  nut-lock  secured  in  a 
vise,  and  the  opposite  end  twisted  to  forty-five  degrees,  there 
must  be  no  sign  of  fracture.  When  further  twisted  until 
broken,  the  fracture  must  show  a  good  quality  of  steel. 

9-4.  A  sufficient  number  of  tests  will  be  made  to  satisfy 
the  Inspector  that  the  material  meets  with  the  specifications 
in  every  respect. 

9-5.  The  dimensions  and  form  of  the  nut-lock  shall  con- 
form to  the  drawings.  The  inside  diameter  shall  be  such  that  a 
good  fit  is  obtained  around  the  bolt  with  which  the  nut-lock  is  to 
be  used.  The  nut-lock  shall  be  clean,  without  burrs  or  rough 
edges.  The  cross-section  shall  be  uniform  throughout. 

9-6.  When  the  nut-locks  are  shipped  they  shall  be  packed 
ir  good  serviceable  kegs  or  boxes.  All  packages  rnu-st  be 
plainly  marked  as  to  material,  size  and  number  contained 
therein,  and  the  name  of  the  manufacturer ;  all  packages  must 
be  left  open  until  the  nut-locks  are  approved,  after  which  the 
packages  shall  be  headed  in  the  presence  of  the  Inspector  and 
stamped  by  him. 

191 


SUBDIVISION  11 
ANTI-CREEPERS 

ii-i.  Anti-creepers  shall  be  as  shown  on  the  drawings  and 
shall  be  such  that  the  device  may  be  easily  applied  under  full 
ballasted  track  and  in  the  case  of  guarded  rail,  with  a  guard 
in  place  and  shall  be  substantial  enough  to  stand  driving  to 
place  without  overstraining.  The  least  possible  number  of 
movable  parts  is  desirable.  When  applied  they  must  be  in 
position  rigidly  enough  to  carry  the  tie  with  them  without 
slipping.  They  shall  be  made  with  sufficient  take-up  to  per- 
mit proper  tightening,  and  when  in  place  must  not  loosen  suffi- 
ciently to  slip  when  the  rail  slacks  back. 

1 1-2.  Controlling  or  delicate  parts  shall  be  made  of  mate- 
rial which  will  not  rust.  Anti-creepers  made  of  steel  shall 
conform  to  the  following: 

Carbon 08  to  .20  per  centum 

Phosphorus not  more  than  .05  per  centum 

Sulphur not  more  than  .05  per  centum 

Manganese 30  to  .60  per  centum 

Ultimate  strength 40,000  to  50,000  pounds  per  square  inch 

Anti-creepers  made  of  malleable  iron  shall  conform  to  the 
specifications  for  malleable  iron  and  shall  be  of  sufficient 
weight  to  prevent  breakage  and  distortion  in  application  or  in 
service. 

11-3.  When  the  anti-creepers  are  shipped  they  shall  be 
packed  in  good  serviceable  packages  tagged  by  the  Inspector 
and  containing  about  two  hundred  and  fifty  (250)  pounds 
each.  All  packages  shall  be  plainly  marked  as  to  material, 
type  and  number  contained  therein,  and  the  name  of  the  manu- 
facturer. 


192 


SUBDIVISION  12 
BALLAST 

12-1.  Uallast  shall  be  of  sound,  hard,  broken  limestone  or 
sound,  hard,  broken  trap  rock  from  quarries  which  are  ap- 
proved by  the  Commission  as  containing  material  of  the  desired 
quality,  in  accordance  with  these  specifications. 

12-2.  Class  A  ballast  must  be  broken  to  a  form  not  too 
large  to  pass  through  a  one  and  one-quarter  (i^4)  inch  mesh 
screen  and  large  enough  to  be  retained  on  a  one-half  (^)  inch 
mesh  screen  and  must  be  free  from  dirt,  screenings  and  stone 
dust. 

12-3.  Class  B  ballast  must  be  broken  to  a  form  not  too 
large  to  pass  through  a  two  and  one-eighth  (2l/%)  inch  test 
ring  and  not  small  enough  to  pass  through  a  one  (i)  inch  test 
ring,  and  must  be  free  from  dirt,  screenings  or  stone  dust. 

12-4.  For  Class  A  and  Class  B  ballast,  the  following  charac- 
teristics will  govern : 

(a)  Maximum  uniformity  in  composition. 

(b)  Maximum  weight  in  pounds  per  cubic  foot. 

(c)  Least  water  absorption  in  pounds  per  cubic  foot. 

(d)  Greatest  hardness. 

(e)  Greatest  toughness. 

(f)  Least  percentage  of  wear,  not  greater  than  2.3  per 

cent. 

(g)  Crushing  strength,  not  less  than  29,000  Ibs.  per  sq. 

in.,  tested  on  a  i-inch  cube. 

The  method  of  determining  these  characteristics  shall  be 
those  given  in  the  report  of  the  Committee  on  Ballast  of  the 
American  Railway  Engineering  and  Maintenance  of  Way 
Association,  Volume  II,  Part  2,  of  1910,  and  the  method  of 
testing  for  these  qualities  shall  be  as  given  by  this  Committee 
and  developed  by  the  United  States  Department  of  Agricul- 
ture. 


193 


SPECIFICATIONS — BALLAST 

12-5.  The  Contractor  shall  ship  only  such  material  as  will 
fulfill  the  requirements  named.  The  Inspector  will  visit  the 
quarries  and  crushing  plants  from  time  to  time,  and  the  manu- 
facturers must  afford  him  every  facility  for  examining  the 
product  and  the  process  of  manufacture.  No  shipments  may 
be  made  of  material  that  has  been  condemned  by  the  Inspector. 


194 


SUBDIVISION  13 
SPECIAL  WORK 

13-1.  Wherever  in  the  specifications  or  drawings  the 
words  "special  work"  are  used,  they  shall  be  taken  to  mean 
all  of  the  special  work  material  which  the  Contractor  is  required 
to  furnish. 

All  special  work  shall  be  of  the  best  design,  workmanship 
and  material  and  shall  conform  accurately  to  the  drawings 
<-;nd  be  built  up  of  the  material  called  for  on  the  drawings  and 
manufactured  in  accordance  with  these  specifications. 

13-2.  The  gauge  of  track  and  width  of  flangeway  shall  be 
measured  in  a  plane  five-eighths  (^)  of  an  inch  below  the  top 
of  the  rail  and  shall  be  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  The  depth 
of  the  flangeway  shall  be  two  (2)  inches. 

13-3.  The  lead,  connecting,  stock  and  guard  rails  shall  be 
furnished  straight,  curved,  kinked  and  planed  as  called  for  on 
the  drawings  and  in  the  specifications.  Lengths  of  rails  indi- 
cated are  computed  along  the  gauge  lines  and  the  manufac- 
turer shall  make  proper  allowances  before  cutting  to  insure  an 
accurate  fit  in  the  location  for  which  they  are  cut  and  marked. 

13-4.  Expansion  joints  at  all  splices  shall  be  three-six- 
teenths (3/16)  of  an  inch  wide  except  at  insulated  joints  where 
cne-half  (J^)  of  an  inch  shall  be  provided. 


I3~5-  Switch  points  shall  be  made,  as  called  for,  of  man- 
ganese or  open-hearth  rail  of  No.  I  quality.  They  shall  be 
carefully  ground  or  planed  to  insure  perfect  gauge,  flangeway, 
line  and  surface,  and  an  accurate  fit  against  the  head  and  base 
of  the  abutting  rails. 

13-6.  Guarded  switch  points  shall  be  furnished  where 
called  for  on  the  drawings  or  specified.  The  set-in  guard  shall 
be  carefully  fitted  to  the  back  of  the  switch  point  to  insure 
perfect  line,  surface  and  true  flangeway  when  the  point  is 
open,  and  an  accurate  fit  against  the  abutting  rail  when  the 
point  is  closed. 


195 


SPECIFICATIONS — SPECIAL   WORK 

13-7.  The  throw  of  all  switch  points  shall  be  three  and 
three-quarters  (3^4)  inches  measured  at  a  point  opposite  the 
first  switch  rod. 

13-8.  Switch  points  shall  be  reinforced  on  both  sides  with 
steel  plates  rolled  to  fit  the  rail  and  of  thickness  shown  on  the 
drawings.  The  reinforcing  bars  shall  be  secured  to  the  points 
with  three-quarters  (J4)  of  an  inch  rivets,  and  where  a  set  in 
guard  rail  is  used,  they  shall  be  secured  to  the  guard  and  point 
with  one  (i)  inch  rivets  and  bolts,  all  as  indicated  on  the 
drawings.  Care  must  be  taken  to  provide  at  least  one-eighth 
(J/s)  of  an  inch  clearance  between  the  heads  of  all  rivets  and 
bolts  and  the  adjacent  rails. 

13-9.  Housed  switches  shall  be  either  single  or  double 
housed  and  furnished  with  appurtenances  and  as  shown  on 
the  drawings.  Guard  bars  shall  be  of  cast  manganese  steel. 
True  flangeway  shall  be  obtained  throughout,  a  variation  of 
more  than  one-sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  not  being  accept- 
able. The  chairs  supporting  the  guard  bar  shall  be  made  of 
malleable  iron.  The  chairs  and  bars'  shall  accurately  fit  each 
other  and  adjoining  parts  and  clear  all  movable  portions  of 
the  switch  points  and  switch  mechanism. 

13-10.  Switch  plates  for  switches  shall  be  seven  and  one- 
half  (7/^2)  inches  wide,  unless  otherwise  specified;  not  less 
than  one-half  (l/2}  of  an  inch  thick  at  any  point  and  of  suffi- 
cient length  to  provide  for  rail  braces,  housing  chairs  and 
spiking.  They  shall  be  manufactured  "from  three-quarters 
(24)  of  an  inch  plates  which  shall  be  milled  or  forged  to  pro- 
vide suitable  square  shoulders  for  the  rail,  rail  braces,  and  a 
one-quarter  (%)  of  an  inch  riser.  The  riser  shall  extend  over 
the  full  width  of  the  plate  and  shall  be  of  sufficient  length  for 
the  proper  operation  of  the  switch  points. 

13-11.  The  special  plates  called  for  on  the  drawings  shall 
be  manufactured  of  one-half  (/^)  inch  material  of  the  dimen- 
sions shown,  and  shall  be  accurately  fitted  and  punched  in 
the  shop. 


196 


SPECIFICATIONS — SPECIAL   WORK 

13-12.  Bearing  plates,  not  less  than  three-quarters 
uf  an  inch  thick,  shall  .be  furnished  under  all  built  up  rigid 
frogs,  securely  fastened  to  the  frogs  with  standard  malleable 
iron  clips.  These  plates  shall  be  long  enough  to  extend  at 
least  four  (4)  inches  beyond  the  center  line  of  the  outside 
bolts  in  the  body  of  the  frog,  and  of  sufficient  width  to  give 
full  bearing  for  the  clips. 

Bearing  plates  shall  be  furnished  under  all  spring  rail 
frogs,  and  be  securely  fastened  to  the  same  by  three-quarter 
(24)  inch  rivets,  and  be  of  the  dimensions  shown  on  the 
drawings. 

13-13.  All  special  work  plates  including  switch  plates, 
bearing  plates  and  special  plates,  shall  be  manufactured  of 
material  conforming  to  the  requirements  for  standard  tie 
plates. 

13-14.  Switch  rods,  switch  clips,  strap  braces,  foot  guards 
and  anti-creeping  straps  shall  be  manufactured  of  rolled  steel 
and  shall  be  free  from  burrs,  cracks  or  other  imperfections. 

13-15.  Rail  braces,  manufactured  of  malleable  iron,  shall 
be  furnished  with  all  switches  and  for  all  other  locations  indi- 
cated. They  shall  be  accurately  fitted  to  the  rail  and  all  ad- 
joining parts. 

13-16.  Frogs  and  crossings  shall  be  built  up  of  No.  i 
quality  open-hearth  rail,  manganese  rail  and  cast  manganese, 
as  specified.  All  surfaces  shall  accurately  fit  abutting  parts, 
shall  be  true  to  line  and  surface  and  free  from  burrs,  cracks, 
or  other  imperfections.  The  legs  shall  be  so  formed  that 
standard  splice  bars  can  be  used  for  connection  with  adjoin- 
ing rails,  frogs  or  switches. 

13-17.  All  filler  blocks  and  separators  shall  be  manufac- 
tured of  material  specified  on  the  drawings  and  in  the  specifica- 
tions, and  shall  fit  in  the  head  and  base  of  rail  and  the  web  of 
rail  for  a  distance  of  one-half  (^2)  of  an  inch  above  the  base 
and  below  the  head,  respectively,  and  shall  maintain  the  re- 
quired flangeway.  Throat  filler  blocks  shall  fit  the  rails  suffi- 


197 


SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL   WORK 

ciently  well  to  maintain  the  required  spacing.  When  the 
brand  of  the  rail  interferes  with  the  fit  of  the  filler,  the  brand 
shall  be  chipped  off.  Fif.ers  shall  be  grooved  or  cut  to  fit 
over  rivet  heads.  Heel  riser  blocks  shall  be  made  of  high 
carbon  cast  steel,  or  high  carbon  rolled  insert  cast  in  a  cast- 
iron  filler,  and  shall  fit  the  head,  base  and  web  of  rail. 

13-18.  Bolts,  nuts,  nut  locks  and  rivets  shall  be  furnished 
in  accordance  with  the  drawings  and  specifications  for  such  mate- 
rial. Cotter  pins  shall,  when  required,  be  placed  outside  of 
and  close  up  to  the  nut  after  it  is  tightened.  Bolts  must  be 
long  enough  to  allow  the  nuts  to  be  brought  out  from  under 
the  head  of  the  rail,  with  a  suitable  washer,  so  that  they  may 
be  readily  tightened  with  an  ordinary  wrench. 

13-19.  All  bolts,  unless  otherwise  specified,  shall  be  pro- 
vided with  suitable  washers  to  secure  a  square  bearing  under 
head  and  nut,  and  with  approved  head-locks  to  keep  them 
from  turning.  Flat  washers  shall  be  not  less  than  one-half 
(l/2.)  of  an  inch  thick,  and  angle  washers  not  less  than  one- 
quarter  (}4)  of  an  inch  thick  at  the  thin  end.  Washers  shall 
be  not  less  than  three  (3)  inches  long  and  of  ample  width  to 
provide  a  bearing  for  the  head  and  base  of  rail. 

13-20.  Spring  frogs  shall  be  used  where  specified  and 
shall  conform  to  the  drawings  and  the  following  specifica- 
tions : 

The  material  and  workmanship  in  the  frog  proper  shall  be 
as  specified  for  rigid  frogs. 

Springs  shall  be  of  the  best  spring 'steel  material  and  of 
the  dimensions  and  capacity  and  of  a  uniform  quality  speci- 
fied hereinafter.  The  outside  diameter  shall  be  two  and  nine- 
sixteenths  (2-9/16)  inches,  a  variation  of  not  more  than 
three-thirty-seconds  (3/32)  of  an  inch  over  or  under  not  being 
acceptable.  The  free  height  shall  be  four  and  five-eighths 
(4|Mj)  inches,  a  variation  of  more  than  one-eighth  (J/s)  of  an 
inch  over  not  being  acceptable ;  no  variation  under  this  dimen- 
sion will  be  permitted.  The  size  of  bar  shall  be  one-half  (J/2) 
of  an  inch  round,  a  variation  of  more  than  one-sixty-fourth 
(1/64)  of  an  inch  over  or  one-thirty-second  (1/32)  of  an  inch 


SPECIFICATIONS — SPECIAL   WORK 

under  not  being  acceptable.  The  number  of  tapered  or  com- 
plete turns  shall  be  seven  and  one-eighth  (7^)  or  an  equiva- 
lent of  six  and  five-eighths  (6^)  solid  coils.  The  solid  height 
shall  be  three  and  five-sixteenths  (3-5/16)  inches,  a  varia- 
tion of  more  than  one-sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  over  not 
being  acceptable. 

At  a  height  of  three  and  five-eighths  (3^)  inches  each 
spring  must  carry  a  load  of  seventeen  hundred  and  twenty- 
five  (1,725)  pounds,  a  variation  of  more  than  eleven  (n)  per 
centum  over  or  under  not  being  acceptable. 

Material  entering  into  these  springs  must  be  a  commercial 
grade  of  spring  steel  of  analysis  as  follows : 

Carbon .95  to  1.15  per  centum 

Manganese    not  over  .50  per  centum 

Phosphorus    not  over  .15  per  centum 

Silicon    not  over  .10  per  centum 

Sulphur    not  over  .05  per  centum 

Bars  after  being  tapered  on  both  ends  shall  be  coiled  to 
uniform  pitch  and  carefully  dressed  on  both  ends  to  get  a  good 
flat  bearing  surface. 

After  cooling  from  the  coiling  heat,  spring  shall  be  re- 
heated for  tempering  in  a  separate  operation  at  proper  tem- 
pering heat  and  shall  be  quenched  cold  in  a  grade  of  tempering 
oil  especially  suited  to  this  class  of  work.  This  re-heating 
shall  produce  a  fine  granular  structure  of  material.  The 
.springs  shall  then  be  drawn  to  color  in  a  low  temperature  gas 
furnace  of  a  type  approved  by  the  Engineer.  After  this  draw- 
back, springs  shall  be  allowed  to  cool  for  four  hours.  No 
water  or  other  artificial  cooling  agent  shall  be  used. 

All  springs  shall  withstand  the  following  tests:  Immedi- 
ately after  cooling  they  shall  be  driven  down  solid  five  (5) 
times  and  twenty-four  (24)  hours  after  the  first  test  they  shall 
again  be  tested  in  the  same  manner.  After  completion  of  the 
solid  testing  ten  (10)  per  centum  of  each  lot  or  shipment  shall 
then  be  selected  at  random.  Free  height  and  other  measure- 
ments shall  be  taken  of  each  and  every  one  of  the  springs  so 
selected  and  tested  for  the  load  specifications  in  an  approved 
testing  machine.  If  any  of  the  ten  (10)  per  centum  fail  to 
meet  the  requirements  in  any  particular,  each  and  every 

199 


SPECIFICATIONS — SPECIAL   WORK 

spring  of  the  lot  or  shipment  shall  be  given  a  similar  inspec- 
tion and  test  and  all  springs  which  fail  to  meet  the  specifica- 
tions in  every  particular  diall  be  rejected. 

All  springs  shall  be  free  from  surface  defects  and  will  not 
be  acceptable  until  such  surface  defects  are  removed. 

Spring  housings  shall  be  made  of  cast  iron  and  shall  be  of 
such  dimensions  as  to  permit  the  proper  working  of  the 
springs. 

Housings  and  springs  shall  be  attached  to  the  rails  by  a 
one  and  one-quarter  (i}4)  inch  bolt,  double  nutted  and  pro- 
vided with  a  cotter  pin.  The  bolt  shall  be  fitted  with  an  extra 
heavy  wrought  iron  pipe  collar,  extending  between  the  webs 
of  the  wing  rails  of  the  frog.  The  followers  or  bearings  for 
the  outer  ends  of  the  springs  shall  be  of  cast  iron  of  suitable 
thickness  and  of  proper  bevel  and  clearance  to  prevent  bind- 
ing in  the  housings.  All  housings  shall  be  located  at  the 
throat  of  the  frog  as  indicated  on  drawings. 

13-21.  Slip  switches,  with  either  rigid  center  frogs  or 
movable  point  frogs,  as  called  for,  shall  conform  to  the  draw- 
ings ;  and  material  and  workmanship  shall  be  as  specified  for 
frogs  and  switches.  Where  rigid  center  frogs  are  called  for, 
the  curve  connecting  rail  between  the  inside  slip  points  shall 
be  securely  fastened  to  the  plate  under  the  frog,  and  bolted  to 
the  frog. 

13-22.  All  holes  indicated  on  the  drawings  shall  be  pro- 
vided in  all  switch  points,  frogs  and  rails,  for  splice  bars, 
separators,  switch  bar  lugs,  bonds  in  manganese  rail  and  all 
other  appurtenances  shown  on  the  drawings.  They  shall  con- 
form accurately  to  the  dimensions  shown  and  shall  provide  a 
driving  fit  for  frog  bolts  and  the  surrounding  metal  shall  be 
free  from  burrs  or  cracks.  Holes  shall  be  drilled  in  open- 
hearth  rail  and  may  be  punched  in  manganese  rail,  and  shall 
be  cylindrical  and  not  conical.  No  heating  of  manganese  rail 
will  be  permitted  for  the  purpose  of  punching  or  drilling  the 
holes. 

13-23.     In  the  manufacture  of  rolled  manganese  switch 
points,  frogs  and  special  rails,  care  must  be  taken  to  so  pro- 


200 


SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL   WORK 

tect  the  material  in  the  finished  work  from  excessive  heat 
while  burning  along  the  roughing  line,  that  the  rail  beyond 
the  finishing  line  shall  not  be  heated  beyond  a  blue  temper 
color  on  a  ground  spot  where  the  heat  is  most  intense.  The 
roughing  line  shall  in  no  case  be  less  than  one-eighth  (l/&) 
of  an  inch  from  the  finished  line  and  the  one-eighth  (l/%)  of 
an  inch  or  more  of  metal  so  heated  or  damaged  shall  be  care- 
fully ground  off. 

No  heating  shall  be  allowed  for  the  purpose  of  kinking  or 
bending  manganese  rail.  Open-hearth  rails  shall  not  be 
heated  beyond  a  dull  red  for  such  purpose.  Rails  which  are 
not  satisfactorily  bent  in  the  first  instance  and  which  are  re- 
jected therefore  by  the  Inspector,  shall  not  be  re-bent  to  the 
required  position  but  new  rails  shall  be  substituted  therefor. 

All  rails,  whether  furnished  in  frogs,  switches  or  in  lengths, 
shall  be  sawed  square  to  the  center  line  of  rail,  unless  other- 
wise called  for,  a  variation  of  more  than  one-thirty-second 
(1/32)  of  an  inch  not  being  acceptable,  and  all  burrs  shall  be 
removed  and  ends  made  smooth.  No  variation  of  more  than 
one-quarter  (^4)  of  an  inch  from  the  theoretical  lengths  will 
be  allowed. 

13-24.  All  switch  points  and  frogs  after  inspection  'and 
before  shipment  shall  be  painted  one  coat  of  black  carbon 
paint.  No  paint,  tar  or  other  covering  shall  be  used  before 
inspection. 

13-25.  All  material  shall  be  given  suitable  shop  marks, 
designating  the  portion  number  and  the  part  number,  corre- 
sponding to  marks  given  on  the  drawings,  and  these  markings 
shall  also  appear  on  the  drawings  furnished  by  the  manu- 
facturer. This  marking  shall  be  carefully  arranged  to  in- 
sure the  proper  and  easy  assembling  of  the  material  in  the 
field. 

13-26.  Before  any  of  the  special  work  is  shipped,  the 
several  parts  shall  be  assembled  and  the  whole  checked  by 
the  Inspector  to  insure  proper  fit  and  conformity  to  the  draw- 
ings. 

13-27.        The    Contractor    shall    prepare    detail    drawings, 

201 


SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL    WORK 

and  an  assembly  drawing  made  to  a  scale  of  one-quarter 
inch  to  one  (i)  foot. 

The  detail  drawings  shall  show  all  details,  dimensions  and 
bills  of  material  for  the  complete  fabrication  of  the  work,  and 
the  assembly  drawing  shall  indicate  all  shop  marks  of  the 
various  parts  of  the  special  work,  and  a  complete  list  of  the 
parts  to  be  furnished.  Two  (2)  complete  sets  of  prints  of 
these  drawings  shall  be  submitted  to  the  Engineer  for  ap- 
proval. The  Engineer  shall  give  his  criticism  or  approval 
of  such  drawings  within  ten  (10)  days  from  receipt  thereof, 
and  one  set  of  these  prints  shall  be  returned  to  the  Contractor 
marked  approved,  or  approved  as  corrected,  or  such  prints  of  the 
set  as  are  not  so  marked  shall  have  any  corrections  or  additions 
indicated  thereon. 

The  Contractor  shall  make  such  revisions  to  his  draw- 
ings as  indicated  and  again  promptly  submit  two  (2)  prints  for 
approval,  but  in  the  meantime  may  proceed  with  the  work,  in 
so  far  as  covered  by  this  approval,  unless  advised  to  the  con- 
trary. 

When  drawings  are  finally  approved  the  Contractor 
shall  be  so  notified,  and  shall  then  promptly  forward  to  the 
Engineer  for  his  approval  signature  a  set  of  tracings  dupli- 
cated from  the  approved  drawings  for  his  files.  The  Engi- 
neer's signature  on  such  drawings  will  indicate  his  approval 
thereof  and  the  work  shall  be  manufactured  and  inspected 
strictly  in  accordance  with  such  approved  plans. 


202 


SUBDIVISION  14 

MAU.KAHLK    IKON 

14-1.  Rail  braces,  housing  chairs,  frog  clips,  end  inclines, 
head  supports  for  screw  spikes  and  all  other  articles  called  for 
on  the  drawings  or  in  the  specifications,  to  be  made  of  malleable 
iron,  shall  be  manufactured  in  accordance  with  the  drawings 
and  with  the  following  specifications. 

14-2.  Malleable  cast  iron  shall  be  made  by  the  open- 
hearth  or  air  furnace  process.  The  castings  shall  not  con- 
tain over  six  hundredths  (.06)  per  centum  sulphur  or  over 
two  hundred  and  twenty-five  thousandths  (.225)  per  centum 
phosphorus. 

14-3.  The  tensile  strength  of  a  standard  American  Society 
for  Testing  Materials,  1905,  test  bar  shall  not  be  less  than 
forty  thousand  (40,000)  pounds  per  square  inch.  The  elonga- 
tion measured  in  two  (2)  inches  shall  not  be  less  than  two 
and  one-half  (2j/£)  per  centum.  The  transverse  strength  of 
such  a  standard  test  bar,  on  supports  twelve  (12)  inches  apart, 
pressure  being  applied  at  the  center,  shall  not  be  less  than 
three  thousand  (3,000)  pounds,  deflection  being  at  least  one- 
half  (y2)  of  an  inch. 

14-4.  Castings  shall  neither  be  "over"  nor  "under"  an- 
nealed. They  must  have  received  their  full  heat  in  the  oven 
at  least  sixty  (60)  hours.  The  "saggers"  shall  not  be  dumped 
until  the  contents  shall  be  at  least  "blackhot." 

14-5.  Castings  shall  be  true  to  pattern,  free  from  cracks, 
flaws  or  blemishes,  scale  or  shrinkage  cracks,  and  accurately 
fit  all  adjoining  parts.  If  necessary  the  castings  shall  be 
ground  by  the  manufacturer  to  insure  the  fit  specified. 

14-6.  Castings  must  be  shipped  in  an  approved  manner 
to  guard  against  loss  or  breakage  in  transit,  and  wherever 
possible  shall  be  bundled  for  convenience  in  handling  at  des- 
tination. 


203 


SUBDIVISION  15 
GRAY  CAST  IRON 

15-1.  Washers,  fillers,  separators  and  all  other  articles 
called  for  on  the  drawings  or  in  the  specifications  to  be  made  of 
cast  iron  shall  be  manufactured  in  accordance  with  the  draw- 
ings and  with  the  following  specifications. 

15-2.  Cast  iron  shall 'be  taken  to  mean  gray  cast  iron 
made  by  the  cupola  process.  The  chemical  composition  shall 
be  as  follows : 

Silicon    i. 60  to  i.So  per  centum 

Phosphorus 50  to     .80  per  centum 

Sulphur  not  to  exceed  .15  per  centum 

Manganese    30  to     .60  per  centum 

Total  Carbon  3.00  to  4.00  per  centum 

Borings  as  ordered  by  the  Inspector  from  the  broken  pieces  of 
the  "Arbitration  Bar"  shall  be  used  for  the  chemical  deter- 
minations. In  case  of  dispute,  the  standard  of  the  American 
Foundry  Men's  Association  shall  be  used  for  comparison. 

15-3.  The  minimum  breaking  strength  of  the  American 
Society  for  Testing  Materials  "Arbitration  Bar"  shall  be  not 
under  three  thousand  three  hundred  (3,300)  pounds.  In  no 
case  shall  the  deflection  be  under  one-tenth  (.1)  of  an  inch. 
The  transverse  test  shall  be  made  with  the  supports  twelve 
(12)  inches  apart,  load  applied  at  the  middle  and  the  deflec- 
tion at  rupture  noted.  Rate  of  application  of  a  load  shall  be 
from  twenty  (20)  to  forty  (40)  seconds  for  a  deflection  of  one- 
tenth  (.1)  of  an  inch. 

15-4.  Castings  shall  be  true  to  pattern,  free  from  cracks, 
flaws  or  excessive  shrinkage  and  accurately  fit  all  adjoining 
parts.  If  necessary  the  castings  shall  be  ground  by  the  manu- 
facturer to  insure  the  fit  specified. 

15-5.  Castings  must  be  shipped  in  an  approved  manner  to 
guard  against  loss  or  breakage  in  transit,  and  wherever  possi- 
ble shall  be  bundled  for  convenience  in  handling  at  destination. 


204 


SUBDIVISION  16 
CAST  MANGANESE 

1 6- 1.  Housing  bars,  frog  and  switch  inserts  and  all  other 
articles  called  for  on  the  drawings  or  in  the  specifications  to  be 
made  of  cast  manganese  shall  be  manufactured  in  accordance 
with  the  drawings  and  with  the  following  specifications. 

16-2.  The  chemical  composition  shall  be  within  the  fol- 
lowing limits : 

Manganese  not  less  tha'n  ten  (10)  per  centum 

not  more  than  fourteen  (14)  per  centum 
Carbon          not  less  than  one  (i)  per  centum 

not  more  than  one  and  forty  one-hundredth^ 

(1.40)  per  centum 

Phosphorus  not  more  than  ten  one-hundredths   (.10)   per 
centum 

16-3.  The  physical  properties  shall  be  determined  as  fol- 
lows:  A  rough  cast  specimen  three-quarters  (£4)  of  an  inch 
by  one-half  (l/>)  of  an  inch  shall  be  bent  cold  flat  around  a 
diameter  of  one  (i)  inch  to  an  angle  of  one  hundred  eighty 
(i So)  degrees  without  signs  of  breaking.  The  bend  may  be 
accomplished  by  pressure  or  by  blows. 

16-4.  All  castings  shall  be  true  to  pattern  and  free  from 
cracks,  flaws  or  excessive  shrinkage  and  accurately  fit  all  ad- 
joining parts.  If  necessary,  the  casting  shall  be  ground  by 
the  manufacturer  to  insure  the  fit  specified. 

16-5.  Castings  must  be  shipped  in  an  approved  manner  to 
guard  against  loss  or  breakage  in  transit. 


205 


SUBDIVISION  17 
INSTALLATION  OF  ALL  TYPES  OF  TRACKS 

17-1.  All  tracks  shall  be  laid  true  to  the  lines  given  by  the 
Commission  and  shall  conform  to  the  alignment  drawings. 

17-2.  The  line  on  the  profile  shown  on  the  alignment  draw- 
ings represents  the  base  of  rail  at  the  center  line  of  the  track  or 
under  the  low  rail,  as  specified  for  the  particular  type  of  track. 
All  tracks  shall  be  laid  true  to  the  grades  given  by  the  Commission, 
and  surfaced  for  good  riding  at  speed.  The  track  level  must  be 
used  in  surfacing  all  tracks. 

17-3.  An  approved  track  gauge  shall  be  used  to  gauge  all 
tracks.  The  change  in  gauge  shall  be  gradual  and  uniform  and  be 
obtained  by  spreading  or  pulling  in  both  rails  an  equal  amount  in 
order  to  retain  the  theoretical  center  line  of  tracks  shown  on  the 
drawings. 

Tracks  on  tangents  and  on  curves  down  to  and  including  five 
hundred  and  one  (501)  feet  radius  shall  have  a  gauge  of  four 
feet  eight  and  one-half  inches  (4'  8^/2")  and  a  flangeway  of  one 
and  three-quarters  inches  (i^3">-  ®n  a11  other  curves  and  in 
special  work,  the  gauge  and  flangeway  shall  be  as  indicated  on  the 
drawings. 

17-4.  On  curves  not  in  special  work  the  outer  rail  shall  be 
elevated  as  directed  by  the  Commission  and  as  indicated  on  the 
drawings,  generally  in  accordance  with  the  following  formula  : 

V2  x  3.7745 
E  =  -  in  which 

R 
V    represents  speed  in  miles  per  hour,  to  be  determined 

by  Engineer; 

E    represents  superelevation  in  inches  ; 
R    represents  radius  in  feet. 


Maximum  value  of  E  to  be  six  and  one-half  (6j^)  inches. 
The  rate  of  increase  or  decrease  of  run  off  or  approach  on  un- 
spiralled  curves  shall  be  as  directed  by  the  Commission  and  in  gen- 


206 


SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION  OF  ALL  TYPES  OF  TRACKS 

eral  for  elevations  of  five  (5)  inches  and  under  shall  be  one-half 
(l/2)  inch  in  thirty-three  (33)  feet  and  for  elevation  over  five 
(5)  inches  the  run  off  or  approach  shall  not  exceed  three  hundred 
and  thirty  (330)  feet.  The  run  off  or  approach  shall  begin  or 
end  at  the  point  of  spiral  on  spiralled  curves. 

17-5.  Rail  joints  shall  be  staggered,  the  joint  on  one  rail 
coming  nearly  opposite  the  center  on  the  other  rail.  Thirty  (30) 
foot  lengths  of  rails  shall  be  used  on  the  inside  of  curves  when 
necessary  to  bring  about  these  conditions.  All  joints  in  running 
rail  shall  be  two  (2)  tie  suspended  with  the  joint  midway  between 
the  two  ties.  Joints  in  guard  rail  shall  be  placed  between  the 
joints  in  the  running  rail  wherever  possible. 

17-6.     In  laying  tracks  care  must  be  taken  to  prevent  bumping 

of  rails.     The  distance  between  rail  ends  at  all  joints  shall  be 

gauged  according  to  the  temperature  at  which  the  rails  are  laid. 

The  openings  between  ends  of  thirty-three   (33)    foot  rails 

for  different  Fahrenheit  temperatures  shall  be  as  follows: 

Amount  of 
opening  for 
Temperature  (Fahrenheit)  33  ft.  rail 

From  10  deg.  below  to  14  deg.  above  zero 5/16  inch 

From  14  deg.  above  to  38  deg.  above  zero.  . . : %  inch 

From  38  deg.  above  to  62  deg.  above  zero 3/16  inch 

From  62  deg.  above  to  86  deg.  above  zero y$  inch 

From  86  deg.  above  to  no  deg.  above  zero 1/16  inch 

Observations  are  to  be  made  of  actual  temperature  at  points 
where  rails  are  to  be  placed. 

The  space  between  the  rails  at  insulated  joints  where  indicated 
by  the  Engineer  shall  be  one-half  (l/2)  of  an  inch. 

Metal  shims,  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  must  be  used  for  the 
purpose  of  spacing  rails  at  the  joints. 

17-7.  Splice  bars  as  shown  on  the  drawings  shall  be  used 
in  the  positions  indicated.  They  shall  be  greased  or  oiled  to 
facilitate  driving  the  bar  to  a  snug  fit  against  the  head  and  base 
of  the  rail.  No  bolts  shall  be  placed  until  such  a  fit  is  obtained. 
The  splice  bars  shall  be  bolted  to  the  rails  with  four  bolts,  which 


207 


SPECIFICATIONS — INSTALLATION   OF  ALL  TYPES  OF  TRACKS 

shall  be  applied  with  their  heads  alternately  inside  and  outside 
of  the  rail  except  on  guarded  curves,  when  the  bolts  shall  be 
applied  in  the  low  rails  with  the  heads  on  the  outside  of  the 
running  rail.  No  nut-locks  will  be  required  at  rail  joints.  The 
nuts  shall  be  screwed  up  tight  with  an  approved  track  wrench. 
Extra  long  handles  on  wrenches  will  not  be  permitted.  Care 
must  be  taken  to  hold  the  head  tight  against  the  projection  in 
the  upper  part  of  the  bar  to  prevent  damage  to  such  projection 
or  the  head  of  the  bolt  while  tightening  the  nut. 

17-8.  Wherever  it  is  necessary  to  connect  new  rails  to  old 
rails  or  to  rails  of  a  different  section,  care  must  be  taken  to  keep 
the  gauge  side  and  top  of  the  rails  continuous.  For  this  purpose 
step-up  or  compromise  joints  of  a  design  and  material  approved 
by  the  Engineer  shall  be  furnished  and  installed  by  the  Con- 
tractor. A  short  length  of  the  new  rail  shall  be  used  for  the 
junction  rail  in  the  new  work. 

17-9.  All  rails  to  be  installed  under  these  specifications, 
unless  otherwise  specifically  called  for,  shall  conform  to  the 
American  Railway  Association  Standard  Type  "B"  one  hundred 
(100)  pound  section,  approved  1912.  All  running  rails  in  tan- 
gents and  on  curves  having  a  radius  of  seven  hundred  and  one 
(701)  feet  or  longer,  and  in  other  locations  specified,  shall  be 
of  No.  i  quality  open-hearth  steel.  All  running  rails  in  curves 
of  less  than  seven  hundred  and  one  (701)  feet  radius,  and 
wherever  else  specified,  shall  be  of  manganese  steel. 

17-10.  Guard  rails  shall  be  installed  against  the  inside  rails 
of  all  curves  of  less  than  two  thousand  (2,000)  feet  radius  and 
shall  extend  to  a  point  at  least  ten  (10)  feet  on  to  the  adjacent 
tangents.  All  guard  rails  shall  be  of  No.  I  or  No.  2  quality 
open-hearth  steel,  and  shall  be  bent  inward  at  their  ends  for  a 
length  of  three  (3)  feet  and  fitted  with  a  standard  end  incline. 
Care  must  be  taken  to  get  a  smooth  curve  at  the  point  of  bend. 

Standard  malleable  iron  rail  braces  shall  be  applied  to  guard 
rails  at  every  third  tie,  and  to  outside  rails  at  every  other  tie  on 
all  curves  of  less  than  seven  hundred  and  one  (.701)  feet  radius. 
These  rail  braces  shall  be  full  spiked  to  the  tie  with  screw 
spikes,  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 


208 


SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION   OF  ALL   TVI'KS  OF  TRACKS 

1 7-1 1.  In  the  process  of  laying,  lifting  or  surfacing,  par- 
ticular care  must  be  taken  to  prevent  the  bending  of  the  rails 
by  the  use  of  construction  trains  or  otherwise.  The  rails 
shall  be  skidded  off  the  cars  by  the  method  indicated  on  the 
drawings  or  any  other  similar  method  approved  by  the  Engineer 
and  shall  in  no  case  be  dropped  from  the  side  of  cars  or  from 
any  other  point.  In  skidding  the  rails  from  the  cars  care  must 
be  taken  that  they  do  not  strike  other  rails. 

17-12.  The  rails  for  use  in  curves  of  less  than  twenty-five 
hundred  (2,500)  feet  radius  shall  be  properly  curved,  using  an 
approved  rail  bending  machine.  Rails  for  use  in  curves  of 
greater  radius  than  twenty-five  hundred  (2,500)  feet  may  be 
spiked  and  sprung  to  the  proper  curve.  Precautions  must  be 
taken  to  obtain  a  uniform  curve  throughout  the  rail. 

17-13.  All  short  lengths  of  rail  furnished  by  the  manu- 
facturer shall  be  grouped  into  one  part  of  the  work,  except 
such  short  lengths  as  are  absolutely  necessary  to  fill  in  on  the 
run  off  or  approach  of  curves  or  in  any  other  location  ap- 
proved by  the  Engineer. 

All  special  length  open-hearth  rails  necessary  to  complete 
the  work  shall  be  cut  in  the  field  by  the  Contractor  and  shall 
be  sawed  square  across  the  rail.  A  variation  of  more  than 
one-thirty-second  (1/32)  of  an  inch  will  not  be  accepted.  All 
burrs  shall  be  removed  and  ends  made  smooth.  Use  of  spe- 
cial length  rails  will  not  be  permitted  unless  specifically  or- 
dered by  the  Engineer. 

17-14.  Special  lengths  of  open-hearth  rail  cut  in  the  field, 
as  specified  above,  shall  be  drilled  by  the  Contractor  with 
circular  holes  for  splice  bars,  as  indicated  on  the  drawings.  All 
guard  rails  and  guarded  open-hearth  rails  shall  be  drilled  in 
the  field  for  separator  bolts.  Before  such  drilling  is  done  the 
running  and  guard  rails  shall  be  set  up  on  tie-plates  and  the 
standard  splice  bars  installed  and  joint  space  provided  as 
specified  and  then  the  holes  shall  be  drilled  through  the  rails. 
Such  holes  shall  be  spaced  not  more  than  three  (3)  feet  cen- 
ters, conform  accurately  to  the  dimensions  shown,  be  free 
from  burrs  and  be  cylindrical  and  not  conical.  All  holes  in 
rails  shall  be  drilled  and  not  punched. 

209 


SPECIFirATiONS—  -INSTALLATION    OF  ALL  TYPES  OF  TRACKS 

17-15.  The  guard  rails  shall  be  bolted  to  the  running  rails 
at  intervals  not  exceeding  three  (3)  feet  by  standard  fifteen- 
sixteenths  (15/16)  of  an  inch  steel  bolts  with  a  nut  lock  under 
the  nut.  The  heads  of  all  bolts  shall  be  placed  outside  of  the 
running  rail,  and  nuts  must  be  screwed  up  tight  with  an  ap- 
proved track  wrench.  Extra  long  handles  on  wrenches  will 
not  be  permitted.  Standard  separators  shall  be  installed  be- 
tween the  guard  rails  and  running  rail  at  each  point  where 
these  rails  are  bolted  together.  The  proper  size  separator 
shall  be  installed  to  insure  the  flangeway  specified. 

17-16.  Tie  plates  shall  be  used  under  all  rails  on  all  ties, 
except  where  the  type  of  joint  makes  a  plate  unnecessary.  Tie 
plates  must  be  placed  with  the  shoulder  tight  against  the  out- 
side base  of  rail  and  care  must  be  taken  to  get  a  full,  level  and 
even  bearing  on  the  tie. 

Wherever  it  is  necessary  to  fit,  punch  or  rivet  tie  plates  in 
the  field,  fitting,  punching  or  riveting  shall  be  carefully  and 
accurately  done  to  insure  a  full  bearing  of  all  the  parts  as- 
sembled. 

17-17.  The  rails  shall  be  spiked  to  each  tie  through  a  tie 
plate.  No  spiking  shall  be  done  until  after  the  ties  have  been 
carefully  spaced  and  squared  across  the  center  line  of  the 
track  on  tangents,  and  placed  in  a  radial  position  on  curves 
and  the  shoulder  of  the  tie  plate  brought  to  bear  snugly 
against  the  base  of  rail.  The  spikes  shall  be  placed  diagonally 
on  the  opposite  side  of  the  rails  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  The  in- 
side spikes  shall  be  placed  on  the  north  or  west  side  of  the 
ties  and  the  two  outside  spikes  on  the  south  or  east  side  of 
the  ties. 

The  number  of  spikes  to  be  used  per  tie  on  each  rail  shall 
be  as  follows : 

i   spike  on  both  sides  of  both  rails  on  tangents 

i  spike  on  both  sides  of  inside  guarded  rail  on  curves 

i  spike  on  outside  of  outside  rail  on  curves 

1  spike  on  side  of  guard  rail  nearest  center  of  track 

2  spikes  on  inside  of  outside  rail  on  curves 

2  spikes  on  inside  of  unguarded  inside  rail  on  curves. 


2IO 


SPECIFICATIONS — INSTALLATION   OF   ALL  TYl'KS  <>!•    TRACKS 

17-18.  Cut  spikes  must  be  driven  normal  to  the  base  of 
rail  and  straight,  and  care  must  be  used  when  spiking  to  avoid 
striking  the  rail  or  tie  pla.j.  The  spikes  shall  not  be  struck 
after  they  have  reached  a  bearing  on  the  rail  and  the  last 
blow  on  the  .cpike  must  be  struck  lightly  so  as  to  avoid 
breaking  the  head  of  the  spike  or  injuring  the  rail  when  til.' 
spike  comes  to  a  bearing  on  the  rail.  If,  for  any  reason,  a 
;-pike  is  drawn,  the  hole  shall  be  filled  with  a  hardwood  plug. 
Wherever  practicable  the  spike  shall  be  redriven  in  a  new- 
location.  Wherever  it  is  necessary  to  drive  a  spike  within 
six  (6)  inches  of  the  end  of  a  tie,  a.  three-eighths  (-Hs)  of  an 
inch  by  four  (4)  inch  hole  shall  be  bored  in  the  tie. 

17-19.  Screw  spikes  must  be  screwed  normal  to  the  base 
of  rail  and  straight,  and  must  always  be  provided  with  a 
:•  upport  for  the  back  of  the  head.  If  this  support  is  not  rolled 
on  the  tie  plate,  standard  clips  must  be  inserted  for  the  pur- 
pose of  providing  such  support.  Great  care  shall  be  taken 
in  making  the  final  turn  of  the  screw  not. to  turn  it  too  far. 
The  last  turn  shall  be  so  made  that  the  spike  just  comes  in 
contact  with  the  support.  Attention  is  called  to  the  one- 
sixteenth  (1/16)  of  an  inch  clearance  which  is  provided  be- 
tween the  top  of  the  base  of  rail  and  the  bottom  of  the  head 
of  the  spike.  If  it  is  found  necessary  to  unscrew  any  of  the 
spikes,  care  must  be  taken  in  replacing  not  to  destroy  the 
thread  in  the  wood.  If  f^r  any  reason  a  new  hole  is  desired, 
the  old  hole  shall  be  filled  with  a  hardwood  plug.  Under  no 
circumstances  shall  a  screw  spike  be  driven  by  any  other 
method  than  by  screwing  and  it  shall  never  be  struck  or 
pounded. 

17-20.  Ties  used  shall  be  of  the  class,  dimensions  and 
spacing  specified  under  the  various  types  of  track.  Ties  shall 
be  placed  square  across  the  center  line  of  track  on  tangents 
and  in  a  radial  position  on  curves.  In  spacing  and  squaring 
the  ties  before  spiking,  the  rails  shall  be  raised  and  ties  shifted 
to  their  proper  position  without  striking  or  pounding  them 
with  mallets,  picks  or  any  other  implement.  Any  ties  that 
are  split  or  damaged  in  laying  or  placing  shall  be  removed  by 
the  Contractor  and  new  material  substituted.  The  heart  side  of 
all  ties,  except  beveled  ties,  shall  be  turned  down.  The  ends  shall 

211 


SPECIFICATIONS — INSTALLATION   OF  ALL  TYPES  OF  TRACKS 

be  lined  evenly  on  the  side  of  the  track  specified  under  the  various 
types  of  tracks. 

17-21.  Joint  ties  shall  be  spaced  not  exceeding  ten  (10) 
inches  between  bearing  surfaces  at  edges  under  the  joint. 
Intermediate  ties  shall  be  spaced  equally  and  so  that  there  will 
be  not  more  than  eighteen  (18)  inches  between  edges  of  two 
adjacent  ties  under  the  rails,  except  in  yards,  where  twenty 
(20)  inches  will  be  permitted. 

17-22.  Long  ties  for  the  support  of  the  third  (or  power) 
rail  shall  be  installed  as  shown  on  the  drawings  and  as 
directed  by  the  Commission  and  in  such  manner  as  not  to  obtain 
a  greater  spacing  than  ten  (10)  feet  center  to  center.  Care 
must  be  taken  in  placing  the  third  rail  ties  to  obtain  the  proper 
distance  from  the  gauge  of  rail  to  the  third  rail  supporting 
end  of  third  rail  tie.  In  the  subsurface  portion  of  the  Railroad, 
the  third  rail  ties  shall  be  placed  between  the  columns  supporting 
the  structure  and  never  opposite  a  column. 

17-23.  Anti-creepers  shall  be  installed  with  the  wedges  in 
such  a  position  that  they  will  prevent  the  rails  from  creeping 
wifh  trafBc.  Care  must  always  be  taken  to  bring  the  wedge 
in  contact  with  the  tie  before  the  clamp  is  driven  home.  In 
driving  clamps  tight  they  must  not  be  driven  with  sufficient 
force  to  gouge  the  lower  side  of  the  wedge.  It  is  only  neces- 
sary to  obtain  a  snug  fit.  Such  number  of  anti-creeping  de- 
vices shall  be  provided  as  may  be  necessary  in  the  opinion  of 
the  Commission.  In  general,  three  (3)  anti-creepers  to  the  rail 
shall  be  installed  on  tracks  alongside  of  station  platforms,  and 
on  tracks  outside  of  station  platforms  one  (i)  to  the  rail  for 
each  one  (i)  per  centum  or  fraction  thereof  of  down  grade 
and  one  (i)  to  the  rail  for  each  two  (2)  per  centum  or  fraction 
thereof  of  upgrade,  and  in  no  case  shall  less  than  one  (i)  anti- 
creeper  to  the  rail  be  used.  The  anti-creepers  shall  be  spaced 
uniform  distances  apart.  Wherever  possible  those  on  oppo- 
site rails  shall  be  brought  to  bear  on  the  same  tie. 

17-24.  Passenger  bumping  posts,  of  a  design  approved  by 
the  Commission,  shall  be  installed  at  the  ends  of  tracks  where 
and  as  shown  on  the  drawings.  The  posts  shall  be  securely 
anchored  to  insure,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer,  a  sufficient 
amount  of  holding  power  to  perform  the  work  for  which  they 
are  designed. 

212 


SUBDIVISION  18 
INSTALLATION  OF  TYPE  I  TRACK 

18-1.  Type  I  Track,  a  ballasted  type  of  track,  shall  be 
used  in  the  subsurface  and  open  cut  portions  of  the  Railroad. 
The  track  shall  be  laid  in  accordance  with  the  general  sp>eci- 
iications  given  for  the  installation  of  tracks,  and  with  the  fol- 
lowing specifications  of  special  details  and  operations  hereiri 
enumerated  as  applicable  only  to  Type  I  Track.  This  type 
of  track  shall  be  installed  where  and  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 

1 8-2.  Class  A  ballast  shall  be  used  in  Type  I  Track  and 
shall  be  thoroughly  tamped,  using  approved  track  appliances, 
under  the  ties  from  the  ends  of  the  ties  to  a  point  at  least  fif- 
teen (15)  inches  inside  of  the  center  of  the  rails.  The  long 
ties  for  the  support  of  third  rails  shall  be  tamped  from  a  point 
opposite  the  end  of  the  standard  ties  to  a  point  at  least  fifteen 
(15)  inches  inside  of  the  center  of  the  rail.  The  ends  of  the 
third  rail  ties  outside  of  this  area  shall  not  be  tamped.  The 
rails  shall  be  carefully  raised  in  at  least  two  lifts  to  the  es- 
tablished grade.  The  ballast  .must  be  leveled  even  with  the 
top  of  the  tie  and  neatly  trimmed  before  final  completion  of 
the  work. 

18-3.  Class  A  ties,  six  inches  by  eight  inches  by  eight  feet 
(6"xS"x8')  shall  be  used  in  Type  I  Track.  The  long  ties  for 
the  support  of  third  rail  shall  be  six  inches  by  eight  inches  by 
nine  feet  one  inch  (6"x8"x9'  i").  The  ends  shall  be  lined  on 
the  side  of  the  tracks  opposite  the  third  rail  location.  Eighteen 
(18)  ties  shall  be  used  under  a  thirty-three  (33)  foot  rail,  ex- 
cept on  sharp  curves  where  it  may  be  necessary  to  increase 
this  number  to  prevent  exceeding  the  maximum  spacing. 

18-4.  The  superelevation  in  this  type  of  track  shall  be 
obtained  by  raising  the  high  rail  and  lowering  the  low  rail 
one-half  (y^)  of  the  total  amount  of  the  superelevation  speci- 
fied. The  line  on  the  profile  on  the  alignment  drawings 
marked  base  of  rail,  shall  be  taken  as  the  line  of  the  base  of 
rail  at  the  center  line  of  the  track. 


213 


SUBDIVISION  20 
INSTALLATION  OF  TYPE  III  TRACK 

20- 1.  Type  111  Track,  an  all  timber  type  of  track,  is  particu- 
larly designed  for  use  on  the  elevated  portion  of  the  Railroad. 
The  track  shall  be  laid  in  accordance  with  the  general  specifica- 
tions given  for  the  installation  of  tracks  and  with  the  following 
specifications  of  special  details  and  operations  herein  enumer- 
ated as  applicable  only  to  Type  III  Track.  This  type  of  track 
shall  be  installed  where  and  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 

20-2.  Class  D  ties,  eight  inches  by  eight  inches  by  eight  fee' 
(8"x8"x8'-o")  shall  be  used  in  the  Type  "ill  Track,  except  on 
superelevated  curves.  The  long  ties  for  the  support  of  the  third 
rail  shall  be  nine  feet  five  inches  (9'- 5")  long.  The  ends  of  all 
ties  shall  be  lined  on  the  side  of  the  tracks  opposite  the  third  rail 
location.  The  ties  shall  be  spaced  approximately  eighteen  (18) 
inches  center  to  center  throughout  the  Type  III  Track.  Class 
D  beveled  ties,  or  blocks,  eight  (8)  inches  wide  and  of  length 
and  depth  indicated  on  the  drawings,  shall  be  used  on  super- 
elevated  curves  in  Type  III  Track.  The  ties  shall  be  carefully 
dapped  and  fitted  to  obtain  a  smooth  and  uniform  rise  in  the  out- 
side rail. 

No  ties  shall  be  dapped  except  where  it  is  necessary  to  obtain 
a  uniform  grade  or  where  there  are  rivets  on  top  of  the  girders 
or  under  special  work.  The  dapping  shall  be  carefully  done 
where  necessary  and  the  surface  of  the  timber  made  smooth. 

20-3.  The  superelevation  of  this  type  of  track  shall  be  ob- 
tained by  raising  the  outside  rail  the  total  amount  of  supereleva- 
tion specified.  The  line  on  the  profile  on  the  alignment  drawings 
marked  base  of  rail  shall  be  taken  as  the  line  of  the  base  of  low 
rail. 

20-4.  Each  end  of  each  tie  shall  be  secured  to  the  supporting 
girders  by  means  of  a  hook  bolt  with  the  nut  bearing  on  an  oblong 
washer.  These  bolts  shall  be  placed  on  the  center  line  of  the  ties 
and  shall  be  fitted  snugly  to  the  girder  flanges  with  the  hook 
square  to  the  web  of  the  girder. 


214 


SPECIFICATIONSr-INSTALLATION   OF  TVPIC    III   TRACK 

20-5.  Where  hook  bolts  cannot  be  placed  in  a  standard  loca- 
tion or  where  they  will  be  inaccessible  if  so  placed  or  where  th:.' 
will  interfere  with  the  rail  or  special  work,  they  shall  be  located 
as  directed  by  the  Engineer,  and  if  so  directed  they  shall  be  set  in 
cup  washers. 

20-6.  On  curves,  in  special  work  and  in  other  locations 
where  it  is  impossible  to  install  hook  bolts,  lag  screws  shall  be 
used  to  secure  the  ties  to  the  girders.  These  lag  screws  shall 
be  driven  snug  against  the  flange  of  the  girder. 

20-7.  Two  lines  of  inside  guard  timbers  and  two  lines  of  out- 
side guard  timbers  shall  be  laid  for  each  track,  except  in  special 
work,  at  stations  and  on  curves  where  steel  guard  rail  is  used. 
The  guard  timbers  in  special  work  shall  be  placed  as  shown  on 
the  drawings ;  two  lines  of  outside  guard  timbers  shall  be  laid  at 
all  stations  as  indicated  on  drawings;  two  lines  of  outside  guard 
timbers  shall  be  laid  on  all  curves.  All  guards  shall  be  Class  D 
timbers.  All  inside  guard  timbers  shall  be  six  inches  by  six 
inches  (6"x6").  All  outside  guard  timbers,  except  on  curves 
with  a  radius  of  less  than  two  hundred  (200)  feet,  shall  be  six 
inches  by  eight  inches  (6"x8"),  laid  with  the  eight  (8)  inch 
dimension  in  a  vertical  position.  On  curves  with  a  radius  of 
less  than  two  hundred  (200)  feet  the  outside  guard  shall  con- 
sist of  not  less  than  two  (2)  three  (3)  inch  planks  set  on  edge 
and  securely  bolted  to  each  other  by  three-quarter  (^J)  inch 
button  head  bolts,  countersunk  in  cup  washers,  placed  abo-.n 
eighteen  (18)  inches  center  to  center  and  the  whole  securely 
fastened  to  the  ties  in  the  manner  hereinafter  described.  Guard 
timbers  shall  be  placed  true  to  line  and  position  and  concentric 
with  the  centerline  of  the  tracks,  and  shall  be  framed  and  joined 
in  a  careful  and  workmanlike  manner.  The  timbers  shall  be 
selected,  as  far  as  possible,  of  such  lengths  and  shall  be  placed 
at  such  a  position  as  to  break  joints  with  the  other  lengths  of 
guard  timbers  and  with  the  joints  of  the  running  and  guard  rails 
of  the  same  track. 

20-8.  The  guard  timbers  shall  be  bolted  to  the  ties  with 
bolts  in  the  manner  and  location  shown  on  the  drawings  and 
the  nuts  placed  in  standard  cup  washers.  Care  must  be  taken  to 


21 


SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION    OF    TYPE    III    TRACK 

place  the  top  of  the  cup 'washer  flush  with  or  below  the  top  of 
the  timber.  All  bolts  projecting  above  the  surface  of  the  timber 
shall  be  cut  off  flush  with  the  top  of  such  timbers. 

20-9.  Where  standard  bolts  cannot  be  installed  in  guard  tim- 
bers as  specified  the  guard  timbers  shall  be  fastened  by  means  of 
lag  screws  set  in  standard  cup  washers. 

20-10.  All  holes  drilled  for  bolts  and  lag  screws  in  ties  and 
timbers  and  all  bolts  and  lag  screws  shall  be  in  a  vertical  posi- 
tion and  square  to  top  surface  of  the  tie  or  timber  and  shall  be 
placed  accurately  in  the  location  indicated.  Holes  for  bolts  and 
cup  washers  shall  be  bored  of  a  size  to  insure  a  driving  fit.  Holes 
shall  be  drilled  for  all  lag  screws  of  a  diameter  one-eighth  (^) 
of  an  inch  less  than  the  diameter  of  the  lag  screw  at  the  base 
of  the  thread.  The  auger  used  for  boring  holes  for  cup  washers 
shall  be  provided  with  a  stop  to  insure  the  cup  washers  being  ex- 
actly flush  with  the  surface  of  the  timbers. 

20-11.  All  timber  bolts  shall  be  dipped,  immediately  before 
being  placed  in  position,  in  tallow. 

20- 1 2.  Foot  walks  shall  be  constructed  where  and  as 
shown  on  the  drawings,  and  shall  consist  of  four  lengths  of 
slatting  laid  side  by  side  and  continuously,  except  at  special  work, 
stations  and  any  other  points  where  special  construction  is 
called  for,  where  they  shall  be  placed  as  shown  on  the  draw- 
ings. The  inside  walks  shall  be  supported  on  joists  spaced  four 
feet  six  inches  (4'-6")  apart  and  outside  walks  on  ties  twelve 
feet  six  inches  (i2'-6")  long.  The  slatting  shall  be  Class  D  two 
inches  by  six  inches  (2"x6")  and  of  random  lengths  varying 
upward  in  multiples  of  four  feet  six  inches  (4'-6")  from  eigh- 
teen (18)  feet.  The  joists  shall  be  Class  D  four  inches  by  eight 
inches  (4"x8")  and  eight  inches  by  eight  inches  (8"x8")  as 
shown  on  the  drawings  by  the  lengths  necessary  to  span  between 
the  girders  with  full  bearing  on  the  girder  flanges  as  indicate  1 
on  the  drawings. 

20-13.  Every  other  joist  shall  be  securely  fastened  to  the 
girders  by  means  of  two  standard  hook  bolts  as  indicated  on 
the  drawings. 

216 


SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION    OF    '\\  1'K    III    TRACK 

.0-14.  Lengths  of  slatting  -hall  be  selected  and  placed,  as 
far  as  possible,  so  that  not  more  than  one  joint  shall  fall  on 
the  same  support.  Except  at  joints,  slatting  shall  be  fas- 
tened to  each  support  by  two  (2)  twenty  (20)  penny  cut  nails. 
At  joints  two  (2)  nails  shall  be  driven  in  at  each  end  of  each 
piece  of  slatting.  All  nails  shall  be  driven  with  the  long 
diameter  of  the  head  with  the  grain  of  the  wood. 

20-15.  Wherever  track  timbers  are  brought  together  or 
rest  upon  each  other  as  at  joints  and  where  guard  timbers  or 
slatting  rest  upon  supports,  the  contact  surfaces  shall  be  care- 
fully painted  with  an  approved  paint  before  being  assembled. 

20-16.  After  the  guard  timbers  are  set  in  place  and  com- 
pletely bolted  and  fastened  to  the  supporting  structure  the  top 
surfaces  shall  be  painted  one  coat  of  paint.  All  exposed  sur- 
faces at  all  joints  in  the  guard  timbers  shall  be  painted  after 
assembly.  All  surfaces  which  are  adzed  or  dapped  and  the 
inside  of  the  large  holes  bored  for  cup  washers  shall  be  cov- 
ered with  a  thick  coat  of  paint. 

20-17.  The  paint  to  be  used  on  the  contact  surfaces  and 
other  parts  specified  above  shall  consist  of  metallic  brown  pig- 
ment having  not  less  than  sixty  (60)  per  centum  ferric  oxide ; 
raw  linseed  oil  and  Japan  dryer  in  the  proportions  of  approxi- 
mately fifty  (50)  per  centum  pigment  and  fifty  (50)  per 
centum  vehicle  and  dryer  combined.  This  paint  shall  be  made 
of  first  class  material  and  shall  be  satisfactory  to  the  Engineer. 

20-18.  Standard  hand  railing  of  a  quality  of  material  and 
details  shown  on  the  drawings  shall  be  installed  on  the  out- 
side of  all  outside  walks  and  at  any  other  point  indicated  by 
the  Commission. 

20-19.  The  various  parts  of  the  hand  rail  shall  be  care- 
fully fitted  together  and  securely  fastened  in  a  first  class 
workmanlike  manner  to  insure  against  any  danger  of  the  part.^ 
loosening  or  rattling  after  operation. 

20-20.  The  hand  rail  shall  be  painted  a  shop  coat,  a  second 
coat  and  a  finishing  coat,  with  paint  of  approved  quality  and 


SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION    OF    TYPE    III    TRACK 

applied  in  the  manner  specified.     The  finishing  coat  shall  be 
an  olive  green  matched  to  sample. 

20-21.  The  shop  coat  shall  consist  of  a  coat  of  red  lead  and 
linseed  oil.  The  paint  for  the  shop  coat  shall  be  mixed  as 
needed,  and  shall  be  a  mixture  of  the  proportion  of  five  hun- 
dred (500)  pounds  of  red  lead  to  sixteen  and  one-half  (16^) 
gallons  of  linseed  oil  (two-thirds  (2/3)  by  volume  raw  and  one- 
third  (1/3)  by  volume  boiled). 

20-22.  Raw  linseed  oil  shall  conform  to  the  specifications 
of  the  American  Society  for  Testing  Materials  for  the  purity 
of  raw  linseed  oil  from  North  American  seed,  adopted  August 

25,  I9I3- 

Boiled  linseed  oil  shall  be  made  of  pure  linseed  oil  heated 
with  lead  and  manganese  salts. 

When  boiled  linseed  oil  is  flowed  over  a  plate  of  glass 
and  allowed  to  drain  in  a  vertical  position,  it'  must  dry  free 
from  tackiness  in  fifteen  (15)  hours  at  seventy  (70)  degrees 
Fahrenheit. 

20-23.  Red  lead  for  the  shop  coat  shall  be  of  the  best 
quality,  free  from  all  adulteration  and  shall  contain  not  less 
than  eighty  (80)  per  centum  nor  more  than  ninety  (90)  per 
centum  "true  red  lead"  (Pb3  O4),  not  over  one  (i)  per  centum 
inert  hearth  materials  (such  as  silica  and  alumina)  and  not 
more  than  one-tenth  (o.i)  per  centum  metallic  lead;  the  re- 
mainder shall  be  pure  lead  monoxide  (PbO).  It  must  contain 
no  organic  coloring  matter  and  when  shaken  up  with  water 
shall  show  no  alkaline  reaction.  It  shall  be  of  such  fineness 
that  ninety-nine  and  one-half  (99^)  per  centum  will  pass 
through  a  standard  2oo-mesh  sieve. 

By  standard  2OO-mesh  sieve  is  meant  the  2OO-mesh  sieve  de- 
scribed in  the  specifications  of  the  American  Society  for  Test- 
ing Materials  for  Portland  Cement,  adopted  August  16,  1909. 

20-24.  All  iron  shall  be  scraped  free  from  scale  and  rust, 
and  shall  receive  one  coat  of  red  lead  paint  as  herein  specified, 
before  leaving  the  shop.  All  surfaces  which  come  in  contact 
or  are  enclosed  shall  be  painted  before  being  assembled.  All 


218 


SPECIFICATIONS — INSTALLATION    OF    TYPE    III    TRACK 

turned  or  faced  surfaces  shall  receive  a  coat  of  white  lead  and 
tallow  before  leaving  the  shops. 

Where  the  shop  coat  has  become  damaged  before  or  after 
erection,  through  any  cause  whatever,  it  shall  be  renewed 
with  the  same  kind  of  paint  as  originally  used,  such  renewal 
to  be  considered  only  as  a  part  of  the  original  shop  coat. 

After  erection  the  metal  shall  be  thoroughly  cleaned  of  all 
dirt,  rust  or  scale  by  stiff  wire  brushes  or  sand  blast,  as 
directed,  and  afterward  dusted  and  thoroughly  and  evenly 
painted  with  the  second  coat  prescribed  herein.  No  paint  shall 
be  applied  until  the  cleaning  has  been  passed  upon  by  an  In- 
spector. 

The  finishing  coat  shall  be  applied  at  such  time  after  the 
application  of  the  second  coat  and  before  final  acceptance  of 
the  work,  as  in  the  judgment  of  the  Engineer  shall  be  advis- 
able. 

20-25.  Surfaces  of  exposed  members  inaccessible  after 
erection,  shall  be  cleaned  and  painted  before  erection. 

All  recesses  that  might  contain  water,  or  through  which 
water  could  enter,  must  be  filled  with  thick  paint  or  a  water- 
proof cement  of  ground  skins  before  receiving  a  final  painting. 

All  surfaces  so  close  together  as  to  prevent  the  insertion  of 
a  brush  must  be  painted  thoroughly  by  using  a  piece  of  cloth, 
if  necessary. 

20-26.  Painting  in  rainy  or  freezing  weather  or  on  wet  or 
damp  surfaces  will  not  be  permitted. 


2*9 


SUBDIVISION  24 
INSTALLATION  OF  SPECIAL  WORK 

24-1.  Special  work  shall  be  laid  in  accordance  with  the 
general  specifications  given  for  the  installation  of  tracks  and 
for  the  installation  of  the  particular  type  of  track  in  which  the 
special  work  is  laid  and  with  the  following  specifications  of 
special  details  and  operations  herein  enumerated  as  applicable 
only  to  the  installation  of  special  work.  Special  work  shall 
be  installed  where  and  as  shown  on  the  drawings. 

24-2.  .Ties  of  the  class  and  section  specified  for  the  type  of 
track  in  which  the  special  work  is  laid,  and  of  a  length  shown 
on  the  drawings,  shall  be  installed  under  all  special  work. 
The  ties  shall  be  accurately  spaced  as  indicated  on  the  draw- 
ings. The  ties  under  single  and  double  slips  shall  be  placed  ac- 
curately at  right  angles  to  a  center  line  drawn  between  the 
theoretical  point  of  frogs.  No  rails  shall  be  spiked  to  the  ties 
until  the  spacing  and  position  of  ties  have  been  carefully 
checked  and  approved  by  the  Engineer. 

24-3.  Particular  care  must  be  taken  in  raising  the  rails, 
frogs  and  switches  to  the  established  grade,  and  to  obtain  a 
good  surface  throughout.  The  ties  under  the  frog  plates  shall 
be  carefully  dapped  to  permit  of  the  installation  of  the  three- 
quarter  (24)  inch  bearing  plate. 

24-4.  The  material  shall  be  carefully  assembled  in  the 
field  and  the  parts  placed  in  their  position,  beginning  prefer- 
ably at  the  frogs.  No  work  trains  shall  be  operated  over  the 
special  work  until  all  of  the  ties  and  tie  plates  have  been 
properly  placed  and  the  rails  set  in  their  position  and  spiked 
sufficiently  to  prevent  damaging  the  material. 

24-5.  Wherever  it  is  necessary  to  do  fitting  in  the  field  all 
work  in  connection  therewith  shall  be  carefully  and  accurately 
done  so  as  not  to  damage  the  material  and  to  insure  a  smooth 
riding  and  safe  track. 

24-6.  All  drilling  required  shall  be  accurately  done  and  the 
holes  made  smooth  and  free  from  burrs. 


220 


SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION     OK     SlM-(  IAL     WORK 

24-7.     Particular  care  must  be  used  in  unloading  and  hand- 
ling material,  particularly  switch  points,  to  prevent  breaking 
and    bending    or    in    any    other    way    damaging    the    material 
Frogs,  switches  and  rails  shall  not  be  dropped  or  thrown  from 
cars  but  must  be  lifted  or  skidded  to  the  ground. 


221 


YC 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


